Nokia 3600 User Manual
User Guide é2003 Nokia Mobile Phones. All rights r eserved. Nokia, the Model 3650, Model 3600 and the Original Acc essories logo ar e either trademarks or r egist ered tr ademarks of Nokia Corpor ation and/or its affiliates. Nokia r eserves the right to mak e changes to pr oducts or specifications without prior notice. Some f eatur es are network dependent. Learn mor e about Nokia at www .nokia.ca. Nokia is list ed on the NYSE (NOK). Nokia Pr oducts Limited 601 Westney Road South, Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 T el: (905) 427-1373 or 1-888-22-NOKIA (1-888-226-6542) F ax: (905) 427-1070 Internet: www .nokia.c a Printed in Canada 9355946
Nokia 3600 series User Guide
The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use in GSM 900, GSM 1800, and GSM 1900 ne two rk s . LEGAL INFORMATI ON P art No. 9355946, Issue No. 1 1 1 Copyright é 2002 Nokia. All rights r eserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting P eople, N okia 3650, Nokia 3600, and t he Nokia Original Accessories logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 03 /2003 US P atent No 58 18437 and other pending pat ents. T9 text input software Copyright é 1999-200 2 . T egic Communication s, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Java is a trade mark of Sun Micr osystems, Inc. The infor mation in this user guide was written fo r Nokia 3600 series phones. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without pri or notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DAT A OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIA L, INCIDEN T AL, AN D CONSEQ UENTIAL OR INDIREC T DAMA GES HO WSOE VER CAUS ED. THE CONTENT S OF THIS DO CUMENT ARE PRO VIDED âÂÂAS IS.â EXCEPT AS REQ UIRED BY APPLICABL E LA W , NO WARRANTIES OF A NY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMP LIED, INCLUDING , BUT NO T LIM ITED T O , TH E IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILI TY AND FITNESS FO R A P ART ICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE M ADE IN R ELA TIO N TO TH E ACCUR ACY AND REL IABILI TY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOCU MENT . NOKIA RESERVES TH E RIGHT TO REVISE THI S DOCUM ENT OR WI THDRA W IT A T A NY TIME WI THOU T PRIOR NO TI CE. EXPORT CONTROLS This product contains commodities, technology or software exported from the United States in accordance with the Expor t Administration regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our phone may cause TV or r adio inte rfer ence (for example, when using a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can r equire you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility . This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. This device contains a radio transceiver and digital circuitry that supports its features. Operation of the digital device circuitry is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference rece ived, including interference that may caus e undesired operation. Modifications to this device not authorized by Nokia may void the authority granted for operation of this device and should not be made.
[ iii ] Contents 1. For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Network Se rvices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2. General inform ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Understand your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 Options lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Move the Navigation bar ho rizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Actions com mon to a ll applic ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3. Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Make a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Answer a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Log - Ca ll log and general log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SIM folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Change general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connection settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Date an d time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Call restriction (System serv i ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Accessory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Create contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Copy contacts between the SIM card and phone memory . . . . 47 Edit contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
[ iv ] Options when viewing a contact card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Manage contact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3 6. Camera an d Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Take pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Store pictures in Im ages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 7. Video recorde r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Record a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Watch a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 8. RealOne Player⢠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Play media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Send media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Change the set tings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9. Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Messaging - General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Write text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2 Create and send new messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6 Inbox - receive mes sa ges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 My folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Remote mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 View messages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Cell broadcast (system service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Service command editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Messaging settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 4 Wireless village . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 00 10. Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Change the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Customize profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
[ v ] 11. Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Add shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03 Shortcut options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 12. Calendar and To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Create calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Set calendar ala rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Send calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 13. Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 11 Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16 Memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 14. Serv ices (XHTML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Basic steps for acc essing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 19 Phone browser service settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Viewing saved pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 23 Download through the browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 End a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25 Browser settin g s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 26 15. Applic ations (Javaâ¢) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Install a Java applic ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 28 Java application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29 16. Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Install applications and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30 Install software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
[ vi ] Remove software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 32 View memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 17. Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Bluetooth c o nnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34 Infrared connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Connect your phone t o a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 41 Use your phone a s a modem to connec t to the Internet or t o send or receive faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 41 18. PC Suite for Nokia 3600 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Software and hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Install PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 43 Connect your phone t o the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Start t o use PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Online and offline modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Main window information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PC Suite applic ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Remove PC Suite from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 19. Reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Battery st at ements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Use proper care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 55 Understand Important safety in f ormation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Certification Information (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 60 Use Accessories safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 69 Frequently Asked questions (FAQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 20. Nokia One-Ye ar Limited Warran ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
[ 1 ] 1 For your safety The use of mobil e phones and the ir ac cess ories may be pro hibit ed or res tr icted in c ertai n a rea s. Ob ey ap plic abl e law reg ardi ng m obi le p hon e u sage. Read these simple gu idelines. B reaking the rules m ay be danger ous or illegal. Further detailed in formation is given in this User Guide. Do not swi tch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause in terference or danger . ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Don't use a h and-held p hone while driving. INT ERFER ENCE All wireless phones may get in terference, w hich could affect performa nce. SWITCH OFF IN H OSPIT ALS Follow any regulatio ns or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OF F IN AIRCR AFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH O FF WH EN R EFU ELING Don't use the ph one at a refuelling point. Don't use near fu el or chemicals. SWITCH OF F NEAR BL ASTING Don't use th e phone where blasting is in progress. Ob serve restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENS IB L Y Use only in th e normal position. Don't t ouch the antenna unne cess arily .
[ 2 ] 1 QUAL IFIED SE RVICE Only qualif ied p erson nel may instal l o r repai r ph one equi pment. AC CES SO RIES AND BA T TER IES Use only appr oved accessories and ba tteries. Do not con n ect incompatible products. WA TER- RESISTANCE Y our phone is not wat e r-resistant. K ee p it dr y . BACKU P COPIE S Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNE CTING T O OTHER DEVICE S When con necting to an y other device, read its user 's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not co nne ct incompatible products. CA LLIN G Ensure th e phone is swi tch ed on and in ser vice. Enter the phon e num ber , inclu ding the ar ea code, then press . T o end a c all , press . To answer a call, press . EMER GENCY CAL LS Ensure th e pho ne is switch ed on and in servic e. Press as ma ny time s as nee ded (e.g. to ex it a ca ll, to exi t a m enu, etc .) to cl ear the di spla y . Ent er the em ergenc y numbe r , the n press . Give your location. Do not end th e call u ntil told to do so.
[ 3 ] For your safety 1 Network Service s The wire less phone de scribed in this gui de is approved f or use on the GS M 900, GSM 180 0, an d GSM 19 00 ne twork s. A number of f eatures included in this guide are called Netw ork Service s. Thes e are spe cial s ervices that you ar range throu gh your wir ele ss se rvice provider . Before you can take advantage of any of th ese Networ k Services, you must subscribe to the m through your service pr ovider and obtai n instructions for their use from your service provider . Note: Some n etworks may n ot supp ort all lan guage-depe ndent char acters and/or services. Check the model number of any charger before us e with this device. This device is intended for u se when su pplied with power from ACP-12U, ACP-8U, LC H-9 a nd LCH- 12. Wa r n i n g : Use only batteries, charger s, and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may in validate any approval or warranty applying to the phone and may be danger ous. For availability of approved accessories, please che ck with your de aler . When you disconnect the pow er cord of any ac ce ssory , grasp and pull the plug, not th e cord.
[ 4 ] 1 Contacti ng Nokia T o help Nokia promptly answer your questions, please have your phoneâÂÂs model number , I MEI number , and your postal code r eady when you call Customer Care. The IMEI and model number are on the back of your phone under the battery . I f you are calling about an accessory , please have it available for reference. Nokia Customer Care Nokia Products Ltd. 60 1 Westne y Rd . S outh Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-90 5- 427-1 37 3 1-88 8- 22-NO KIA (1- 888-2 26 -6 542) F ax: 1-90 5- 427-10 7 0 Web s i t e: www .nokia.ca
[ 5 ] General information 2 2 Gen eral inform ation Congratulations on pu rchasing your Nokia 3600 series mobile phone. Y our phone provides many functions which are practical for daily use, su ch as a digital camera, a video r ecorder , m essaging, e-mail, a clock, an alarm clock, a calcu lator , and a ca l endar . A variety of Xpre ss on TM colour covers are also available. Y our phone can connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a data cable, bluetooth, or the bu ilt-in IR port. For more in formation on connectivity , ref er to the PC Connectivity Guide . The PC Connectivity guide, Nokia PC Suite, and all related software can be downloaded fr om the Download Software section of www .nokia.ca. ⢠UNDER STAND YO UR PHONE Insert the SIM card and load the battery Impo rtant : K e ep all m iniature S IM card s out of the reach o f small ch ildr en. Note: Before removing the covers, always switch off the power and disconnect the phone from the charger or any other device. Always s tore and use th e phone with the cover s attached. 1 Open th e cover w ith the back of the ph one facing you . Press the lockin g catch ( 1 ) in the direction of the arrow and slide the cover ( 2 ). Camera lens 1 2
[ 6 ] 2 2 Find the SIM card slot ( 3 ). Place th e SIM card carefully into the slot. Make sure that the beveled corner on the SIM card faces the bottom of the phone and that the gold en contact area on the card faces downward. 3 Slide the silver ca tch over the SIM c a rd to secure it. ( 4 ). 4 Load the battery ( 5 ): Align the golden contacts of the bat te ry with the corresponding connectors on the ph one, and pu sh the opposite end of the bat te ry until it snaps into place. Replace the cov e r . Charge the battery 1 Connect the l ead to the ch arger . Y ou will hear it click into place. 2 Connect the l ead from the charger to the base of th e phone ( 6 ). 3 Connect the charger to an AC wall outlet. The battery in dicator bar sta rts scrolling. Note that you can use the phone while charging. 3 4 5 6
[ 7 ] General information 2 4 When the battery is fully ch arged, the bar st ops sc roll ing . Di scon nect th e c har ger f rom the AC ou tlet and then from th e phone . See also âÂÂBattery statementsâ on page 1 54 in th e User Guide. Note: Remove the battery only when the phone is switched off. Switch the phone on o r off Press and hold the power key . WA R N I N G! Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone u se is prohibited or when i t m ay cause interference or danger . TI PS O N EF FI C IEN T O PER ATION : Y our phone has a buil t-in antenn a (gray are a in pi cture). As with an y other radio transmitting device, do not touc h the antenna unnecessar ily w hen the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may caus e the phone to operate at a higher power le vel than oth erwise needed. Not touchi ng the antenna area during a phon e call optimizes the anten na performan ce and the talktime of your phon e. If the phone r equests a PIN c ode: The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM car d. K ey in the code (displayed as ****) and press OK . If the phone r equests a se curity code: K ey in the security code (displayed as *****) and press OK . The factory setting for the security code is 1234 5 . For more in formation on the a ccess codes, see âÂÂSecurityâ on page 40.
[ 8 ] 2 FIRST SETTI NGS Use the number keys - to key in first the current time and then the date. Press OK to a ccept the settings. Use the Scroll ke y Press t he scroll key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with arrows 1 to 4) to m ove in th e Menu. Scroll to an application or a folder and press the scroll key in the middle (shown with arrow 5 ) to open it. For ex ample: 1 T o open an Options list, press Options. The small arrow at the bottom of the displa y ( 1 ) indicat es if the list contains more item s. The lighte r the arrow , the f ewer th e items le ft in the l ist. 2 T o scroll do wn the Options list, p ress . A small arrow to the r ight ( 2 ) indicates a sublist. To open a sublist, pr ess . T o sta rt an ac tion, scroll to a com mand and press . 3 Press to go to a tab ( 3 ), a new page, or view in a n application. Make a call 1 In standby m ode, key in the phone number , including the area code. If you make a mis take, p ress to clea r nu mbers . 2 Press and wait for the answer . 3 Press to finish the call (or to cancel the call attempt). 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 3
[ 9 ] General information 2 Copy names and numbers from a SIM card to the phone memory If you have stored names and phone numbers on a SIM card, you can copy them to the ph one memory . 1 Press to ope n the ma in Menu. 2 Use the scroll key to m ove to Co nta cts . 3 Press to open Co nta cts . 4 Whe n y ou o pen Contacts for the f irst time, th e phone asks you if you want to copy all your contact data from the SIM card to the phone memo ry . Pres s OK . See also âÂÂCopy contacts betwee n the SIM card and phone memoryâ on page 47. Ke y g u a r d Use the keygua rd ( keypad lock) to pr event th e keys fr om being accidentally pressed. To l o c k : Press and . When the keys are locked, appears on the dis p lay . T o unlock : Press and . When the keyguard is on, pr ess to answer a call. During a call, the phone can be operated normally . Note: When K eyguard i s on, calls m ay be possible to t h e emergency n umber progra med into y our phone (9 1 1 or oth er officia l emergency n umber). Just key in th e emergen cy nu mber an d pres s . The numbe r is displayed only after you h ave keyed in its last digit. Shortcuts in standby mode ⢠Press to open the m ain Menu. ⢠Press to open a list of the last dia led numbers. Press to view received and missed calls lists. ⢠Press to open Co nta cts .
[ 1 0 ] 2 ⢠T o change the pr ofile, press briefly and select th e profile. ⢠Press and to call your voice mailbox. Se e âÂÂCall you r voice mailboxâ on page 2 0. Shortcuts in editors ⢠Press to open a list of commands related to wr iting and editing text. Pre ss to switch be tween predictive, traditional text input and num ber mo de ( Pred ictive text â P redictive text o n , Alpha m ode , Number mode ). ⢠When you are writing, press repeatedly to ac ce ss different kinds of special characters, or pr ess to open a list of special ch aracters. ⢠Press to e nter a space. ⢠Y ou can also use to mark items. Press and hold and at the same time, move the scroll key to ma rk text to be copied or erased. Other shortcuts In the main Menu, press a n d h old to open a v i ew where you can see all the applications that are open and switch between them. Standby mode The indicators described are shown when the pho ne is r eady for use, with no characters keyed i n. In this stat e, th e ph on e is in âÂÂst an dby mo deâ . A Shows the signal st rength of the cellular system a t your cu rrent location. The higher the bar , the stronger the signal. The symbol is r e placed with th e GPRS sym bol when the GPRS connection has been set to When avail able and a connection is available in the s ystem or in th e current cell. See â P ac ket d ata ( Gen era l P acke t Radio Se rvice , G PRS)â on page 3 4 and âÂÂG PRSâ on page 3 9.
[ 1 1 ] General information 2 B Shows an analog or a digita l clock. Also see settings for âÂÂDate and timeâ on page 40 and settings for S tandby mode â Background image, on on page 30. C Indicates which cellular s ystem th e phone is currently using. D Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar , the more power left in the battery . E Navigation b ar: show s the cur rently active prof ile. If t he select ed p rofile is Norma l , th e cur rent d ate is displ ayed inste ad of the prof ile n ame. Fo r furthe r infor mation, see âÂÂMove th e Nav igation bar horizon tally â on page 1 5 and âÂÂPr ofilesâ on page 1 0 1. F Shows the current sh o rtcu ts assigned for the sele ction keys an d . Note: Y our phone h as a screen saver . If there a re n o actions for five minutes, the display is cleared an d a screen saver becomes visible. See âÂÂScreen saver timeoutâ on pa ge 3 1. T o deactivate the screen saver , press any key . Tip: Y ou ca n change the se l ection k ey shortcuts and the ba ckground image. See the settings for â Standby modeâ on page 30. INDI CATOR S RELATED TO A CTIONS One or m ore of the following icon s may be shown when the ph one is in standby mode: - Indicates that you have received new messages in th e Inbox in Messaging. If the indi cator is blinking, the phone memory is low and you must dele te some data. For f urther information, see âÂÂMemory lowâ on page 169. - Indicates that you have received new e-mail. - Indicates that you have r eceived on e or several voice messages. See âÂÂCall your voice mailboxâ on page 20. - Indicates that there are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See âÂÂOutboxâ on page 92.
[ 12 ] 2 - I nd ica te s wh e n Ring ing opti ons has been set to Sile nt an d Message alert tone to Off in th e currently active profile. See â Profilesâ on page 1 0 1. - Indicates that the ph oneâÂÂs keypad is locked. - Indicates that you have an active alarm. S ee âÂÂClockâ on p age 1 15. - Indicates that Bluetooth is active. Note th at, when data is transmitted via Bluetooth, is shown. - Indicates that all call s to the phone are forw arded to a voic e m ailbox or ano the r num ber . See âÂÂSett in gs fo r call forwardingâ on page 23. If you ha v e tw o phone l ines, the forw ard indic ator for th e fi rst l i n e i s a nd f or th e sec ond l in e . Se e âÂÂLi ne in use (system service )â on page 32. - In dica tes t hat y ou ca n make call s usi ng phone line 2 only (system service). See âÂÂLine in use (system service)â on page 3 2. DAT A CON NECT IO N IND ICAT ORS ⢠When a n application is esta blishing a da ta connection, one of th e indicators below blinks in standby m ode. ⢠When an indicator is shown continuou sly , the connection is active. for a data call, for a high speed data call, Note: Check with your s ervice provider for ava i lability of h igh speed data ca lls. is shown in stead of the signal strength in dicator when the re is an active GPRS connection. for when the GPRS connection is put on h old during voice calls. for a fax cal l, for a Blu eto oth co nnec tion, and for an infrared connection.
[ 13 ] General information 2 â¢M E N U Press (Menu key) to open the main Menu. I n the Menu, you can access all the applications in your phone. Optio ns in the M enu are: Open , List view / Grid view , Mo v e , Mo ve to folder , New fold er , He lp , and Exit . If you pr ess and hold , the phone r eturns to standby mode and th e application is le ft open in the background. Pressing will always end a call, even if another application is active and displayed. When you switch the phone off, applications are closed and any unsaved data is saved automatica l ly . Tip: Select Options â List view if you wan t to view the appli cations in a lis t. Mo ving i n the Me nu Pr ess the scroll k e y on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with arrows 1 to 4) to move i n the Menu . Opening applications or folders Scroll to a n application or a folder and press the scroll key in the middle (shown with arrow 5) to open it. Closing applications Backstep by pressing Back or Exit as m any times as is neede d to return to standby mode or select Options â Exi t . 3 1 4 2 5 Using t he s croll key t o move
[ 14 ] 2 Rearrange the Menu Y ou ca n rea rra nge th e M enu i n any o rder you like. Y ou ca n move applications th at you u se more often from a f older to the Menu, and place applica tions you use less often in folders. Y ou can also create new folders. 1 Scroll to the item you want to move an d select Options â Move . A check mark is placed beside th e application. 2 Move the selection where you want the a p p l i c a t i o n t o b e a n d p r e s s O K . Switch between appl ications If you have several applications open and want to switch from on e application to another: Press an d hold (Menu key). The application switching window ope ns showing a list of applications that are currently open. Scroll to an application and press . Note: If memory is getting low , the phone may close some applications. The phone saves any unsaved data befor e an application is clos ed. ⢠O PTIONS LISTS In this user guide, you can see the Options list comma nds which tell you what commands are available in diff erent views and situations. The available c ommands change depending on th e view you are in. In some situations, when you press the scroll key , a shorter options list appears showing only the main commands available in the view . Online help Y our Nok ia 36 00 seri es pho ne al so has a help fu nc tion whic h yo u can access fro m an y ap pli cat ion or v iew sho wing the O pti ons se lec tion corresp onding t o t he ke y .
[ 15 ] General information 2 ⢠MOVE THE NAVIGATION BAR HORIZO NTALLY In the navigation bar , you ca n see: ⢠small arrows or tabs which tell you if there ar e more views, folders, or files you can mov e to. ⢠editing indicators, see âÂÂWrite textâ on page 7 2. ⢠other information, for example, 2 /14 in the figure below means that the current picture is t he second of 14 pictures in th e folder . Press to see the next picture . ⢠ACTIONS COMMON TO ALL APPLICATIONS ⢠Op en it ems for vi ewi ng - Wh e n y ou are viewing a list of files or folders, to open an item, scroll to an item and press the scroll key or se lec t Options â Open . ⢠Edit i tems - To open an item for editing, you sometimes need to first open it for viewing and then select Options â Edit , i f you w ant to change its contents. ⢠Rename items - To give a new name to a file or folder , scroll to it and select Options â Rename . ⢠Remove, del ete items - Scroll to the item and select Options â Delete or press . To delete many items at a time, you f irst need to ma rk them. ⢠Mark a n item - There are several ways t o sele ct items w hen you are in a list. ⢠T o select one item at a time, scr oll to it and sele ct Options â Mark /Unmar k â Ma rk or press and the scroll key at the same time. A check m ark is placed next to th e item. ⢠T o select a ll items in th e list, select O ptions â Mark/ Unmark â Mark all . Tip: For information on h ow to inser t text and num bers, see âÂÂWrite textâ on page 7 2.
[ 16 ] 2 ⢠Mark mul tip le items - Press and hold an d at th e same time move the scroll key down or u p. As the selection m oves, a check mark is placed next to the items. T o end the selection, stop the scrollin g with the sc roll key and then release . After you have se lected all the items you want, you can move or delete them b y selecting Option s â Mo ve to folder or Dele te . ⢠T o unmar k an item, sc r oll to it and sele ct Option s â Mark /Unmar k â Unmar k or press and the scroll key at the same time. ⢠Create fol de rs - T o create a new folder , select Options â New folder . Y ou are a sked to give a name to the folder (max . 35 letters). ⢠Move i tems to a fo lder - To move items to a folder or between folders, select Options â Mo ve to folder (not shown if th ere are no folders available). When you select Mo ve to folder , a list of available folders opens and you can also see the root level o f the application (for moving an item out of a folder). Select th e location you want the item to be moved to and pr ess OK. Search for items Y ou can s earch for a name, fil e, folder , or shortcut by u s i n g t h e search field. In some situations the search field is not visible automatically , an d you can activate it by selecting Options â Fin d or just by starting to key in letter s. 1 T o search for an item, start to key in text in the search field. The phone im mediately starts to sear ch for m atches a nd moves the selection on the best match. T o make the search more accu rate, key in more letter s and the selectio n mo v es t o t he item that best matches the letters. 2 When the corr ect item is found, press to open it.
[ 17 ] General information 2 ⢠V OL UME CO NT ROL When you have an active c all or are listen ing to a s ound, press or to increase or de crease the vo lume level, respectively . Loudspeaker Y our phone has a loudspeaker for handsfree use. The l oudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the phone from a short distance wi thout having to hold the ph one to your e ar . The lou dspeaker can be used d uring a call, with sound application s, and when viewi ng multime dia messages. Re al On e Player⢠uses the lou dspeaker by default wh en you watch a video. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to u se other a p plications during a call. V oice volume icons: - f or ea rpiece m ode, - f or loud speaker mode. ACTI VATE THE LOUDSP EAKER T o use the lou dspeaker during an a l ready active call, select Options â A ctivate han dsfre e . A tone is played, is shown in the navigation bar , and the volume indicator changes. V olu me indicators for earpiece and loudspeaker modes are shown in the navigation bar . The loudspeak e r ne e ds to be activated s e parately each time for phone calls, but the sound applications su ch as Com poser and Recorder use th e loudspeaker by defaul t. The loudspeaker can not be activated when you have a headset connected to the ph one. T URN OFF TH E LOUDSPE AKER When you have an active call or a sound is playing, select Options â Deactiv . hands free . Headset mode T o adjust the volu me level when a headset is connected to your phone, press or or use the headsetâÂÂs keys.
[ 18 ] 2 ⢠SHARED MEMOR Y The followin g features in your ph one use shared memory: contacts, text, text messa ges, multimedia messages, images and ringing tone s, video record e r a nd player , calendar and to-do notes, and downloaded application s. Using any of these features leaves less memory for other featu res. T his is especially true with heavy use of any of the features. For example, sav i ng many images may take all of the shared memory and your phone m ay display th at the me mory is f ull. In this case, dele te some of the inf ormatio n or entries reserving the shared memory .
[ 19 ] Y our phone 3 3 Y our phon e ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 K ey in the phone n umber , including the area code. Press or to move the cursor . Press to remove a n umber . For inter national calls , press twice for the intern ational prefix (th e character r e places the international access c ode ) and then key in the country code, the ar ea code without 0 , and the ph one number . Tip: T o adjust the volume during a call, press to increase and to decrease the volume level. Note: Calls described here as international may , in some cases, be made between regions of the same nation . 2 Press to call the n umber . 3 Press to en d the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Norm al positio n: Hold th e phone as you would hold an y other telephone. Note: Pressing will always end a call, even if another applicat ion is active an d displayed on the displa y . Make a call using th e Contacts directory 1 T o open th e Contacts directory , go to Menu â Contacts . 2 T o find a con tact, scroll to the desired name, or key in th e first letters of the name. T he Searc h fiel d op ens aut omat ical ly and m atch ing contacts a re listed. 3 Press to start the call. If the contact ha s more than one phone number , scroll to th e number and press to start the call.
[ 20 ] 3 Call your voice mailbox The voice mailbox (system ser vice) is an answe ring mach ine whe re call ers who are unabl e to rea ch y ou can leave yo u voic e me ssa ges. ⢠T o call your voice m ailbox, press and in standby mode. ⢠If the phone asks for the voice mailbox number , key it in and pr ess OK . Y ou can obtain this number from your service provide r . See also âÂÂSettings f or call forwardingâ on page 23. Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox numbe r , see âÂÂL ine in use (system service)â on page 32. Tip: If your voice mail re quires you to enter a password every time you call to listen to you r voice messages, you may wan t to add a touch tone number after the voice m ailbox number . Th is way the password is gi ven autom atically ever y time you call your v oice mail. For example, 1234567p1234# where 1234 is the password and âÂÂpâ inserts a paus e . See âÂÂSend touch tonesâ under the section âÂÂO ptions during a call â on page 22. CHANGE THE VOICE MAIL BOX NUMBER T o c hange th e ph one n umber of your vo ice mailbo x, go to Menu â T ools â V o ice ma ilbox and select Opt i on s â Change number . K ey i n the nu mber (obtain ed from your ser vice pr ovide r) and press OK . 1-touch dialing T o view the 1-touch dialing grid, go to Menu â To o l s â 1-touch dial . 1 Assign a phone number to one of the 1-touch dialing keys ( - ) , see âÂÂAs sign 1-touch dialing keysâ o n page 52. 2 T o call t he nu mber: In standby mode, press t he corresponding 1-touch dialing key and . If th e 1-touch dialing function is set to On : Pre ss and hold t he corr espondin g 1-tou ch di aling ke y until t he call is started. Make a conference call Confe rence calling is a system service that al lows you to ma ke a con fere nce call with a m aximum of six participants, including yourself.
[ 2 1 ] Y our phone 3 1 Make a ca ll to the fir st participant. 2 T o make a call to a n ew participant, select Opti ons â New cal l . K ey in or search th e memory for the phone n umber of th e participant and press OK . The first c all is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call has been answered, join the first par ticipant in the conference call. Select Opti ons â Conference . 4 T o add a new per son to th e call, repe at step 2 and the n select Optio ns â Conference â Add to conference . ⢠T o have a p r ivate conversation with on e of th e participants: Selec t Optio ns â Conferenceâ Privat e . Scroll to the desired participant and press Pri va te . The conference c all is put on hold in your phone, and the othe r participan ts can still contin ue talking with each othe r while you have a private discus sion with one participant only . Once you have fin ished the private convers ation, select Opti ons â A dd to conference to return to th e conference call. ⢠To drop one partici pant from the confe rence call, select Options â Conference â Drop pa rticipan t , t hen s croll to t he p arti cipa nt and press Drop . 5 T o end th e active conference call , pre ss . A conference call with two participants is shown. Tip: The quick est way to m ake a n ew call is to di al t he num ber an d pres s to st art the call. Th e existin g call is automatically put on hold . ⢠AN SWER A CAL L ⢠T o answer an incoming call, press . ⢠T o end th e call, press . If you do not want to answer a cal l, press . The caller will hear a â line busyâ tone or your voicemail message.
[ 22 ] 3 Tip: If you have activated the Call forw ard â If busy function to forwar d calls, for example, to your voice ma ilbox , rejecting an inc oming call will also f orwar d the call. See âÂÂSettings f or call f orwardingâ on pa ge 23. When a ca ll comes in, press Mut e to quickly mute the ringing tone. Tip: T o adj ust the phone tones for differ ent envir onmen ts and events, for example, w hen you wan t your phone to be silent, see âÂÂProfilesâ on page 1 0 1. Note: It is possible that the ph one ass igns a wrong name for the phone numbe r . Th is happe ns if the p hone n umber of the c alle r is n ot stored in Contacts but the seven last digits of the n umber match another number that is stored in Contacts. In this cas e , call identification is not correct. Call wa iting (system service) If you have activated the Call waiting service, the system will notify you of a ne w incoming call while you have a call in progress. See âÂÂCall waiting: (system service)â on page 32. 1 During a ca ll, press to a nswer th e waiting call. T he first call is pu t on hold. T o switch between the two calls, press Swap . 2 T o end th e active call, pre ss . Tip: T o end both calls at the same time, se lec t Opti ons â End al l calls and press OK . Options during a call Many options that you can use during a call are system services. Press Opti on s during a call for some of the f ollowing option s: Mut e or Unmu te , End ac tive call , End all calls , Hold or Unhold , Handset , B T hand sfre e , New call , Confer ence , Private , Drop participant , Answ er , a nd Decline . Swap is used t o switch between the active call an d the call on hold.
[ 23 ] Y our phone 3 Tr a n s fe r is u sed to con nec t a n in comi ng c all or a c all on h old w ith an ac ti ve call and to disconnect yourself f rom both calls. Sen d touch to nes is used to send touch to ne strings, for example, pa sswords or bank account numbers. 1 Key in the digits w ith - . Each keystroke generates a tou ch tone, which is transmitted while the call is active. Press repeatedly to produce: * , p (inserts a pause of about tw o seconds before, or betw ee n touc h tone char act ers .), an d w (if you u se this ch aracter, the remaining sequence is not sent until you press Send again dur ing the call). Press to produce # . 2 T o sen d the tone, pre ss OK . Tip: Y o u can also sto re a sequence of touch tones for a c ontact card. When you make a call to the con tact, you can retrie ve the sequ ence. Add touch ton es to the phone number or T ouc h tone fields in a contact ca rd. Glossary: T ouch t ones ar e the to nes you hear wh en you p ress the number keys on the ph one keypad. Touc h tones allow yo u to communicate with voice mailboxes and computerized teleph ony system s. Settings for call forwarding When th is system servi ce is activate d, you can d irect your incomi ng calls to anoth er number , for exampl e, to your voice m ailb ox numbe r . Fo r details, contact you r servic e provi der . Go to Menu â To o l s â Cal l fo rwar din g Select one of th e forward options, for example, select If busy to for ward voice calls when you r number is b usy or when you decline in coming calls. ⢠Select Opti on s â A ctiva te to tu rn the f orward setting on, Cancel to turn th e forwar d setting off, or Check status to che ck whether the forward is activated or not. ⢠T o cancel all active forwards, select Opti on s â Ca nc e l al l fo rw ar ds . For information about the forward indicators, see âÂÂI ndicator s related to actionsâ on page 1 1.
[ 24 ] 3 Note: Y ou cannot have rejection of i ncomin g c alls and c all forwarding active at th e same time. See â Call rest ric tion (Sy stem serv ice) â on p age 4 5. ⢠LOG - C ALL LOG AND GEN ERA L LOG Go to Menu â Lo g . In the log you can monitor phone calls, te xt messages, packet data connections, and fax an d data calls registered by the phone. Y ou can filter the log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards ba sed on the log information. T o view a list of sen t messa ges, g o to Messaging â Sent . Note: Connections to your r emote mailbox, multimedia messaging center , or browser pages are shown as data calls or packet data connections in the g eneral communications log. Recent calls log Go to Menu â Lo g â Recent calls The p hone re gister s the phone nu mbers of misse d, rec eiv ed, and di aled calls, and t he appr oxim ate duration and cost o f yo ur call s. The p hone re gister s missed and rece ived calls only if the system suppo rts these f unctions, and the phon e is switch ed on and within the syste mâÂÂs service area. Op tion s in the Missed , Recei ved, D ialed vi ews ar e: Call , Use num ber , Dele te , Clear list , A dd to Cont acts , He lp , and Exit . Icon s for m i sse d c alls for r ec eive d ca lls for diale d num bers
[ 25 ] Y our phone 3 Missed calls and received cal ls T o view a list of the last 20 ph one numbers from which somebody has tried to call you w ithou t success (system service), go to Log â Recent calls â Missed calls . When you see a note in standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of mis sed calls. T o call ba ck, scroll to the number or name you wa nt and pre ss . T o view a list of the 20 numbers or names from which you hav e most recently accepted ca lls (system service), go to Log â Recent calls â Received calls . Dialed numbers Press in standby m ode to o pen the Dialed numbers v i ew . T o view the 20 phone numbers that you have most recently called or attempted to call, go to Lo g â Recent calls â Dialed n os. Era sing r e cent c all li sts ⢠T o clear all recen t call lists, select Opti on s â Clear rece nt calls in the Recent calls main view . ⢠T o clear one of the call registers, open the log you want to erase and se lec t Opti ons â Clear list . ⢠T o clear an ind ividual entry , open a log, scr oll to the entry , and press . Call duration Go to Menu â Lo g . Allows you to view the du ration of your in coming and outgoing cal ls. T o see the call duration timer w hile you have an active call, select Opti ons â Settings â Sho w call d uration â Ye s . Erasi n g c all durati on tim ers - Select Opt i ons â Clear timers . For this you need the loc k code. Se e âÂÂSe curi tyâ on pag e 40. To clear an individu al entr y , scroll to i t and pre ss .
[ 26 ] 3 Call costs (system service) Go to Log â Call cos ts . Call costs allows you to ch eck the cost of the last call or all calls. The call costs a re displayed separately for each SIM card. The actual invoice for calls and services f rom your ser vic e pro vider may vary , depen ding u pon system features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so forth. CALL C OSTS LIMIT SET BY A SERVI CE PROV IDER Y our service provider can limit the cost of you r calls to a cer tain amount of charging units or units of currency . W hen the lim ited charging mode is active, calls can be made on ly as long as the preset credit limit (call cost limit) is not exceeded and you are in a system th at supports call cost lim it. The number of remainin g units is shown during a call and in standby m ode. When the ch arging units have ex pired, the note Call cost limit reached is displayed. Contact your service provider for info rmation on the limited charging mode and charging unit prices. Cost shown as charg ing units or currency Y ou can set the phone to show the remaining talk-time in charging units or units of cu rrency . For this, you may need th e PIN2 code . See âÂÂSecu rityâ on page 4 0. 1 Select Opti on s â Se ttings â Sho w cost s in . The options are Currency an d Units . 2 If you choose Currency , a note requesting you to w rite the un it price is sh own. K ey in the cost of your home system charging or credit unit and press OK . 3 Write a name for th e currency . U se a three-letter abbreviation, for exampl e, C AD. Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be p ossible to the emer gency number programed i nto your phone (such as 9 1 1 or other official em ergency numbers).
[ 27 ] Y our phone 3 SET A CAL L COST LIMI T FOR YOURSELF 1 Select Opti on s â Settings â Call cost limit â On . 2 The phone r equests you to enter th e limit in units. For th is you may need the PI N2 code. Depen ding on the Sho w co sts in setting, enter either the a moun t of charging units or curr e ncy . When the ch arging l imit you have set you rself is reached, t he counter st ops at its maximum value an d the note Reset all cal ls' cost coun ter is dis played. T o be able to ma ke calls, go to Opti ons â Settings â Call cost lim it â Off . For this you ne ed the PIN2 code. See âÂÂSecu rityâ on page 4 0. Erase call cost co unters - Se lect Opti ons â Clear counters . For this you need the PIN2 code. T o clear an individual entry , scroll to it and press . GPRS data counter Go to Log â GPRS counter . Allows you to chec k the amount of data sent and r eceived during packet data (GPRS) connections. For exam ple, you ma y be charged for your GPRS connections by the amount of data sent and received. View the gener al log Go to Menu â Lo g and pr ess then . In the general log, for each commu nication event, you can s ee the sender or recipient name, phone number , name of the service provider , or acc ess point. Note: Sub-events, such as a text message sent in m ore than one part and packet data con nections, are logged as one communication event. Filt er the log 1 Selec t Options â Fil ter . A l ist of filters ope ns. 2 Scroll to a filter and press Select . Erase the contents of the log T o er ase all th e log co nten ts, Re cent cal ls lo g, and Messaging delivery repor ts perman ently , select Opti on s â Clear log . Confirm by pr essing OK .
[ 28 ] 3 P a ck et da t a co un t er a n d c o nne ct i o n t i me r T o view how much dat a , meas ured in kiloby tes, has been transfer red and how long a certain GPRS con nection has last ed, scroll to an Incomi ng or Outgoing event with th e access point icon and select Opti on s â View details . Lo g set tings Select Opti on s â Settings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log d uration - T he log events remain in the phone memory f or a set nu mber of days a fter which th ey are automatica lly erased to free me mor y . If you select No log , all the l og contents, Recent calls log, and Messaging delivery reports a re permanently deleted. â¢F o r Show call du ration , Show c ost s in , Call c ost lim it , see the section s âÂÂCall duration â and âÂÂCall costs (sy s tem service)â earl ier in this chapter . ⢠SIM FOLD ER Go to Menu â SI M Y our SIM card may provide addition al services that you can access in this folder . See also âÂÂCopy contacts between the SI M card and phone memoryâ on page 4 7, âÂÂConfirm SI M servicesâ on page 43, âÂÂFixed dialin gâ on on page 42, and â View m essages on a SIM card â on page 9 3. Op tion s in the SIM d irect ory ar e: Open , Call , New SIM contact , Edit , Delete , Mark /UnM ar k , Copy to Co ntacts , Own numbe rs, SIM detai ls , Help , an d Exit . Note: For av ailability , rates and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor , e.g. system operator , service provider or other v endor . In the SIM d irectory, you can see th e names and numbe rs stored on the SIM card, you can add or e dit them, and you can make calls. Icon s for incoming for o utgoi ng for miss ed communication event s
[ 29 ] Settings 4 4 Set tings ⢠CHANGE GENERAL S E TTINGS Go to Menu â To o l s â Setti ngs . 1 Scroll to a setting group and press to open it. 2 Scroll to a setting you want to change and press to ⢠switch between option s if there are only two ( On / Off ). ⢠open a list of option s or an editor . ⢠open a settings slider such as the Contras t setting. Press or to increase or decrease th e value. Note: Y ou may be able to r eceive some settings from your service provider in a text message. ⢠PHONE SETTINGS General ⢠Phone la nguage - Y ou can change the language for the di splay texts in your phone. This change will also aff e ct the form at used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. There are three languages in stalled in your ph one. If you select Autom atic , the phone selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the displa y text language, you must restart th e phone. Note: Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your phone and the change remains eff ectiv e until you cha nge the se set tings ag ai n.
[ 30 ] 4 ⢠Writin g langu age - Y ou can change the writing lan guage of your phone perm anently . Ch anging the langu age affect s ⢠the characters ava ilable when you press any key ( - ), ⢠the predictive text dictionary used, and ⢠the special characters that are available wh en you pre ss the and keys. Tip: Y ou can also make this change in some of the editors. Press and se lec t Writing lan guage: . Example: Y ou are using a phone where th e display texts are in English but you want to write all your messages in French. After you change th e language , the pr edicti ve text di ctio nary sea rch es f or w ords in French and the most common special characters or punctuation m ark s us e d in the French lan guage are available when you press the and keys. ⢠Predictiv e text - Sets the predicti ve tex t input On or Off for all editors in the phon e. Y ou can also change th is setting when you are in an editor . Press and select Predic tive text â Predict ive text on or Off . Note: The predictive text diction ary is n ot available for all languages. ⢠W elcome note or logo - Press to open the settin g. The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the ph one. Sele ct Default if you wan t to use t he defau lt image or animation. Select T ext to write a welcome no te (max. 5 0 letters). Select Image to select a photo or pictu re from Imag es . ⢠Or ig . ph on e se t ti ng s - Y ou can reset some o f the settings to t h eir original values. To do this , you need the lock code. Af ter resetting th e settings, the phone m ay take a longer time to po wer on. Note: All documents and files th at you have created are left as t hey are. Standby mode ⢠Back gro u nd i mag e - Y ou can se lect any im age to be use d as a bac kgr ound image in s tandby mode. Select Ye s to select an image from Im ages .
[ 3 1 ] Settings 4 ⢠Left s election key and Right selection key - Y ou ca n chang e th e short cu ts that appear over the left and right selection keys in stan db y m ode. In addition to t he applications, you ca n have the shortcut point to a function, for example, New message . Note: Y ou can not have a s hortcut to an applica tion that yo u have installed. Display ⢠Contrast - To change the contrast of the display to lighter or darker . ⢠Color palette - To change the color palette used on th e display . ⢠Screen saver timeout - Th e scr een saver is activated when the s creen saver time-o ut period is over . W hen the scr een saver is active, th e display is cleared and you can see the screen saver bar . T o deactivate the screen saver press any key . ⢠Screen saver - Se lect what is shown on th e screen saver bar: time and date or a tex t you have written yourself. The location and background color of th e screen saver bar changes in one minute intervals. Als o, the screen saver ch anges to indicate th e number of new messages or missed calls. ⢠CALL SET TINGS Note: T o change the settings for call forwardin g, go to Men u â To o l s â Call fo rwar din g . Send my caller ID This syst em service allows you to set your phone number to be displayed ( Ye s ) or hidden ( No ) from the person to whom you ar e calling. Or , the value may be set by you r servic e p rovide r whe n you make a subs cripti on ( Defau lt ).
[ 32 ] 4 Call waiting: (system service) The system will notify you of a new incoming call wh ile you h ave a call in progress. Select Ac ti v at e to reque st the system to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the system to deactivate call waiting, or Check s tatus , to check if the function is active or n ot. Automatic redial When this setting is activated, you r phone w ill make a maxim um of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. Press to stop automatic redialing. Summary after call Activate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the duration and cost of the last call. T o show costs, the Call co st limit needs to be activated f or your SI M car d. 1-touch dialing Selec t On and the numb ers assigned to t he 1-touch d ialing key s ( - ), can be dialed by pr essing and hold ing the key . Anykey answ er Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key , except , , and . Line in use (system service) This sett ing i s sh own onl y if the SIM car d suppor ts two subscr iber numbe rs, that is, two phone lines. Sel ect which ph one line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) yo u wan t to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lin es can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. Note: Y ou will no t be able to make calls if you select Line 2 an d hav e not subscribed to this system service. T o prevent line s election, s elect Line change â D isable if supported by your SIM card. T o change th is setting, you need the PIN2 code supplied by your service provider . Tip: T o switch between the phone lin es, press and hold in standby mode.
[ 33 ] Settings 4 V oice m es sage indi cators: , , or is shown if you have one or seve ral voice messages. ⢠CON NEC TIO N SETTI N GS General information about data c onnections and access points T o defin e settings for acce ss points, go to Settings â Conne ction se ttings â A ccess poin ts . A dat a connection is required to c onnect to an a ccess point. Y our phone supports three k i nds of data con nections: ⢠a GSM data call ( ), ⢠GSM high-speed data call ( ), or ⢠packet data (GPRS) connection ( ). There are three different kinds of access points th at you can define: MMS access poin t, browser access point, and Inter net access po int (IAP). Check w ith your service provider f or the kind of access point needed for th e se rvic e yo u wi sh to a cce ss . Y ou ne ed t o se t a cce ss p oi nt s et tin g s, if yo u want to , for examp le, ⢠send and receive multimedia messages, ⢠send and receive e-mail, ⢠brows e pages, ⢠download Java TM applications, ⢠use Image u pload, or ⢠use your phone as a modem . Glossary: Access point - The point where your phone connects to the Interne t by way of a data call or packet data connection. An access poi nt can be pr ovide d, for e xample, by a comme rcial In ternet service provider (ISP), or service provider .
[ 34 ] 4 GSM D ATA C ALL S A GSM data call enables data transm ission rates to a maximum of 14.4 kbps . For availability a nd subscription to data s ervices, contact your service pr ovider . Minimum settings needed to make a d at a cal l T o insert a s et of basic GSM da ta call settings, go to Settings â Connection setti n gs â A ccess point s and select Opti ons â New acces s point . Fill in the following: Data bear er : GSM dat a , Dial-up nu mber , Sessi on mode : Pe r m a n e n t , Data c all type : Analog , an d Maximum data speed : Auto matic . High s peed d ata call (Hi gh Speed Ci rcuit S witched Data , H SCSD) Glossa ry: High-speed data enables data tr ansmission rates to a maximum of 43.2 Kbps, which is three times fa ster than the standard data rate s of the G SM system . HS CSD i s comp arable to the spee d of many comp u ter m ode ms tha t commu nicate w ith toda y's fixed telepho n e system s. For avai lability and sub scripti on to high-sp eed data ser vices, please c ontact your service pr ovider . Note: Sending data in HSCSD mode may drain the phoneâÂÂs battery faster than n ormal voice or data ca lls, as the phone may send data more frequen tly to the s ystem. Tip: The Se ttings wizard program inc luded in the PC Suit e for Nokia 3650 or P C Suite for Nok ia 3600 can hel p you to configu re acce ss point and mailbo x sett ings. Y ou can al so copy exi sting setti ngs, f or example, fr om you r co mp uter to your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. P ACK ET DATA (GENERA L P ACKET RAD IO SERVICE, GPRS) Glossary: P acket data, or Ge nera l P acket Rad io Ser vice (G PRS) , uses packet data technology where information is sent in sh ort bursts of data over th e mobile system. The benefit of sendin g data in packets is that the system is occupied only w hen sending or rece ivin g da ta. B ecaus e GPRS uses the s yst em eff icien tly , it all ows for quick data co nnection set up and fast da ta transmission speeds.
[ 35 ] Settings 4 Minimum s ettings needed t o make a p acket data co nnection ⢠Y ou n e ed to s ubscribe to the GPRS service. For availability an d subscription to GPRS, contact your service provider . â¢G o t o Tools â Settin gs â Connection â A ccess points and select Option s â New acces s point â Edit . Fill in th e followin g: Data bea rer : GPRS and A ccess point name : enter the name given to you by your service provider . Pri cing f or p ack et data and a pp lic ation s Both the active GPR S connection and the applications used over GPRS require a fe e (for exam ple, using services, sending and r eceiving data, and text messages). For more detailed information on fees, contact your service provider . Create an access point Optio ns in th e Ac cess po ints list are: Edit , New ac cess poin t , Delete , Help , an d Exi t . Y ou may have preset access point settings in your Nokia 3600 series mobile phone. Or , you may receive access point settings in a smart messa ge f rom a service provider . If no access points are defin ed when you open A ccess points , you will be asked if you wa nt t o cr eat e on e. If access poin ts a re def ined, to cr eate a new access point, select Opti ons â New acces s poin t and select: ⢠Use default settings to use the default setting s. Make the needed changes and press Back to s ave the settings. ⢠Use existing s ettings to use existing setting info rm ation as th e basis for the new acce ss point se ttings. A list of existin g access points is o pened. Select one and pr ess OK . Access point settings are opened with some fields alr eady filled.
[ 36 ] 4 Edit an acces s poin t When you open Access points, the list of already available access points opens. Scroll to th e access point you want to edit, and press . Delet e an access point In the list of access poin ts, scroll to the access point you want to remove and select Opt ions â Delete . Access points Options wh en edi ting a ccess poi nt set tings are: Change , A dvanc ed settings , Help , and Exi t . Here you can see a short explanation for eve ry setting that may be neede d for different data connections and access points. Note: Enter the settings from the top because depe nding on what data connection you select ( Data bearer ) or w hether you n eed to ins ert a Gateway IP addr ess , only certain setting fields are available. Note: Follow the instructions given to you by your service p rovider very carefully . ⢠Connection na me - Give a descriptive name for th e connection. ⢠Data bea rer - The options are GS M da ta , High speed GSM , and GP RS . Depending on what data connection you select, only certain s e tting fiel ds are availabl e. Fill in all fields mark ed wi th Must be de fined , or marked with a r ed asterisk. Oth er fields ca n be lef t empty , unless you have been instructed oth erwise by your service provider . Tip: See also âÂÂSettings nee ded for m ultimedia messagingâ on page 7 8, âÂÂSettings needed for e- mailâ on page 8 1, and âÂÂPh one browser service se tti ngs â on page 120. Note: T o use a data connection, the system service provider must support this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. ⢠A ccess poin t name (for packet data only) - The access point name is needed to es tablish a connection to the GPR S system. Y ou obtain the access point name from your service pr ovider .
[ 37 ] Settings 4 ⢠Dial-up numb er (for GSM data and high speed data only) - The modem telephone number of the a ccess point. ⢠User na me - Write a user name if required by the service provider . The user name may be ne eded to make a data connection, and is usually provi ded by the serv ice p rovide r . T he us er na me is o ft en case-se nsitiv e. Tip: When you ar e writing, press to open the special cha racters table. Pr es s to en ter a sp ace . ⢠Prompt pass w ord - If you must key in a new password e very time you log on to a server , or if you do n ot want to save your password to the phone, choose Ye s . ⢠Pa s s w o r d - A pas swor d may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider . The password is of ten case- sensiti ve. W hen yo u are writin g th e passwor d, t he char acters you ent er are shown br iefly and then changed to asterisks (*). The easiest way to enter numbe rs is to press an d select Insert number and then continue entering letters. ⢠Auth entication - Normal / Secure . ⢠Gat eway IP address - The IP address used by required browser gateway . ⢠Hom epage - Depen ding on what you are setting up, write either: ⢠the ser vice addr ess, or ⢠the address of the m ultimedia messaging center . Glossa ry: ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between your phone an d your access point. ISDN connections are digital from end to en d and as su ch offer quicke r set-up times a nd faster data rates than ana log conne ctions. In order to use an ISDN co n n ec t i on , both your service provid er and your Internet service provider mus t support it . ⢠Connection security - Choose whether T ransport Layer Security (TLS) is used for the conne ction. Follow th e instructions from you r service provider . ⢠Sess ion mode - Pe r m a n e n t / T emporar y .
[ 38 ] 4 ⢠Data c all type (for GSM data and high speed data only) - Analog , ISDN v .1 1 0 , or ISDN v .120 defines wheth er the phon e uses an analog or digital connection. This setting depends on both your GSM service pro vider and Inte rnet Ser vice P rovider (ISP), because so me GSM syst ems do not support certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your ISP . If ISDN connections are available, they esta bl ish connection s more quickly than analog methods. ⢠Maximum data speed (for GSM data and h igh speed data only) - The options are Autom atic / 9600 / 14400 / 19200 / 28800 / 38400 / 43200 , depending on what you have ch osen in Se ssion m ode an d Data c all type . This option allows you to li mit the maximum connection speed when high speed data is used. Higher data rates may cost more, depending on the s ystem service provider . Note: The spe eds above r epresent the ma ximum speed at which your connection will operate. Du ring the con nection, the ope rating speed may be less, dep ending on system conditions. Glossa ry: DNS - Domain Name Se rvice. An I nternet service th at translates domain names such as www .no kia.c om into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124 .195 . Optio ns â Ad vanced sett ings ⢠Phone IP a ddress - The IP addre ss of your phone. ⢠Primar y name s erver: - The IP address of the primary DNS ser ver . ⢠Second na me server: - The IP ad d re ss of the seconda ry DNS server . Note: If you need to enter the Phone IP ad dress , Primar y name ser ver , or Sec ond name ser ver contact your Internet servi ce provider to obt ain th es e add res ses . The following settings are show n if you have selected data call and high speed data as the connection type: ⢠Use call back - This option allows a server to call you back once you have made th e initial call, so you have a connection with out paying for the call. Contact your service pr ovider to subscribe to this service.
[ 39 ] Settings 4 Note: Charges may ap ply for cert ain typ es of receiv ed calls, such as r oaming and high speed data calls. Con tact your GSM service provider f or more infor mation. Note: The phone expects the c allback call to use the same data call settings that were used in the callback-requesting call. T he system must support this type of call in b ot h dir ections, to and from the phone. ⢠Callbac k type - The options are Use server no. / Use other no. Ask your service provider for the correct setting; it will de pend on the s e rvice providerâÂÂs configuration. ⢠Callbac k numb er - Ke y in your phoneâÂÂs data phone number which the dial back serve r uses. Usually , this number is the data ca ll phone number of you r phon e. ⢠Use PPP compressi on - When set to Ye s , this option speeds up th e data transfer , if supported by the remote PPP server . If you h ave pr oblems with establishing a connection, try s etting this to No . C ont act your service provider for guidance. Glossa ry: PPP (P oint-to-P oint Protocol) - a common networ king software protocol that enables any computer with a modem and a phone lin e to connect dir ectly to the Inte rnet. ⢠Use login script - The options are Ye s / No . ⢠Logi n script - Insert the logi n script. ⢠Modem initialization (Modem initialization string)- Controls y our phone using modem A T commands. If r e quired, enter char acters specified by your GSM system service pr ovider or In ternet se rvice provider . GPRS Go to Menu â Tools â Setti ngs â Connection â GPRS . The GPRS settings affect all access points using a pa cke t data con nection .
[ 40 ] 4 GPRS connection - If you select When available an d yo u ar e i n a sys t em t ha t supports pac ket d ata, th e pho ne regi sters to t he GPRS syst em and sendin g text messages will be done via GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, is qu icker . If you se lec t When needed , the phone will u se a packet data c onne ction only if you star t an application or action th at needs it. The G PR S connection is closed after it is not used by any application. Note: If th ere is no G PRS co verage an d you have chosen Wh en a vail able , the phon e will pe riodi cally try to establ ish a packet data connec tion . A ccess poin t - The access point name is needed wh en you want to use your phone as a packet data modem to you r computer . Data call Go to Menu â Tools â Settin gs â Connect ion settings â Data c all . The Data call settings affect all access points using a data call and high speed data call. Online t ime - If there are no actions the data ca ll is dropped automatically after a time-out period. The options are User defined , in which cas e you enter a tim e, or Unlimi ted . ⢠DATE AND T IME Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Date and tim e . The date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your phone, as well as chan ge the date and time fo rm at and separators. Choose Clock type â Analog or Digital to change th e clock shown in standby mode. Choose Auto time update if you want th e mobile ph one system to update time, date, an d time zone information to your phone (sy stem service). Tip: For the Auto ti m e upd ate setting to take effect, the ph on e n eeds to be restarted. ⢠SECURITY Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Securityâ Phone and Sim
[ 4 1 ] Settings 4 Phone and SIM Explanations for the different security codes that may be needed: ⢠PIN code (4 to 8 dig it s) - Th e PIN (P ers onal I dentif ication Number ) code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usuall y suppli ed with th e SIM card. Af ter thre e conse cutive incorrect PIN code e ntries, the PI N code is blocked. If the PIN code is blocked, you need to u nblock the PIN co de before you can use th e SIM card again. See the in formation about the PUK code below . ⢠PIN 2 co de (4 to 8 digi ts) - Th e PIN2 c od e, supplied wi th s om e SIM cards, is r equired to access some fu nctions, such as call cos t counters. ⢠L ock co de ( 5 dig its) - The lock code can be used to lock the ph one and keypad to avoid unauthorized u se. Note: The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . T o avoid unauthorized use of your phone, change the lock code. K eep the new code secre t and in a safe place separ ate from your p hone. ⢠PUK an d PUK2 codes (8 dig its) - The PUK (P ersonal Unblocking Key) code is requir ed to change a blocked PIN code . The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM car d, contact the operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone for the codes. Y ou can ch ange the following codes: lock code, PIN code, a nd PIN2 code. These codes can only include th e number s from 0 to 9 . Note: Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 9 1 1, to prevent accidental di aling of th e emergen cy number . PIN code request - When the PIN code r equest is act ive, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Note tha t deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SI M cards. PIN code / PIN2 code / Lock co de - Open this setting if you want to change the code. Tip: T o lock the phone manually , press . A list of com mands opens. Select Lock ph one .
[ 42 ] 4 Autolo ck period - Y ou can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. K ey in a number f or the time-out in minutes or select None to turn off the autolock period. Lock Code - T o unlock th e phone, key in the lock code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into you r phone (e.g. 9 1 1 or other official emer gency number) . Lock if SIM ch anged - Select Ye s if you want the phone to ask for the lock code when an u nknown, new SIM card is inserted into your phone. T h e ph one mainta ins a list of SIM car ds that are reco gnized as the ownerâÂÂs cards . Fix ed diali ng - Y ou can restrict your outgoing calls to sel ected phone numbers, if support ed by your SIM card. Y ou need the PIN2 code for this function. When this f unction is active, you can only ca ll those phone numbers that are included in the fixed dialing list or which begin with the same digit( s) as a phone number on the list. T o vi ew t he li st o f F ixed di al ing nu mber s, go to Menu â SIM â Fixed dial ing . Op tion s in the Fixe d diali ng view are: Open , Call , New contac t , Edit , Delete , A dd to Cont acts , A dd from Contact s , Help and Exit . Note: When Fixed Dialing is turned on, calls m ay be possible to certa in emergenc y numbe rs in some syste ms (9 1 1 or othe r official emergenc y numbers). T o add new numbers to th e Fixed dialin g list, select Opt ions â New con ta c t or A dd from Contact s . Closed user group (system serv ice) - Y ou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. For mo re information , contact your service provider . Select: Default to activate the default group agreed on with the ser vice provi der , On if you want to u se another group (you need to k now the group index number) , or Off . Note: When calls are l imited to Closed User Groups, ca ll s may be possible to certain emergency n umbe rs in some systems (9 1 1 or other offici al emer gency numbers ).
[ 43 ] Settings 4 Confir m SIM serv ices - To set the phone to display confirmation messages when you ar e usi ng a S IM card service. Certif. management Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Se c uri t y â C ert . mana gem ent In the Certificate management main view , you can see a lis t of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. Press to see a list of user certificates, if a vailable. Options in the certificate management main view are: Certific ate details , Dele te , T rust se ttings , Mark /Unmar k , Help, and Exit . Glossary: Digital certifi cates are u sed to v erify th e origin of browser pages and installed software. However , they can only be tr usted if the or igin of the certificate is known to be au thentic. Digit al cert ificat es are needed if y ou: ⢠want to con nect to a n online bank, another s ite, or r emote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information, or ⢠want to minimize the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing s oftware. Glo ssary : Authority cer tificates are used by some services , such as banking services, for checking signatures or server certificates or other authority certificates. Impo rtant : Although the u se of certificates ma kes the ri sks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller , they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increa se d secur ity . T he ex iste nce of a certi fi cate does n ot offe r any protecti on by itself; th e certific ate manage r must contain correct, au thentic, or trusted certifi c ates f o r increase d security to be available. Glossa ry: User certificates are issued to u sers by a Cer tifying Author ity .
[ 44 ] 4 Viewi ng c ert ifi cat e deta il s - che cki ng au thenti c ity Y ou can only be sure of the cor rect identity of a browser gateway or a server when the signature and the perio d of validity of a browser gateway or server certificate h ave been checked. Y ou will be notifi ed on the ph oneâÂÂs disp lay ⢠if the identity of the browser ser ve r or gateway is n ot authentic or ⢠if you do no t have t he correct security certificate in your phone. T o check cer tificate details, scroll to a cer tificate and select Opti on s â Certificate details . When you open certificate details, C ertificate management checks th e validity of the certificate and one of th e following notes m ay appear: ⢠Certific ate not trus ted - Y ou h ave not set any application to use the certificate. For more information, see the next section âÂÂChanging the trust settings of an authority certificateâ . ⢠Expir ed certificate - The period of validity has ended for the sele cted certificate. ⢠Certific ate not valid yet - The period of validity has n ot yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certific ate corrupted - The cert ificate cannot be us ed. Contact the certificate issuer . Impo rtant : Certificates have a r estricted lifetime. If Expir ed certifi cate or Certific ate not valid yet is shown even if th e certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. Chang e t he trus t set ting s of an auth or ity c erti fica te Scroll to an authority certifi cate a nd select Opti on s â T rust settings . Depending on the cer tificate, a list of th e applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Services / Ye s - the cer tificate is able to certify sites. Appli cation m anager / Ye s - the cer tificate is abl e to certify the or igin of ne w soft ware . Internet / Ye s - the ce rtificate is able to certify e-mail and imaging servers.
[ 45 ] Settings 4 Impo rtant : Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trus t the o wner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner . ⢠CALL RESTRICTION (SYSTEM SERVICE) Call restriction allows you to restrict the making and receiving of calls with your phone. For th is function, get th e restriction password from your service provider . 1 Scroll to one of the restri ction options. 2 Selec t Options â Activate to request the system to set c all restriction on, Cancel to set th e selected call r estriction off, or Check stat us to check if the calls are restr i cted or not. ⢠Select Opti on s â Edit r estri ction p assw . to ch ange the restriction password. ⢠Select Opti on s â Cancel all rest rictions to ca ncel all active call r estrictions. Note: When calls ar e re str icted, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in s ome system s (9 1 1 or othe r official em ergency numbers). Call restricting affects all calls, including data calls. Y ou cannot have restriction of incoming calls and ca ll forwarding or f ixed dialing a ctive at the sa me time. â¢S Y S T E M Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Sy st em System selection Choose Au tomat ic to set the phone to automatically search for and select one of the cellu lar systems available in your area, or Choose Manual , if you want to select the desi red system manually from a list of systems. If the connection to the manually selected system is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to select a system again. The selected system must have a roaming agreement with your home system, that is, th e operator wh ose SIM card is in you r phone.
[ 46 ] 4 Glossa ry: Roaming agre ement - An agree ment between two or more system service providers to enable the users of on e serv i ce provider to use the ser vices of oth er service providers. Cell info display Select On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular system based on M icro Cellular Net w ork (M CN ) tech nology and to activate cell info reception. ⢠ACCESSORY SETTINGS Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â A ccessory Scroll to an accessor y folder and open the settings: ⢠Select De fault prof ile to select th e profile you want to be activated each time when you connect a certain accessory to your phone. ⢠Select Auto mati c an sw er to set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after five seconds tim e. If the Ringing option is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answe r cannot be in use. Note: If you are using a loopset, you need to activate it separately . Open the Loopset f older and selec t Use loopset â Ye s . If you have activated a loopset, the headset will us e the same settings as the loopset. Indicators shown i n standby mode: - a heads et i s conne ct ed. - a loopset is connected.
[ 47 ] Contacts 5 5C o n t a c t s T o open Con tacts, press in standby m ode or go to Men u â Contacts . In Con tacts, you can store and m anage contact information, such as names, phone nu mber s, an d ad d re sses. Contacts use share d me mory . See â Shar ed memoryâ on page 18. Y ou can also add a personal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnail ima ge to a contact ca rd. Y ou can create contact g roups, which allow you to sen d text messa ges or e-mail to m any recipients at the sam e time. ⢠CREATE CONTACT CARD S 1 Open Contacts and select Opti on s â New contact . An empty contact card opens. 2 Fill in the f ields you want and press Don e . The contact card is s aved and closed, and appears in the Contacts directory . ⢠COPY CONTACTS BETW EEN THE SIM CARD AND PHONE MEMORY ⢠T o copy names and numbe rs from a SIM card to your ph one, go to Menu â SIM â SIM di re ctor y . Select the name(s) you want to copy and select Opt ions â Copy t o Conta c ts . ⢠If you want to copy a phone, fa x, or pager number f rom Contacts to your SIM card, go to C ontact s, open a contact card , scroll to the number , a nd select Opt ions â Copy to SIM direct.
[ 48 ] 5 ⢠EDIT CON TACT C ARDS Optio ns in the C ontacts directory a re: Open , Call , Create message , New con ta c t , Edit , Delete , Duplic ate , A dd to grou p , Be lo n gs t o gr ou ps , Mark /Unmark , Send , Contacts info , Help , an d Exit . Optio ns when ed iting a contact card are: A dd thumbn ail / Remo ve thumbnail , A dd detai l , Delete deta il , Edit label , Help, an d Exit . 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact car d you want to edit and press to open it. 2 T o change the in formation on the card, select Opti ons â Edit . 3 T o save your chan ges and to retur n to the conta ct card view , press Done . Delete c ontact cards In the Con tacts directory , scr oll to the contact card you w ant to delete and select Opt ions â Delete . T o dele te many contact cards 1 Mark the cards to be del eted. Scrol l to a cont act you wa nt to dele te and select Options â Ma r k . A check mark is placed be side the contact card. 2 When you have marked a ll the contacts you want to delete, select Opti on s â Delete . Tip: Y ou can also mark many item s if you press and hold and simu lta neously press . See also â Actio ns com mon to all a pplic atio nsâ on pa ge 15. Add and remove contact card fields 1 Open a contact card and select Opti ons â Edit . 2 T o add an extr a field, sele ct Opti ons â A dd detail . T o dele te a field you do not need , select Opt ions â Delete detail . T o rename a con tact card field l abel, select Opti on s â Edit la bel .
[ 49 ] Contacts 5 Insert a picture in a contact card There are two different types of pictu res you can add to a con tact card. See âÂÂCame ra and Imagesâ on page 55 for mor e information on how to take and store pi ctures. ⢠T o attach a s mall thumbnail image to a contact c a rd, open a contact card, select Opt ions â Edit and then select Opt ions â A dd thumbn ail . The thumbnail image is also shown when the contac t is calling you. ⢠T o add an image to a contact card, open a contact ca rd, and press to open the im age view ( ). To attach an image, se lect Opti on s â A dd image . ⢠OPTIONS WHEN VIE WING A CONTACT CARD Contact information view ( ) shows all information inserted in the con tact card. Press to op en th e Imag e vi ew . Note: Only fields that have information are displayed in the c ontact informat i on view . Select Opti on s â Edit i f y o u w a n t t o s e e all fields and add more data to the contact. Optio ns when view ing a contact card (some ar e shown only when t he selection is on a phone number) are: Call , Create message , Edit , Delete , Default s , A dd voice tag / V oice tags , As si gn 1-to uch dial / Remo ve 1-t ouch d ial , Ri ng in g t o ne , Copy to SIM direct. , Sen d , Help, an d Exit . Assign default numbers and addresses If a contact has several phone numbers or e-mail addresses, to speed up calling a nd se n ding messages, y ou can define certain numbers an d addresses to be used as the d efault. Open a contact card and select Opti ons â Default s . A pop-u p window opens, listing th e different options.
[ 50 ] 5 Example: Scroll to Phone nu mber and press Assi gn . A list of phone numbers in the sele cted contact card is shown. Scroll to the one you wa nt to ha ve as the de fault and press . When you ret urn to the contact card view , you can see the default number underl ined. V oice dialing Y ou can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that ha s been added to a contact ca rd. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialing, note th at: ⢠V oi ce tags are not language depen dent. They ar e dependent on the sp eak e r's vo ice . ⢠V oi ce tags ar e sensitive to bac kgroun d noise. Record th e m a nd make calls in a quiet environment. ⢠V e ry s hort names are not accepted. Use long n ames and avoid s imilar name s for dif fe re nt num ber s. Example: Y ou can us e a personâ s name for a voice tag, for exampl e, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs cellâ . Note: Y ou must sa y the name exactly as you said it w hen you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for exampl e, a noisy environme nt or during an eme rgency , so you should not r ely solely upon voice dialing in a ll circumstances. ADD A VOI CE TAG TO A PH ONE NUMBER Glossary: V oice tags can be any spoken words, for example, a personâÂÂs fir st name. V oice tags allow you to make phone calls by simply saying the w ord aloud. 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact to which you want to add a voice tag and press to open the contact card. 2 Scroll to th e number to which you want to add the voice tag and se lec t Opti ons â A dd voice ta g . Note: Y ou can have only one voice tag per contact card. V oice tags can only be added to phone numbers stor ed in the phoneâÂÂs memory . See âÂÂCopy contacts between the SIM card an d phone memoryâ on pag e 47 .
[ 5 1 ] Contacts 5 3 The te xt Press Start, th en speak aft er tone is displa ye d. When recording, h old the phone at a short distance away from your mouth. After the starting tone, say clearly the word(s ) you want to record as a voice tag. â¢P r e s s Start to recor d a voice tag. T he phone sounds a starting tone and the note Spe a k n ow is displayed. ⢠Press Quit to retu rn to th e conta ct car d. Af ter the s tarting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voice tag. 4 After recordin g, the phone plays the reco rded tag and the note Playin g voice t ag is disp lay ed. If you do not want to sa ve th e r ecor ding, press Quit . 5 When the voice tag has been successfully saved, the note V oic e ta g sav ed is display e d and a beep sounds. A sy m bol can be seen next to the number in the contact card. Note: Y our phone m ay have 3 0 phone n umbers to wh ich voice tags are attached. I f the mem ory becom es full, de let e some of the voice tags. Tip: T o view a list of voice tags you have define d, select Opt ions â Cont acts info â V oic e ta gs in the Contacts directory . MAKE A CAL L BY SAYIN G A VOICE TAG Note: Y ou must say th e voice t ag exactly as yo u said it whe n you recorded it. 1 In standby mode, press and hold . A short tone is played a nd the note Speak n o w is displa yed . 2 When you are making a call by sa ying a voice tag, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the phone a s hor t dista nc e away from your m out h a n d face and say the voice tag clearly . 3 The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number , and after 1 .5 seconds dials th e number of the recognized voice t ag. If t he phon e plays th e wron g voice tag or to re try vo ice diali ng, p ress Retry . Note: When an application u sing a data call or GPRS connectio n is sending or rece iving data, you cannot make a call by usin g voice d ialing. To make a call by using a voice tag, end all active data connection s.
[ 52 ] 5 REPL AY , ERASE, OR CHANG E A VOICE TAG T o replay , erase, or c h ange a voice tag, open a con tact car d and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (in dicated by ) and select Opti on s â V oice tag â th en ei the r ⢠Playba ck - to listen to the voice tag again, or ⢠Dele te - to erase the voice tag, or ⢠Change - to recor d a new voice tag instead of the old on e. Press Start to rec ord . Assign 1-touch di a ling keys 1-touch dialing is a quick way to c all f requently used nu mber s. Y o u can as si gn 1- touc h dia ling keys to eight phone numbers. Number 1 is reserved for th e voice mailbox . 1 Open the contact card for which you want a 1-touch dialing key and select Opti on s â A s sign 1- touch no . Th e 1-touch d ialing grid opens, showing you the numbers from 1 - 9 . 2 Scroll to a number and pres s Assig n . When you re turn to the contact information view , you c an see th e 1-touch dial icon ( * ) ne xt to the nu mber . T o call the contact by 1-touch dialing, go to standby mode and press the 1-touch dialing key and . If th e 1-tou ch dialin g function is set to On : Press and hold the cor responding 1-touch dia ling key until the call is started. Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group Y ou ca n set a ringing tone for each contact card and group. W hen that contact or group member calls you, the phone plays the chosen ringing tone (if the ca llerâÂÂs telephone number is sent w ith the call and you r phone recognizes it).
[ 53 ] Contacts 5 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the Groups list a nd select a contact group. 2 Select Opti on s â Ringing t one . A list of r inging tones opens. 3 Use the scroll key to select the r in ging tone you wish to u se for the contact or group and pr ess Select . T o remove the r inging tone, se lect Default tone from the list of ringing tone s. Note: For an individual contact, the ph one will always use the r inging tone that was assigned last. So, if you first change a group ringing tone and th en the r inging tone of a single con tact that belongs to that gro up, th e rin ging t one o f th e sing le con tact will be u sed when the contact calls you the next tim e. Tip: T o listen to a r inging tone, go to Recorder . Send contact information 1 In the Con tacts directory , scr oll to the card you want to send. 2 Select Opti on s â Send then select the m ethod, th e choices are: Via text message , Via e-m ail (ava ilable only if th e correct e-mail settings are in place), via Infrar ed , o r via Bluet ooth . The contact card you want to send has now become a âÂÂbus iness car dâ . Fo r furthe r infor matio n, see âÂÂMessagingâ chapter 9, on page 69 , âÂÂSend and r eceive data via infraredâ on page 140, and âÂÂSend data via Bluetoothâ on page 136. Y ou can add received bu siness cards to your Con tacts directory . See âÂÂR eceive sma rt message sâ on pag e 85 for furth er inform ation. Glos sary: When you send or receive contact information, the term âÂÂbusiness cardâ is used. A business card is a contact card in a format suitable to be sent in a te xt message, usually in âÂÂvCardâ format. ⢠MANAGE CONTACT GROUPS Optio ns in the G ro ups li st vi ew are: Open , New group , Delete , Rename , Ring ing tone , Contacts info , He lp , and Exit .
[ 54 ] 5 Y ou can create con tact groups, wh ich can, for example, be used as distribution lists for sending te xt messages and e-mail. See also âÂÂAdd a ringing tone for a contact card or grou pâ on page 52. Create contact groups 1 In the Con tacts directory , press to ope n the Groups list. 2 Select Opti on s â New group . 3 Writ e a name fo r the g roup or use th e de faul t nam e Gr ou p and pr ess OK . Add members to a group 1 In the Cont acts directory , scroll to the contact you want to add to a group a nd select Opti on s â A dd to gr oup: . A lis t of available groups opens. 2 Scroll to the gr oup to wh ich you want to add the contact an d press . ADD MULT IPLE MEMBERS A T A TIME 1 In the Grou ps list, open a gr oup and select Opti on s â Ad d m e mb e r s . 2 Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. Repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add and press OK to a dd them to the selected group. Remove members from a group 1 Go to the Groups list, scr oll to the group you want to m odify , and press . 2 Scroll to the con tact you want to r emove and select Opti ons â Remo ve fro m gr oup . 3 Press Ye s to remove the con tact from the group.
[ 55 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 6 Cam era and Ima ges Wit h the cam era you can tak e pictures of peop le or even ts while on the m ove. The pictur es ar e automaticall y saved i n the Image s ap plication , where you can re name them a nd organize them in folders. Y ou can also send photos to your friends in a multimedia messa ge, as an e-mail attachment, or via a Bluetooth or in frared connect ion. The ca mera produces JPEG pi ctures. Press Camera in standby mode or go to Menu â Camera . Op tions bef ore taking a picture are: Capture , Go to I mages , Settin gs , He lp , an d Exit . Glos sary: JPEG is a standar dized im age compression format. JPE G files can be viewe d with th e most common ima ge viewers , image editors, and In ternet b rowsers. Y ou can r ecognize these files by their *.jpeg extension. ⢠TAKE PICTURES Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . 1 Press Camera in standby mode. The Camera application opens and you can see the view to be ca ptured. Y ou can see the viewfinder and the croppin g lines, which show you the ima ge area to be captured. Y ou ca n als o see the im age coun ter , which shows you how many im ages, depending o n the selected imag e quality , fit in the me mory of your phone. 2 T o take a picture, pr ess .
[ 56 ] 6 Note: Do not move th e phone bef ore the Camera application starts to save the photo. The photos are saved autom atically in the Images application. The Camer a goes into ba tte ry saving mode within a mi nute if the re ha ve been no key pres se s. To co ntinu e t aki ng pictures, press . Afte r the im age has been s aved: ⢠If you do not w ant to save the ph oto in the I mages applicat i on se lec t Opti ons â Delete . ⢠T o return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . Op tion s after a p icture has bee n take n are: New imag e , Delete , Sen d , Rename im age , Go to Images , Settings , Hel p , and Exi t . Impo rtant : Obey all local laws gover ning the taking of pictures. Do not use this feature ille gally . Settings In the C amera applicati on setting s, you can adju st the image qual ity settin g and change th e defau lt image name. 1 Select Menu â Camera â Opt ions â Setting s . 2 Scroll to the settin g you want to change: ⢠Image qual ity - High , Normal , and Basic . T he better the im age quality , th e more mem ory the im age cons umes. S ee a lso âÂÂI mages and memory consumptionâ on page 5 8. ⢠Default image name - By defa ult, Camera names photos in the for mat â Image .jpgâ . Default im age name allows you to set a name for the pictures taken. Example: If you s et âÂÂBea châ as the defau lt image nam e, Camer a will na me all the pictures yo u take âÂÂBeach âÂÂ, âÂÂB each(0 1)âÂÂ, âÂÂBe ach(02 )â , and so on, until you change the setting. ⢠Memor y in u se - Select whether you w ant to store your images in the phone memo ry or the memor y card, if you use one.
[ 57 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 CAMERA MODE AFFECT S IMAGE SIZE AND OR IENTATION With the different Camera modes, you can affect the size and orientation of the picture to be ta ken. When you are ta king a picture, press or to change between the dif ferent modes. Choose: ⢠Stan dard when you want to take normal landscape pictures, ⢠P ortra it when you want to take a smaller icon -sized, ve rtical picture, which can be added to a contact card, or ⢠Nigh t whe n the lighting is dim and the Camera needs a lon ger exposure time for the picture to be of good quality . Note that, in dim conditions, any movement wh ile taking a picture may cause it to get blu rred. The image siz e and orientation is th e same for Stan dard and Night . Tip: T ry out the different Ca mera modes to see how they affect the picture taken. Stan d ard , P or tra it , an d Ni ght m o des ⢠When you are taking a picture in Standard or Ni ght mode, the viewfinder resolution is 1 60x120 pixels and 80x96 for P ortrait mode. ⢠The images taken in Standard or Night m ode are saved in 640 x480 pixel (VGA) f ormat and those ta ken in P ortrait mode a re saved in 80x96 pix el form at.
[ 58 ] 6 ⢠When you are viewing images, they are scaled to fit the display , which has 176x 208 pi xels. T his me ans that S tandard and Ni ght mod e pict ures will appear more detailed when v ie wed on a higher resolution screen, for example, a com puter or w hen z oomed in Im ages. Glos sary: Resolution - A measure for the sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolu tion refers to the number of dots (pixels) in an image or a display . The more pixels ther e are, the m ore de tailed the picture is. R esolu tion i s usual ly me asured i n pix els, for ex ample , 640x480=300 kilopixels (kpix)=0.3 megapixels (Mpix). IMAGE S AND MEMOR Y CONSUM PTION Y our phone has 3.4 MB (megabytes) of free memory for im ages, contact information, calendar , m essages, an d so on. See âÂÂShar ed memoryâ on page 18. P ortrait images (always taken in High quality) ar e so small that they take u p very little memory . Images taken using the High qu ality setting and those taken in Night mode take up the most memory . If 1 MB of memory is used for images only , it would fi t approximate ly 22 Normal quality images taken in Standard mode. I n the table below , you can see ap proximately how ma ny images would f it in 1 Mb of memory . Tip: By using a memory card with your phone you can increas e the number of i mages you can s tore. Image quality Ima ge ty pe Basic No rma l High St and ar d 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18 Port rait - - > 300
[ 59 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 ⢠STORE P ICTUR ES I N IM AGES Go to Menu â Images . Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this func tion. Do not switch the phone on when wir eless phone use is prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Images allows you to view , organiz e, delete, and send photos and pictures stored in your phone. In Imag es you ca n organize images: ⢠take n w ith the camer a, ⢠sent to your Inbox in a multimedia or a picture message, as an e-mail attachment, via an infrared or Bluetooth connection. After rece iving the ima ge in Inbo x, you n eed to save it in Imag es. In the Im ages main view , you can see a list o f photos and folde rs. The list shows: ⢠the dat e and time a photo or an image w as taken or sa ved, ⢠a small thumbnail picture, a preview of the image, and ⢠the number o f images inside a f older , and ⢠a t ab showing w heth er the phot os or fo lders are lo cated in the phoneâÂÂs memo ry or the memo ry ca rd, if you use one. Op tion s in Imag es are: Open , Sen d , Image upl oader , Dele te , Mo ve to folder , New fold er , Mark /Unmark , Rename , Receive v ia infrared (on ly from a digital camera that supports the IrT ran-P protocol, otherwise u se the Infrared application, See page 140), View details , A dd to F avorites , Update thumbnails , Help , and Exi t .
[ 60 ] 6 View images Note: When y ou open Ima ges and y ou use a me mory c ard, the s tarti ng tab is de term ined by which memory is se le cted as the Memory in use . 1 Press or to move fr om one memor y tab to another . 2 T o browse th e images, press and . 3 Press , to open a n image. When the image is ope n, you can see the name of the image and the number of images in the folder on the top of the displa y . When you are viewing an image, pressing o r takes you to the next or previous picture in the cu rrent folder . Y o u can view a nimated G IF files in the sam e way as other ima ges. Anim atio ns are played on ly once. When an animation stops, you will see a fixed image. T o view the animation again, you must cl ose it and then r eopen it. Optio ns when vi ewi ng an ima ge are : Send , Rotate , Zoom in , Zoom out , Fu ll screen , Delete , Rename , View detai ls , A dd to F avorites , Help , an d Exit . ZOOM I N OR ZOO M OU T 1 Select Opti on s â Zoom i n or Zoom out . Y ou can see the z ooming ratio at the top of the displa y . See also the section âÂÂK e yboard shortcutsâ later in this chapter . 2 Pr es s Back to ret urn to t he initia l view . Note: The zoom ratio is not stored permanently . Y ou can not zoom in on G I F an imations while they are playing. Full sc reen When you select Opt ions â Full scr een , the pa nes around th e picture are removed so that you can see more of the image. Press to go back to the initial view.
[ 6 1 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 Move the focal poi nt When you are zooming or view ing an image in full screen m ode, use the scroll key to m ove the focal poin t to the le ft, right, up, or down , so that you can take a closer look at one part of the picture, for examp le, its upper right corner. Ro ta te Select Opti on s â Rotate â Le ft or to rotate an image 9 0 degrees counterclockwise or Right to rotate the image clockwise. The rotation status is not stored permanently . KE Y B O A R D S H O R T C U T S ⢠Rotate: - counterclockwise, - clockwise. ⢠- zoom i n, - zoo m out, p ress and hold to return to the nor mal v ie w . ⢠- chan ge between f ull screen and nor mal view . IMAGE DETA ILS VIEW T o view the detailed information about an image, scroll to the image and se lec t Opti ons â View detai ls . A list of i mage information appears: Format - JPEG , GIF , PNG , TIF F , MBM , BMP , WBMP , OTA , WM F , Unsupported , or Unk no wn . Date and Ti me - when the image was created or saved, n x n - th e size of the im age in pixels, see the glossary explanation, on page 58. Resolutn . - t he si ze o f the image in pi xe ls. Se e th e glossar y ex plana tion, on page 5 8. Size - in bytes or kilobytes (kB), Color - T rue color , 65536 colors , 4096 colors , 256 color s , 16 colors , Grays cale , or Black/w hite . Arrange images and folders ⢠T o remove an image or folder , scroll to it an d select Opti ons â Delete .
[ 62 ] 6 ⢠T o rename an image or a folder , scr ol l to the image or folder you want to rename and select Opti ons â Rename . Wr ite the n ew name and press . See â Actions comm on to all applicationsâ on page 15 for further inf ormation on how to cr eate folders and mark and m ove items to folders . Send images Y ou can send photos or images via different messaging services. 1 Scroll to the im age you want to send and select Opti ons â Send . 2 Then sele ct the method, the choices are Via m ultimedi a , Via e-mail , Via infra red , an d Via Blu etooth . ⢠If you selec t to send th e image in an e-mail or a mul timedi a mes sage, an editor opens. Press to select the r ecipient(s) from th e Contacts directory or write the ph one number or e-mail address of the r e cipient in th e To : fie ld. Add text or sound and select Opti on s â Send . For more inf ormation , see âÂÂCre ate and send new messagesâ on page 76. ⢠If you want to send the image via infrared or Bluetooth, see âÂÂSen d data via Bluetoothâ on page 136, and âÂÂSend and receive data via infraredâ on page 140 for more information. Picture messages folder Op tion s in t he Pictu re me ss ages fo lder are: Open , Sen d , Delete , Mar k/ Unmark , Rename , View deta ils , Help , an d Exit . In the Picture messages folder , you can find gr aphics sent to you in picture messages. If you want to sav e a gr aphic y ou have r ecei ved in a pictu re message, go t o Messag ing â Inbox , open the me ssage, a nd select Opti ons â Save pic ture . VIEW PICT URES 1 Scrol l to the pict ure you want to vie w and press . The pic ture open s. Press to view the next pictur e in the f older . 2 Press Back to return to the Pictures main view .
[ 63 ] Video recorder 7 7 Video recorder Go to Menu â Video recorder . Note: Obey all local laws governing the taking of videos. Do not u se this feature illegally . Y our phone must be s witched on to use the Video r ec o rd e r . D o n o t sw itch th e phone on when wi rele ss phone use is prohib ite d or when i t ma y c a us e i n t er fe re n c e o r d a n ge r . Wit h the Video rec order you can recor d video clips, an d play video clips st or ed on your phone or on a m emory card. Also, the Video recorder is in tegrated with the m essaging features allowing you to easily sen d created clips. Video recorder uses sh ared memor y . See â Shared memor yâ on page 18. ⢠RECORD A VIDEO CLIP Glos sary: 3GPP file format (.3gp) is the standard video file format for Multimedia M essaging. Y ou can record video clips up to 95 kB in size , or approximately 1 5 seconds in duration. Recorded vide o clips are in the .3gp for mat. 1 T o begin recording open the Video rec order a nd sel ect Optio ns â Record and you can see th e view to record. 2 T o start recording press . The progr ess bar on th e bottom of th e scre en shows you how m u ch r ec or di ng time rem ains. T o p aus e recording at any time press . T o immediately pla y the video clip you just recorded, press . The video clip is saved to eith er the phoneâÂÂs m emory or the m emory card, depending on the s e tting of your Memor y in us e . See âÂÂSet up your Video recorderâ on page 64. Op tion s in vide o cl ip vie w of Vide o reco rder are : Play , Record , Send , Dele te , Rename , Se ttings , Abo ut pr od uc t , Help , and Exit .
[ 64 ] 7 ⢠W ATC H A V ID EO CL IP T o watch a video clip from the Video recorder video clip li st: 1 Open the Vide o recorder . 2 Scroll to a video clip and select Optio ns â Play . Once a video clip is playing, you have similar options available to you as when playing a vide o clip in â RealOne Playerâ¢â . The ex ception is volume control, as Video recorder does not record sou nd. See âÂÂVideo recorder â on page 63. Send video clips Y ou can send video clips by using th e Send option from you r video clip list. 1 Scroll to the video clip you wan t to send and select Opt ions â Sen d . 2 Select one of th e four ways you have of sending your video clip, Via m ultimedia , Via e-m ail , Via Blu etooth , or Via in frared . Set up your Video recorder Y ou can define whether you store your video clips in the phoneâÂÂs memory or on the memory card, if you have one , and how to name your video clips. Select Opti on s â Se ttings . ⢠Memor y in us e - Ch oose between Phone me mory an d Mem ory card . ⢠Default video name - Define the default n ame of your video clips. Example : If you set âÂÂH olid ayâ as the d efau lt vide o cli p nam e, Vid eo recor der will name all the video clips you take âÂÂHolidayâÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(0 1)âÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(02) â , and so on, until you change the setting again.
[ 65 ] RealOne Playe r⢠8 8 RealOne Playe r⢠Go to Menu â RealOne Player . With the RealOne Player you can play media files st o red in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or on a memory card, or play music and video files and stre am liv e conten t from the inte rnet. Optio ns in list view are: Play , Open , Rename , Dele te , New folder , Mo ve to folder , Ma rk/Un mark , Send , A dd to F avorites , Settin gs , Abou t product Hel p , and Exi t . Glo ssary: Media files are video, m usic or audio cli ps which you c an play on a med ia player like the RealO ne Player . Files with exten sions .3gp, .mp4, . a m r , . r m , . ra m, .r a a n d . rv . are suppor ted by the RealOne Player . RealOn e P layer u ses s hare d memor y . See âÂÂSha red m emoryâ on page 18. ⢠PLAY MEDIA FILES Y ou can pla y any music or video file from the list shown when you start the RealOne Player , or directly f rom the internet. T o play a media file stor ed in you r phoneâÂÂs memory or memory card, open RealOne Play er , scroll to th e file and select Opti ons â Pla y . Glo ssary: Str eaming is play ing sound or vide o in rea l t ime as it is do wn load ed from the in ternet, as opposed to storing it in a local f ile first.
[ 66 ] 8 T o play a media f ile directly , or stream live content f rom the in ternet: 1 Select Opti on s â Op en â URL addr ess . 2 Enter the URL of th e site you want to play or stream content from. Befor e your medi a file or str eam begin s playing, your phone will connect to th e site and load the fil e. Note: Y ou cannot connect to a s i te unless you have configured an Access P oint, see Default Access P oint settin g on pag e 67. Glo ssary: Buffering is the tem porary storage of a p art of your streaming content into the phoneâÂÂs m emory before it is played. Media guide From you r RealO ne Pl ayer yo u can open a bro wser page con taining a m edia guide with links to streaming m edia sites and files. T o view the media guide , open RealOn e Player and select Opti ons â Open â Guide . V olume control ⢠T o increase the volume press , or to decrease the volume press . ⢠T o mute the s ound pr ess and hold u ntil th e indic ator is di splay ed. ⢠To turn on th e sound p ress and h old unt il you se e the indi cator . ⢠SEND MEDIA FILES Y ou can send m edia files by using the Sen d option from you r video clip options list. 1 Scroll to the f ile yo u want to send and select Optio ns â Send . 2 Select one of the th ree ways you have of sending your file, Via infra red , Via Blu etooth or Via m ultimedi a .
[ 67 ] RealOne Playe r⢠8 ⢠CHANGE THE SETTINGS Menu â RealO ne Pl ayer â Op tio ns â Setting s To c ha n g e t h e Vide o settings, sele ct Video to open the following list of settings: ⢠Video qu ality - Choose Sh ar p im ag e s to have better picture quality , but slower frame rate, or High fram erate for fast er frame rate, but lower picture quality . ⢠Au tomatic sc aling - Cho o se On to have automatic resizing of the video image. To c ha n g e t h e Playback se ttings, se lect Playback to open the following setting: ⢠Repeat - Ch oose On to have th e playing video o r audio file restart automatically once it has finished. To c ha ng e th e Network settings, select Network to open the followi ng list of se ttings: ⢠Default Acc ess P oi nt - As defin ed in Connectio n sett ings , see â Access pointsâ on pa ge 3 6. ⢠Bandwidth - Ch oose Au tomat ic to have th e best delivery ra te available. ⢠Maximu m bandwi dth - Choose th e maximum b andwidth for streaming content. ⢠Connection tim e-out - Open t h e slider view to change the waiting time for the initial server connection on a streaming session. ⢠Server tim e- out - Open the slider vie w to change the tim e allowed for no response f rom the serv er . ⢠Lo west P ort or Highest P ort - Cho ose the port wh ich is available f or streaming. If not sure of the number , ask your service provider . To c ha n g e t h e Proxy settings, se lect Proxy to open the f ollowing l ist of settings: ⢠Use Pr oxy / Host address / Po r t - Choose wh e ther a pr oxy is used.
[ 68 ] 8 Tip: When you select one of the settings a tab view is opened. Press or t o move between the different settin g tabs. The following icons indicate which setting you are in : for Vide o for Playback for Network , an d for Proxy .
[ 69 ] Messaging 9 9 Messaging Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use the f unctions in the Messaging folde r . Do not switc h the phone on whe n wirele ss phone use is prohibited or wh en it may cause interference or danger . Go to Menu â Mes sa g in g Options in th e Messaging main view: Create message , Connect (show n if you have defined settings for the mailbox), or Disc onnec t (s h o wn i f th er e is an active connection to mailbox), SIM me ssages , Cell broa dcast , Service com m an ds , Se ttings , Hel p , and Exit . In Messaging you can cr eate, send, receive, vie w , edit, and organize: ⢠text mess ages, ⢠multimedia messages, ⢠e-mail m essages, and ⢠smart messages, special text messages containing data. In addition to these, you can receive messages an d data via an infrared or Bluetooth connection, receive service messa ge s, ce ll broadcas t messages as well as send service com mands. T ext and multim edia m essages us e shar ed mem ory . See â Share d memo ryâ on page 1 8. When you open Messaging, you c an see the New message function an d a list of default f olders: Inbox - contain s received messages exce pt e-mail and cell br oadcast messa ges. E-m ail m essages a re st ored in the Mailbox . Y ou can read cell broadcas t messages by selecting Opti ons â Cell bro adcast . My fold ers - for organizing your messages into folders . Tip: Organize your messages by adding new folders un der My folders. Tip: When yo u have ope ned one of the def ault fo lders , for ex ample , Sent , you can easily move be tween th e fold ers: by pr essing to open the next fold er ( Outbox ), or by pressing to open the pr eviou s fold er ( Drafts ).
[ 7 0 ] 9 Mailb ox - Whe n you o pen this fo lder , you ca n eit her c onnec t to your remote m ailbox to r etrieve yo ur new e-mail messages or view you r previously retrieved e-mail messa ges of fline. See page 88 fo r further i nformatio n o n online and of fline modes. Af ter you have d efin ed set tings for a new m ail box, the name given to that m ailbox will replace Mailb ox in the main view . See âÂÂSettings fo r e-mailâ on page 97 Dra fts - stores draft messages that have not bee n sent. O ut box - is a temporary st orage place for m e ssa ges waiting to be sent. Sent - stores the last 15 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂSettings for the Sent folderâ on page 1 00. Rep ort s - you can r equest the system to send you a deli very report of the text me ssages , smart me ssages , and multimedi a me ssages you have sent. T o turn on delivery report reception, select Opti ons â Settings â text messa ge or Multim edia me ssage , scroll to Receive r eport , and select Ye s . Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail addr e ss might not be possible. Note: Before you can create a multimedia m essage, write an e -mail, or connect to your remote mailbox, you must have the correct connection s ettings in place. See âÂÂSettings needed for e-mailâ on page 8 1 and âÂÂS ettings needed for mu ltimedia m essagingâ on page 78. ⢠MESSAGING - GEN ERAL INFORMATION The me ssage s tatus i s always either draft, s ent, or r eceived. M essages can be saved to the Drafts folder befo re they are sent. Messages are temporar ily placed in Outbox to wait for sending. After a message has been sent, you can find a copy of the mes sage in th e Sent folder . Received and sent messages are in read-only st ate until you select Reply or Forw ar d , which copi es the message to an editor . Note that you cannot forward e -mail mess ages sent by you. Note: Messages or data that have been sent via an infrared or Bluetooth connection are n ot saved in the Draft or Sent f olders.
[ 7 1 ] Messaging 9 Open a rec eived message When yo u receive a message, and the note 1 new message is shown in standby mode. Press Show to open the message. If you have m ore than one n e w messa ge, press Show to open the In box to see the m essage headings. T o open a me ssage in Inbox, scroll to it and press . Add a recipient to a m e ssage When you crea te a message , there a re sever al ways to add a recipi ent: 1 Add recipients f rom the Contacts directory . T o open the Contacts directory , pr ess or in the To: or Cc: fields, or select Opt ions â A dd recipient . Scroll to a con tact and press to mark it. Y ou can mark several recipients at a time. Press OK to return to the message. The recipients are listed in the To : field and automatically separated with a semicolon ( ; ). 2 Write the phone num be r or e- ma il address of the r ecipie nt in th e To : field, or 3 Copy the recipie nt information f rom another application and then paste it in the To: fie ld. See âÂÂCopy te xtâ on page 75 . Press to th e left of the cur sor if you wan t to delete a r ecipient. Note: If you wr ite many ph one number s or e-mail addr esses in the To : fie ld, you must remember to add a semicolon ( ; ) be tween each item to separate them from each other . When you retrieve recipients from the Contacts director y , th e semicolon is added au tomatically . Exa mpl e : 2 14 12 3 45 6 ; 972 45 6 876 Sending options T o change how a message is sent, select Opti ons â Send ing options when you are editi ng a me ssage. W hen yo u save the message , its sendin g sett ings are als o sa v ed.
[ 72 ] 9 ⢠WRITE TEXT Y ou can key in text in two different ways, using the method traditionally used in mobile ph ones or another m ethod called predictive text input. Icon s: and indicate the selected cas e. means that the first letter in the message, or the first letter of the next word, is written in upper case, and all other letters are written in lower case. indicates number m ode. Use traditional text input The indicator is shown on the top r ight of th e display when you are wr iting text usi ng traditional text input. ⢠Press a number ke y ( - ) , repeatedly until th e de sired ch aracter appea rs. Note that there are mor e characters available f or a numbe r key than are printed on the key . ⢠T o insert a number , press an d hold the number k ey . T o switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is locat e d on the sam e key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and then key in th e letter . ⢠If you make a m istake, press to remove a character . Press and hold to clear more than one character . ⢠The most common punctuation marks are ava ilable under . Press repeatedly to reach the de sired punctuation m ark. Press t o open a list of special ch aracters. Use the scroll key to m ove through the list and press OK to select a ch aracter . ⢠T o insert a space, press . T o move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠T o switch between u pper and lower case, pr ess . Tip: T o turn predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly when writing text.
[ 73 ] Messaging 9 Use predictive te xt input T o activate predictive tex t input, press and se lect Predictive tex t on . This will activate pr ed ic ti ve text input f or all editors in the phone. The indicator is shown at the top of the display . 1 Write the de sired wor d by pressing the keys - . Press each key only on ce for one letter . The wor d changes after every key press. Note: Do not pay attentio n to what appears on the display . The word match is evolvin g. W ait u ntil you have keyed in the whole wor d before you check the result. For example, to write â Nokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, pr ess for N, for o , fo r k, for i, and for a . As you can see, the word suggestion changes after each key press. 2 When you have finished th e word, check that it is correct. ⢠If th e word is cor rect, you can confirm it by pressin g or by pressin g to insert a s pace. The underlining disappears and you can begin to write a new word. ⢠If the w ord is not correct, you have the f ollowing options: ⢠Press repeatedly to vie w the matching words the dictionary has found one by on e. ⢠Press and sele ct Predic tive text â Matches to v iew a list of ma tch in g words. Sc roll to the word yo u want to use and press to select it. â¢I f t h e ? character is shown after th e word, the word you intended to write is not in the diction ary . T o add a word to the dictionary , pr ess Spell , key in th e word (max. 32 l etters) u sing tr adition al tex t input, and press Save . The word is added to the dictionary . When the dictionary becomes full, a n ew word replaces the oldest added word.
[ 74 ] 9 â¢T o r e m o v e t h e ? and cle ar characters one by one from the word, press . TIPS ON USI NG PREDICTI VE TEXT INPU T ⢠T o erase a character , press . Pr ess and hold to cle ar more than one character . ⢠T o change between the different character cases Ab c , abc , and ABC , press . Note that if you press quickly twice the pr edictive text input is turned of f. ⢠T o insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desire d number key . Or press and select I n s e r t n u m b er , key in the n umbers you want, and press OK . T o switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠The most common punctuation marks are ava ilable under . Press and then repeatedly to r each the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. U se the scroll key to s croll through the list and press OK to select a character . Or press and select I n s e r t s y mb ol . Tip: The predictive text input will tr y to gu e ss which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The orde r and av ailability of the punctuation m arks depend on the la nguage of the dictionar y . ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary h as found one by one. Y ou ca n also press , select P re d i c t i v e te x t and select: ⢠M a t c h e s - to view a list of words th at correspond to your key presses. Scroll to the de sired word and press the . ⢠Insert word - to add a word (max. 32 letters) to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. ⢠Edit word - to open a vie w where you can ed it the word, available only if the word is active ( unde rlined).
[ 75 ] Messaging 9 Write compound words Write the fir st half of a compound word and confirm it by pr essing . Write the last part of the compound wor d and complete the compo und word by pressing to add a space. T u rn o ff pred ictive t ex t Press and sele ct Predic tive text â Off to tu rn predictive text input off for all editor s in the phone. Editing option s When you p ress , the f ollowing options appear (depending on th e editing mode and situation you are in): ⢠Predictiv e text (predictive text in put), Alp ha m ode (traditional text input), Number mode . ⢠Cut , Copy - available on ly if text h as been selected first. ⢠Pa s t e - available only when tex t has bee n either cut or copied to the clipboard. ⢠Insert number , Insert sy mbol , and ⢠Writin g langu age - changes the in put language for all edi tors in the phone. See âÂÂPhone settingsâ on page 29. COPY TE XT If you wan t to copy text to the clipboard, the following are the easiest methods: 1 T o select letters a nd words, press and hold . A t the same time, press or . As the selection m oves, text is h ighlighted. T o select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . 2 T o end th e selection, stop pressing the scroll key . 3 T o copy the te xt to cli pboard, while still holding , press Copy . Or , release and then press it once to o pen a list of editing comma nds, f or exa mpl e, Copy or Cut . If you want to rem ove the s elected text f rom the docum ent, pres s .
[ 76 ] 9 4 T o in sert the te xt in to a d ocum ent, pre ss a nd h old an d pre ss P aste . Or , press once and select Pa s t e . ⢠CREATE AND SEND NEW MESSAGES Note: When sending m essa ges, your phone may displa y th e words Mes sage Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message center programmed in to your phone. This is not an indic ation that th e mess age has been received at t he intended destination. For more details about the messaging service, check with you r service provider . Y ou ca n start to cr eate a message in two ways: ⢠By selecting New message â Create: â text message , Multi m edia m essage , or E-mail in th e Messaging main view , or ⢠Start to create a mes sage from an application that has the option Sen d . In this case the file that w as selected (such a s an image or text) is a dded to the mess age. Write and send text me ssages Op tion s in the pictu re mess age e dit or are : Send , Remo ve picture , A dd recipient , Del et e , Insert , Mess age details , Hel p , and Exit . 1 Select New message . A list of m essage options opens. 2 Select Create: â text message . The editor opens with the cursor in the To : fiel d. Press to sele ct re cipien t(s) fro m the C ontacts di recto ry or write the phone n umber of the recipien t. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. Press to move to the m essage field. 3 Write th e mess age. Note: Y our pho ne suppo rts sendin g of m ultipl e text m essages at t he same time, ther efor e, the nor mal 160 cha ract ers l imit for one t ext mess age can b e exceed ed. If y our text exc eeds 16 0 chara cters, it will be sent in two or mo re messa ges and message sending may cost you more.
[ 77 ] Messaging 9 In the navigatio n bar , you can see the mes sage length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 1 0 (2) means that you can still add 1 0 characters for the text to be sen t as two messages. 4 To send t he me ssa ge, se l ect Opti ons â Sen d or pr e ss . SEND SMAR T MESSAGES Optio ns in t he te xt mes sage ed itor a re: Send , A dd recip ient , Ins ert , Delete , Mess age details , Se n d ing options , Help , an d Exit . Smart mes sages are s pecial text messag es that can conta in data. Y ou can se nd sm a rt mes s age s su c h as: ⢠picture messages , ⢠business car ds containi ng contact in formation in generic (v Card) form at, ⢠Calendar notes (vCalendar format). For more information, see â Send contact informationâ on page 53, âÂÂSen d calendar entriesâ on page 1 09, and â Send bookmarksâ on page 1 22. Tip: Y ou can also receive ringing tones, oper ator logos, or settings fr om service providers. CREAT E AND SEND PICTURE MESSAGE S Op tion s in the pictu re mess age e dit or are : Send, A dd recipien t, Insert, Remo ve p icture, Delete, Message details, Help, and Exit. Y our phone allows you to sen d and receive pi cture messages. Picture messages are text messages th at contain small black- and-white graphics. There are sever al default pictu res available in the Picture msgs. folder in Images . Note: This function can be used on ly if it is supported by you r service provider . Only p hones that offer picture m essage features can receive and display picture messa ges.
[ 78 ] 9 T o send a picture message: 1 There are two possibilities, eith er: â¢G o t o Images â Pic t ur e ms g s. and select a picture to be sent. Select Opti ons â Send , or ⢠Select Messag ing â New mess age â Create: â T ext mes sage and select Insert â Pictu re . 2 Enter recipien t information and add text. 3 Select Opti on s â Send or press . Note: Each picture message is made u p of severa l text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one te xt message. Multimedia messages A multimedia m essage can contain text, images and either video or sound clips. Note: This function can be used on ly if it is supported by you r service provider . Only d evices that offer multimedia message or e-m ail features can receive and display multimedia messages. Devices that do not have th ese features may re ceive details of a link to a web page. SETTI NGS NEEDED FOR MULTI MEDIA MESSAGING Options in t he multimedia message editor are: Send , A dd recipient , Insert , Pr ev iew m ess age , Objects , Remo ve , Delete , Mess age details , Se nd in g o pt io ns , Hel p , and Exi t . Y o u may rec eive the settings as a smart message from your service provi der . See âÂÂReceive smart mess agesâ on page 85. For availability of and subscription to data services, ple ase contact your service provider .
[ 79 ] Messaging 9 1 Go to Settings â Connect ion settin gs â Ac ce s s poin ts and defi ne the settings for a multimedia messaging a ccess point: Connection na me - Give a descriptive name for the connection. Sess ion mode - Select a data con nection type: GSM dat a , High speed GSM , or GPRS . Gateway IP ad dr ess - enter the addr ess. Exa mpl e : D omain names such as www .noki a. ca can be trans l ated into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124.1 95 . Hom epage - enter the address of th e multimedia messaging cent er . ⢠If you selected GSM data or High speed GSM , fill in: Dial-up numb er - a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , f ill in: A ccess point nam e - the name given to you by your service provider . For further infor mation on different data connections, see also âÂÂConnection settin gsâ on page 33. 2 Go to Messag ing â Optio ns â Settings â Multi m edia m essage . Open Preferred co n nection and select the access point you created to be used as the preferr ed connectio n . See also â Settings for multimedia messagesâ on page 96 . SET UP THE MESSAGI NG STORE The messaging store defin es whether the phoneâÂÂs mem ory or the memory card are used as the default. T o define the messaging store: Messag ing â Opti on s â Settings â Mess aging store and select either the phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emory card, if one is u sed. CREAT E MULTIMEDIA MESSA GES Note: When yo u are s endin g a multim edi a mess age to any phone ot her th an the N okia 3 650, N okia 3600 or Nokia 7650, i t is reco mmen ded to use a smaller i mage size a nd a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds.
[ 80 ] 9 The default setting is Image siz e: Small . If you wa nt to che ck the image size s e tting, go to Me ssaging â Optio ns â Settings â Multimedia message or select Options â Sending options when you are crea ting a multimedia messa ge. When you ar e sending a multimedia messa ge to an e-mail address or another Nokia 3650 , Nokia 3600 or Nokia 7650, select Optio ns â Sending Options â Image size â Larg e when you are creating a multimedia message. 1 In Messaging, select New message â Create: â Multimedia m essage and press . 2 Press to select the re cipient(s) from the Contacts d irect ory or write the phone n umber or e-mail address of the r ecipient in the To : fiel d. Add a semicolon (;) to separate each recipien t. Press to m ove to the next field. 3 Y ou can add the d ifferent objects of the multimedia me ssage in any order you want. ⢠T o add an image, select Opti ons â Insert â Ima g e or New imag e . ⢠T o add a sound, select Opti ons â Insert â Sound c lip or New sound clip . When sou nd has been added, the icon is shown in the navigation bar . ⢠T o add video, select Opti on s â Insert â Vide o clip . ⢠To wr ite text, press . ⢠If you select Insert â Image , Sound clip , Video c lip , or T emplate , a list of item s op ens. S cro ll to the i tem you wis h to add a nd press Select . Note: If you ch ose Image , first you need to s elect whethe r the imag e is stored in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emor y ca rd, if one is us e d. ⢠If you select Inser t â New image , Cam era opens and you can take a new picture. Press Rem ove to remove the picture and take anoth er instead. ⢠If you select Insert â New sound clip , Recorder op ens and you ca n record a new sound. The new photo or sound is automatically saved and a copy is in serted in the m e ssage. Note: A multimedia message can contain only one photo and one sound or video clip.
[ 8 1 ] Messaging 9 4 To send t he me ssa ge, se l ect Opti ons â Sen d or pr e ss . PREVIEW A MUL TIMEDIA MESSAGE T o see what the multimedia m essage will look like, select Opti ons â Pr evi ew m ess age . REM OV E AN OB JE CT FR OM A MU LTI MED IA MESSAGE T o remove a multimedia obje ct, select Opti on s â Remo ve â Ima g e Vi de o c l ip or Sou nd c lip . Press to remove text. W ORK WIT H DI FFERENT M EDIA OB JECTS T o see all the different media objects included in a multimedia message, open a multimedia message and select Opti ons â Objects to open the Objects view . In the Ob jects view , you can change th e order of the di fferent objects, delete objects, or open an object in a corresponding application . Optio ns in the Obj ects vi ew are: Open , Insert , Place image fir st / Place text firs t , Remo ve , Hel p , and Exit . E-mail SETTI NGS NEEDED FOR E-M AIL Before you can send , receive, retrieve, reply to, and f orward e-ma il, you must : ⢠Configure an Internet Access P oin t (IAP) correctly . See âÂÂConnection settingsâ on p age 33. ⢠De fine your e-mail sett ings cor rec tly . See âÂÂSett ings fo r e-mai lâ on page 97. Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and Internet Service Provider . WRITE AND SEN D E-MAIL MESSAG ES Optio ns in th e e-m ail ed itor are : Send , A dd recipien t , Insert , Atta chmen ts , Dele te , Mess age detail s , Se n d ing options , Help , an d Exit . 1 Select New message â Create: â E-m ail . The editor opens.
[ 82 ] 9 2 Press to select the re cipient(s) from the Contacts d irect ory or write the e-mail address of the recipient in the To : field. Add a semicolon (;) to separate each recipient. If you want to send a copy of you r e- mail to someone, wr ite the address in the Cc: field. Press to move to the next field. 3 Write the message. If you want to add an attachment to the e -mail, se lec t Opti ons â Inse rt â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , o r Note . w ill appear in the navigation bar to in dicate that the e-mail has an attachm e nt. T emplate adds pre-written tex t to the e -mail. Y ou can also add an attach ment to an e-mail by selecting Options â Attachments in an open e-m ail. The Attachm ents view opens where you can add, view , and remove attachments. Note: If you choose Image , first you need to select whether the ima ge is stored in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emor y ca rd, if one is us e d. 4 T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Optio ns â Remo ve . 5 T o send the e-mail, select Opti ons â Sen d or pr e ss . Note: E-mail messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. In case something goe s wrong while the phone is sending the e-mail, the e-m ail is left to Outbox w ith the status F ailed . Tip: If you want to send other files than photos, sounds, and no tes as attachments , open the appropriate application and select the option Send â Via e-ma il , if available. ATTAC HMENT VIEW - AD D AND REMOVE ATT ACHMEN TS T o add an attachment to an e-ma il, select Opt ions â Attach men ts in an open e-mail. The Attachments view opens wh ere you can add, view , and remove a ttachments. ⢠T o add an attachment, select Opti on s â Insert â Image , Sound c lip , Video cli p , or Note . A list of items opens. Scroll to the one you want to add and press OK . wi ll appear in the n avigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. Note: If you ch ose Image , first you need to s elect whethe r the imag e is stored in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emor y ca rd, if one is us e d.
[ 83 ] Messaging 9 ⢠T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠INBOX - RECEIVE MESSAGES Optio ns in Inbo x are: Op en , Create message , Del et e , Mess age det a ils , Mo ve to folder , Mo ve to phone memory (shown if yo u have def ined the memory card as th e messaging sto re), Mo ve to memory card (shown if you have defined the p honeâÂÂs m emory a s the messaging store), Mark /Unmark , Hel p , and Exit . Messages and data can be recei ved vi a te xt messag e or m ulti media ser vice , via an infrared, or Blu etooth connection. When there are unread messages in Inbox, the icon changes to . In Inbox, unread messages appear in bold. The message icons tell you what kind of a message it is. Here ar e some of the icon s that you may see: for an unre ad text mess age, fo r an unrea d smar t messa ge, for an unre ad multimedia message, for an unre ad s erv ice me ss ag e, fo r data recei ved vi a in frare d, for data received via Bluetooth, and for an unknow n messa ge type. View messages in Inbox T o open a m essage, scroll to the message and pr ess . Use the scroll key to move up and down in the m essage. Press or to move to the previous or next message in the fol der . Options in different message viewers The available options depend on the type of message you have opened for viewing:
[ 84 ] 9 ⢠Save pic ture - saves the pi cture to Imag es â Pictu re msgs. ⢠Reply - copies the addre ss of the sender to the To : field. Select Reply â T o all - to copy the address of the sender and Cc . field recipien ts to the new m essag e. ⢠For w ar d - copies the message contents to an editor . ⢠Call - call b y pressing . ⢠View image - allows you to view and save the image. ⢠Play s ound clip - allows you to listen to the sound in the m essage. ⢠Objects - shows you a list of a ll the different multimedia objects in a multimedia m essage. ⢠Atta chme nts - shows you a list of files sent a s e-mail a ttachments. ⢠Mess age details - shows detailed information abou t a message. ⢠Mo ve to folder / Copy to f older - allows you to move or copy message(s) to My folders, Inbox, or other folder s you have created. See âÂÂMoving items to a f olderâ on page 16. ⢠A dd to Contact s - allows yo u to copy the phone n umber or e-m ail address of the me ssage sender to the Conta cts directory . Choose whether yo u want to creat e a new contact c ard or add the i nformat ion to an existing cont ac t card . ⢠Fin d - S earches the m e ssage for ph one number s, e-mail addresses, and Internet a ddresses. After the search, you can m ake a call or send a mess age to the found number or e-mail address, or save th e data to Contacts or as a bookmark. View multimedia messages in Inbox Y ou ca n recognize multimedia messages by their icon . T o open a m ultimedia message, scroll to it an d press . Y ou can see an image, read a message an d hear a sou nd, simultan eously . If sound is playin g, press or to increase or decr ease the sound volume. If you want to mute the sound, press Sto p .
[ 85 ] Messaging 9 MULTI MEDIA M ESSAGE O BJECTS Optio ns in the O bject s view a re: Open , Save , Send , Call, and Exit . T o see what kind s of media objects have been included in the multimedia messa ge, open the m essage and s elect Opti ons â Objects . In t he Object s view you can view file s that ha ve been i ncluded in the multime dia message. Y ou can choose to save the file in your ph one or to send it, for example, via infr ared to another device. T o open a f ile, scroll to it and press the . Impo rtant : Multimed ia message ob jec ts may contain vir uses or ot herwise be harmful to you r phone or PC. Do not open any a ttachment if you a re not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . For more inf ormation, see âÂÂCer tif. man agementâ on page 43 . Example : Y ou can op en a vCard file and sa ve the contact in forma tion in the file to Contacts. SOUND S IN A MULTIMEDIA MESSAGE Sound objects in a multimedia message are indicated by indicator in the navigation bar . S ounds ar e by default played through the loudspeaker . T o stop the sound, press Stop while sound is playing. Y ou can change the volume level by pressing or . If you want to listen to a sou nd again after all the obj ects have be en shown and the playing of th e sound has stopped, select Opt ions â Play sound c lip . Receive smart messages Tip: If you r eceive a vCard f ile that has a picture attached, the picture will be saved to Contacts as well. Y ou r phone can re ceive ma ny kinds of smart message s, text message s that contain dat a (also cal led Ov er-The -Air (O T A) m essages). T o open a r eceived smart message, open I nbo x, scroll to the smart message ( ), and press . ⢠Pictu re message - to save the picture in the Pictu re msgs. folder in Images for la ter us e, s elec t Optio ns â Save pic ture . ⢠Business card - to save the contac t information, select Opti ons â Save bu siness card .
[ 86 ] 9 Note: If certificates or s ound files are attach ed to business cards, they will not be saved. ⢠Ringing tone - to save the ringing tone to Com poser , select Opti on s â Save . ⢠Operato r logo - to save th e logo, select Opti ons â Save . The operator logo can now be seen in standby mo de instea d of the service provid erâÂÂs own ident ification. ⢠Calendar entry - to save the invitation to Calendar , select Opti on s â Save to Calendar . ⢠W AP m essage - to save the bookmark, select Opti ons â Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to th e Bookmarks list in browser service. If the m essage contains both browser access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data select Optio ns â Save all . Or , se le ct Opti on s â View details to view th e bookmark and access point information separately . If you do not want to save all data, select a setting or bookmark, open the details and select Opti ons â Save to Settings or Save to bookma rks dependin g on what you are viewing. Tip: T o later change the default access point settings for browser service or multimedia m essaging, go to Ser vic e s â Opti ons â Se ttings â Default access poin t or Messaging â Opti ons â Settings â Multim edia mess age â Preferre d connect ion . ⢠E-ma il not ification - Tells you ho w ma ny n ew e- mai ls y ou h ave in yo ur remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information such as subject, sender , attachments, and so on . ⢠In addition, you can r eceive a text message service n umber , voice mailbox number , profile settings for rem ote synchronization, access point settin gs for th e brow ser , m ultimed ia messagi ng or e -mail , access point login script settin gs, or e- mail settings. T o save the settin gs, select Opti ons â Sav e to SM S s e tt. , Save to V oice mail , Save to s ettings or Save to e-ma il sett.
[ 87 ] Messaging 9 Service messages Op tion s when vi ewin g servic e mess age are: Do wnload message , Mo v e to fold er , Mes sage de tails , Help , and Exit . Y ou can order service messages (push ed messages) fr om s e rvice prov id ers. Service messages are notifications of, fo r example, news h eadlines and they may contain a tex t message or address of a browser service. For availability and subscription, contact your service pr ovider . Service provid ers can u pdate an exi sting serv ice message e very tim e a new service message is received. Messages can be updated even if you have moved them to another folder than Inbox. When service messages expire, they are deleted autom atically . VIEWING SERVI CE MESSAGES IN INBOX 1 In Inbox, scroll to a service message ( ) and pr ess . 2 T o downl oad or view the serv ice, press Download message . The n ote Do wnloading me ssage is displayed. T he phone starts to make a data connection, if ne eded. 3 Press Back to retu rn to Inbox. VIEWING SERVI CE MESSAGES IN THE BROWSER When you ar e browsing, select Opti ons â Read service msgs. to download and view new service messages. â¢M Y F O L D E R S Option s in My folders are: Open , New me ssage , Dele te , Mess age details , Move t o folder , New folder , Rename , Help , and Exit . In My folders you can organize your messages into folders , create new folders, and r ename and dele te folders. Select Opt ions â Mo ve to folder , New fold er , or Rename folder . For more information, see âÂÂMove items t o a folderâ on page 16. Te m p l a t e s f o l d e r Y ou can use t ext tem plates t o avoid r ewriti ng messages t hat you sen d often . T o create a n ew template, select Opti ons â New templ ate .
[ 88 ] 9 ⢠REMOTE MAILBOX When you o pen this folder , you can connect to you r remote mailbox: ⢠to retrieve n ew e- mail headings or messages, or ⢠view your pr eviously retrieved e-mail headings or m essages offline. Tip: The Se ttings wizard program inc luded in the PC Suit e for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 can help you config ure access poin t and mailbo x sett ings. Y ou can al so copy exi sting setti ngs, f or example, from yo ur compute r to your ph one. See the CD- ROM supplie d in the sales package. If you sele ct New mess age â Create: â E-mail or Mail box in t he Me ssaging main view and you have not s e t u p your e-mail account, you w ill be prompted to do so. See âÂÂSettings needed for e-mailâ on page 8 1 . When you create a new m ailbox, the n ame you give to the ma ilbox automatically replac es Mail box in the Messaging main view . Y ou can have several mailboxes (max. six ). Open the mailbox When you o pen the mailbox, you can choose wh ether you w ant to view the previously retrieved e -mail messages and e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server . When you s croll to your mailbox an d press , the phone asks you if you want t o Connect t o mailb ox? S elect Ye s to conne ct to your mailbox or No to view previously r etrieved e-ma il messages offline. Another way to star t a c onne ction is to select Optio ns â Connect . VIEW E-M AIL MESSAG ES WHEN ONLINE When yo u are onlin e, you ar e con tinuousl y conn ected t o a remote mailbo x via a data call or a pack et data connection . See âÂÂDa ta con nection indica torsâ on p ag e 12 , âÂÂGSM data callsâ on page 34, and âÂÂP acket data (General P acket Radio Service, GPRS)â on page 3 4. Note: If you are using th e POP3 pr otocol , e- mail message s are not updat ed auto matica lly i n onli ne mode . To see th e newest e-mail messages , yo u need to disconne ct and t hen make a new conne ction to y our mailb ox.
[ 89 ] Messaging 9 Optio ns when vie wing e- mail headings are: Open , New message , Connect / Disc onnect , Retrieve , Dele te , Mess age details , Copy , Mark /Unmark , Hel p , and Exi t . VIEW E-M AIL MESSAG ES WHEN OFFLINE When you view e- mail messages offline, you r phone is not conn ected to the remote mailbox. This mode may help you to save on connection costs. See âÂÂCall costs (system service)â on page 26 for further in formation. T o view e- mail messages offline, you must first retrieve e-mail messa ge s from your mail box, see th e next section . After you have retrieved the e-mail messages to your phone, to e nd the data connection, select Opti on s â Disconnect . Now you can contin ue reading th e retrieved e-mail headings and/or th e retrieve d e-m ail messages of fline. Y ou can write new e-mail messages, re ply to the re trieved e- mail messages, an d forward e-ma i l mess ages. Y ou can order the e-mail m essages to be s ent th e next time you conne ct to the mailbox. When you open Mail box the next time and you want to view a nd read the e-mail messages offline, answ er No to th e Con nect to mail box ? qu ery . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox If you are offline, select Opti ons â Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. The remote mailbox view is similar to th e Inbox folder in Messaging. Y ou can move up and down in the list by pressing or . T he following icons are used to sh ow the status of th e e-mail: - new e-mail ( off line or online mode). The content has not been retrieved from the mailbox to your phone (the arrow in the icon is pointing outwards). - new e-mai l, the content has been retrieved fro m the mailbox (arrow pointing inwards). - for e-mail messages that have been read. - for e-mail headings that have been read an d the message content has been deleted from the phone.
[ 90 ] 9 1 When you h ave an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Opti on s â Retrieve â â¢ New - to retrieve all n ew e-mail m essages to your phone. ⢠Selec ted - to re tr iev e only the e- mai l me ssa ges that h ave been selecte d. Use the Mark/ Unma rk â Mar k / Unm ark commands to select me ssa ges on e by on e. ⢠All - to retr ieve all messages from th e mailbox. T o ca ncel re trieving, p ress Cancel . 2 After yo u have re trieved the e- mail me ssages, you can con tinue viewin g them online. Se lect Opti on s â Disc onnect to close the connection and to view the e- mail messages offlin e. COPY E- MAIL MESSAGES TO ANOTHER FOL DER If you want to copy an e-mail from the remote m ailbox to a folder under My folders, select Opti ons â Copy . Sele ct a folder from the li st and press OK . Open e-mail messages When you are vie wing e-mail m essages either i n online or of fline mode, scroll to the e-mail you want to vie w and press to open it . If the e -mail message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is poin ting outwards) and you are offline an d select Open , you wil l be asked if you want to retrieve this m e ssage from th e mailbox. Note that the data connection is left ope n after th e e-m ail has been retrieved. Se lect Opti ons â Disco nnect to end the data conn ection. Optio ns when vie wing a n e-mai l message a re: Reply , Forwar d , Dele te , Atta chme nts , Mess age details , Mo ve to folder , A dd to Conta cts , Find , Hel p , an d Exit . Disconnect from mailbox When you are on line, select Opt ions â Disc onnec t to end the data call or GPRS conn ection to the r emote mailbox. Se e also âÂÂData connection indicatorsâ on page 12.
[ 9 1 ] Messaging 9 View e-mail attachments Optio ns in the Att achments view are: Open , Retrieve , Save , Sen d , Delete , Help , and Exi t . Open a messag e that has the attachment i ndicator and select Options â Atta chme nts to open the Attachment s view . In the Attachments view , you can ret ri eve, op en, or sa ve a ttac hmen t s. Y o u c an al so se nd att achm ent s via infrared or B luetooth. Impo rtant : E-mail attachmen ts ma y contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your phone or PC. Do not open any attachment i f you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . For more inf ormation, see âÂÂCer tif. man agementâ on page 43 . Retr ieve a ttac hments to th e ph one If the atta chment has a dimmed in dicator , it has not been retrieved to the phone. T o retrieve the attachment, scroll to it and select Optio ns â Retrieve . Note: If your mailbox uses th e IMAP 4 protocol, you can decide w hether to retrieve e-mail h eadings only , messages only , or messages and attachments. With the PO P3 protocol, the options are e-mail he ad i n gs only or messages a nd attachme nts. Tip: T o save memory , you can remove at tachments from an e-mail while retaining them on th e e-mail server . Select Opti ons â Delete in the Attach ments view . Open an attachment 1 In the Attac hment s view , scro ll to an attac hment an d press to open it. ⢠If you are online, the attach men t is retrieved di rectly from the server and opened i n the corr esponding application. ⢠If you are offline, the phone asks if you want to retrieve the attachment to the phone. If you answer Ye s , a connection to the remote mailbox is sta rted. 2 Press Back to return to th e e-mail viewer . Tip: Supported image format s are listed on page 55. T o see a list of other file formats supported by th e Nokia 3600 serie s, see the product information at www .nokia.ca.
[ 92 ] 9 SAVE ATTA CHMENTS SEPA RATELY T o save an attachmen t, select Optio ns â Save in th e Attachm ents view . The attac hment is saved in t he corresponding application. For example, sounds can be saved in Recorder and te xt files (.T XT) in Note s. Attachments such as images can be saved on a m e mory card, if on e is used. Delete e -mail messages T o dele te an e-mail f rom the ph one while still retaining it in the re mote mailbox, select Opti on s â Delete â Ph on e on ly . Note: The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in th e remote mailbox. So, although you del ete the m essage conten t, the e- mail headi ng stays in your phone. If you want to remove the heading as well, you have to first delete the e-ma il messa ge from your remote mailbox and then make a con nection from you r phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. T o del ete an e-mail from both the phone as well as from th e remote m ailbox, se lec t Opti ons â Del et e â Phone and ser ver . Note: If you are offline, the e- mail will be deleted first from your ph one. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it wi ll be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are usin g the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted ar e removed only after you have cl osed the connection to the remote mailbox. UNDEL ETE E-MAIL MESSAG ES WHEN OFFLINE T o cancel deleting an e-mail from both the phone and server , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), a nd select Opt ions â Undelet e . ⢠OUTBOX The Outbox is a temporary storag e place for messages waitin g to be sent. Status o f the messag es in Outbo x ⢠Sending - A connection is being made and the message is being sent.
[ 93 ] Messaging 9 ⢠W aiting/Queu ed - For ex ample, if there are two sim ilar types of messages in Outbox, one of th em is waiting until th e first one is sent. ⢠Resend at (time) - Sending has failed. The phone will tr y to send th e message again after a time-out period. Press Sen d if you wa nt to restart the sending immediately . ⢠Deferr ed - Y ou can set do cuments to be âÂÂon h oldâ while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sen t and select Opti ons â Defer s ending . ⢠F ailed - The maximum number of sending attempts has been reach e d. Sending ha s failed. If you w ere trying to send a text message, ope n the message and check that the Sen ding settings are correct. Exa mpl e : Messages are placed in the Outbox, for example, wh en your phone is outside the system coverage area. Y ou can also schedule e- mail me ssages to be sent the n ext time you connect to your remote mailbox . ⢠VIEW MESSAGES ON A SIM CARD Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view , sele ct Opt ions â SIM mes sages . 2 Select Opti ons â Mark /Unm ar k â Mar k or Mark all to ma rk messages. 3 Select Opti on s â Copy . A list of folders open s. 4 Select a folder a nd press OK . Go to the folder to view the messa ge s. ⢠CELL BROADCAST (SYSTEM SERVICE) Op tion s in Ce ll br oadc ast are: Open , Subscr ibe / Unsub scr ibe , Hot mar k / Unhotma rk , T opic , Se ttings , Help , and Exi t . In the Messaging main view , sele ct Opt ions â Cell broad cast . Y ou can receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your service pr ovider . For available topics and relevant topic n umber s, cont act yo ur ser vic e pr ovider . In the main view yo u can see :
[ 94 ] 9 ⢠the status of the topic: - for ne w , subscribed messages and - fo r new , unsu bscr ibed mess ages. ⢠the topic number , topic name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Y ou wi ll be notified w hen messages belongin g to a flagged topic have arrived. Note: A packet data (GPRS) connection may pr event cell broadcast recep tion. Con tact your servic e provi der for the cor rect GP RS sett ings. For further in formation on the GPR S settings, see âÂÂP acket data (General P acket Radio Service, GPRS )â on page 3 4. ⢠SERV ICE COM MAND E D ITOR In the Messaging main view , select Opt ions â Service c ommand . Y ou can send service request s, such as a ctivation c ommands f or system services (also known as USSD commands), to you r service provider . For more information, c o ntact you r service provider . T o send a request: ⢠in standby mode or w hen you have an active call, key in the command number(s) a nd press Send , or ⢠if you ne ed to ent er l ett ers as w ell as num bers , sel ect Messaging â Opti on s â Service com mand . ⢠MESSAGING SETTINGS The Messaging settings ar e divided in to groups according to the different message types. Scroll to the settings you want to edit and press . Settings for text messages Optio ns when edit ing text messa ge center s ettings are: New msg. center , Edit , Delete , Help , and Exit . Go to Messag ing and select Opti on s â Settings â T ext mes sage to open the following list of settings: ⢠Mess age centers - Lists all the text messag e service centers that h ave been defi ned. S ee â Add a n ew text message center â on page 95.
[ 95 ] Messaging 9 ⢠Msg. center in use (Message center in use)- Defines which message center is used for delivering text messages and s mart messages such as pict ur e messages. ⢠Receive r eport (delivery report)- When this system service is set to Ye s , the sta tus of the sent m essage ( Pe n d i n g , F ailed , Delivered ) is sh own in the Log. ⢠Mess age val idity - If the re ci pi en t of a m es sa g e ca nn ot be r ea che d wi thi n the v a lid ity p eriod, t he mes sage i s rem oved from the text mess age servic e center . Note that the syste m must support this fe ature. Maximum t ime is the maximum amount of time allowed by the system. ⢠Mess age sent as - The options are T ext , Fax , P aging , and E-mail . For further information, contact your service provide r . Note: Change this option only if you are sure th at your service center is able to convert tex t messages into these other formats. ⢠Preferred connection - Y ou can send t ext mes sage s vi a the nor ma l GSM system or via GPRS, if supported by th e system. See âÂÂP acket data (General P a cket Radio Service, GPRS)â on page 34. ⢠Reply via same ctr . (system service) - By setting this option to Ye s , if th e recipient replies to your message, the return messa g e i s sen t u sing the same text message service center nu mber . Note that this may not work betw een all opera tors. ADD A NEW TEXT ME SSAGE CENTER 1 Open Message centers and select Opti ons â New msg. center . 2 Press , write a n ame for the service cen ter and press OK . 3 Press , press and write the number of the text message service center ( Must be d efined ). Pres s OK . Y ou nee d the messa ge cent er number to send text and picture messa ge s. Y ou can get th e number from your serv ice provider . T o use the n ew settings, go back to the settings view and scroll t o Msg. center in use . Press and select the new service cente r .
[ 96 ] 9 Settings for multi m edia messages Go to Messaging and select Opti ons â Setting s â Multim edia m essage to open the f ollowing list of settings: ⢠Preferred connection ( Must be defi n ed ) - Select which access poin t is used as the pr eferre d connection for the multim edia mes sage center . See âÂÂSettin gs for multimedia m essagesâ on page 9 6. Note: If you receive multimedia message settings i n a smart message and save them, the re ceived settings are automatically used for the Preferred connection. See âÂÂRece ive sm art messagesâ on pa ge 85. ⢠Secondar y conn. - Select w hich access point is used as th e secondary connection for the m ultimedia message cente r . Note: Both Preferred con nection and Seconda ry con n. must hav e th e sa m e Homep age setting pointing to the sa me multimedia service center . Only the data connection is different. Example: If your pr eferred connection uses a packet data connection, you may want to use high speed data or data call for the secondary connection. This way you are able to send and receive multimedia messages even wh en you a re n ot in a syste m that supports packet data. For availability of and subscription to data ser vices, pl ease co ntact your ser vice pr ovide r . Se e âÂÂGene ral informati on about data co nnectio ns and access poi ntsâ on page 33. ⢠Multim edia rece ption - Select: Only in ho me net. - if you want to r eceive multimedi a messa ge s only when you a re in your hom e system . When you are outside your home system, multimedia message r eception is turned of f. Always o n - if you want to receive multimedia messages always. Off - if you do not want to receive multimedia messages or advertisements at all. Impo rtant : When you a re outside your home sy stem, sendi ng and receiving multimedia message s may cost more. If the settings Onl y in hom e n e t . or Always o n have been selecte d, your phon e can make an active data cal l or GPRS connection without your knowledge.
[ 97 ] Messaging 9 ⢠On r e cei v in g m sg . - Se lect: Retr . imme diately - if you want the phone to retrieve multimedia messa ges in stantly . If th er e are m essag es w ith Defe rr ed sta tus, they will be retrieved as w ell. Defer r etr iev al - if you want the multimedia messa gi ng center to save the message to be retrieved later . To retrieve the message later , set On receiv ing msg. to Retr . immediately . Reject me ssage - if you want to r eject multimedia m essages. The multimedia messaging center will dele te the messages. ⢠Allo w anon. mess ages - Select No , if you w ant to re je ct m essages coming from an anonymous sender . ⢠Receive ad verts - Defi ne whethe r you w ant to recei ve multimedia message adve rtisements or not. ⢠Reports - Set to Ye s , if you want the sta tus of the se nt mes sage ( P ending , F ailed , Delivered ) to be shown in the Log. W hen set to No , only the s tatus Delivered is shown in the L og. ⢠Deny repo rt sending - Ch oose Ye s , if you do not wan t your phone to send delivery report s of received multimedia mess ages. ⢠Mess age val idity - If the re ci pi en t of a m es sa g e ca nn ot be r ea che d wi thi n the validity per iod, the message is removed from th e multimedia messaging center . Note that the system must support this feature. Maxim um ti me is t he maximum amount of time allowed b y the system. ⢠Image size - Define the size of the image in a m ultimedia message. The options are: Small (max. of 1 60 x 120 pix els) and La rge (max. 640 x 4 80 p ixe ls) . ⢠Speaker - Ch oose Loud speake r or N orma l , i f y ou want t he s oun ds i n a multimedia message to be played through the loudspeaker or th e earpiece. For m ore information, see âÂÂL oudspeakerâ on page 17. Settings for e-mail Go to Messag ing and select Opti on s â Settings â E-mail .
[ 98 ] 9 Optio ns wh en editi ng e-ma il settings are: Editing o ptions , New mailbo x , Dele te , Call , and Exit . Open Mailbox i n use to select which m ailbox you want to use. SETTI NGS FOR MAILBO XES Select Mailb oxes to open a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. The following list of settings is shown: ⢠Mailb ox name - Write a descriptive n ame for th e mailbox. ⢠A ccess poin t in use ( Mu st be def i ned ) - Th e Intern et Acces s P oint (IAP) used for the mail box. Choo se an IAP from the list . For more in formati on on how to create an IAP , see âÂÂConnection s e ttingsâ on pa ge 33. ⢠My mail address ( Must b e defined ) - Write the e-mail address given to you by your service provider . The addres s must contain t he @ character . Replies to your messages are sen t to this address. ⢠Out g oi ng ma il se r ver : ( Must be defi ned ) - Write the IP address or host name of the c om puter th at se nds you r e-mai l. ⢠Send mes sage - Define how e-mail is sent from your phone. Immediat ely - A connection to the mailbox is started im mediately after you have selected Send . During next conn. - e- mail is sent w hen you c on nect to your remote mailbox the next time. ⢠Send copy to self - Select Ye s to save a copy of th e e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address define d in My mail ad dress . ⢠In cl ud e s ign at ur e - Select Ye s if you wa nt to att ac h a sig na tur e to y our e-mail messages and to start to wr ite or edit a signature text. ⢠User na me: - Write your u ser name, given to you by y our service provider . ⢠Pa s s w o r d : - Write your password. If you leave this field bl ank, you will be prompted f or the password when you try to con nect to your remote mailbox. ⢠Incomi ng mai l server: ( Must b e defined ) - The IP address or host name of the com put er that r eceives your e-mail. ⢠Mailb ox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options ar e POP 3 and IMAP4 .
[ 99 ] Messaging 9 Note: This settin g can be selected on ly once and can not be changed if you have saved or e xited from th e mailbox settings. ⢠Security - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote m ailbox. ⢠APOP secure login - Used w ith th e POP3 proto col to e ncryp t the sen ding of passwords to the r emote e-mail server . Not shown if IMAP4 is se lec te d for Mailbo x type: . ⢠Ret rie v e atta chme nt (n ot shown if the e- mai l pr otoc ol is se t to POP 3) - T o retr ieve e-mail with or without attachments. ⢠Retrieve h eaders - T o lim i t th e number of e-mail headers you want to retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User de fined . Used with IMAP4 protocol only . Settings for service messages When yo u g o to Messaging and select Opt ions â Setting s â Service mes sage , the followin g list of settin gs opens: ⢠Servi ce messages - Choose whether or not you want to receive se rvi ce me ss a ges . ⢠Authentic. needed - Choose if you want to receive service messages only from a uthorized sources. Settings for Cell broadc ast Check with your ser vice provider to see if Cell broadcast is available and what topics a nd numbers are available. G o to Messag ing â Opti ons â Settings â Cell broadc ast to ch ange th e settings: Reception - On or Off . ⢠Langua ge - All allows you to receive ce ll broadca st m essages in every possible language. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast me ssages. If the language you want could not be f ound in the list, sele ct Other . ⢠T opic dete ction - If you receive a message that does not belong to any of the ex isti ng topic s, T opi c detecti on â On allows you to save th e topic number automatically . The topic n umber is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. C hoose Off if you d o not want to save ne w topic numbers automatically .
[ 1 00 ] 9 Settings for the S ent folder Go to Messaging and select Opti ons â Setting s â Sent f older to open the following list of settings: ⢠Sav e sen t m e ssag es - Choose if you want to save a copy of eve ry text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder . ⢠No. of sa ve d m sg s. - Define how m any sent messa ge s will be saved to the Sent items f olde r at a time. The default limit is 20 messa g es. When the limit is r eached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memor y in u se - Define mem ory store. Choices are: phoneâÂÂs m emory or memory card, if one is use d. ⢠WIRELESS VILLAGE Y o u can send and receive messages with Wireless Village. Check with your service provider for availability . Wireless Village i s different from SMS or e-mai l beca use yo u ca n have a t rue, two-way conver sat ion with ot her u sers . For more in formation on Wireless Village, see www .nokia.ca.
[ 101 ] Profiles 10 1 0 Profiles Go to Menu â Prof iles . In Profile s, you can adjust and customize the phone tones for diffe rent events, environm ents, or caller groups. There are f ive preset profiles: Normal , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and P ager , which you can customize to meet your needs. Y ou can see the curr ently selected prof ile at the top of th e display in standby m ode. If the Normal profile is in use, only the current date is shown. The tones can be default ringing tones, tones created in Composer , ton es receive d in a m essage, or tr ansferred to your p hone v ia infrar ed, Blu etooth, or a PC connection and then saved to your phone. ⢠CHANGE THE PROFILE 1 Go to Menu â Prof iles . A list of profiles opens. 2 In the Pr ofiles list, scroll to a pr ofile and select Optio ns â A ctiv ate . Shortcut: T o change the profile, press in standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate and press OK . ⢠CUSTOMIZE PROFILES 1 T o modify a profile, scroll to the profile in the Profiles lis t and select Opti on s â Customize . A l ist of profile s ettings open s. 2 Scroll to the setting you want t o change and press to open the ch oices:
[ 1 0 2 ] 10 ⢠Ri ng in g t o ne - T o set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a r inging tone from the list. When you scroll through the list, you can stop on a tone to listen to it before you m ake your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. If a memory card is used, tones stored on it have the icon next to the ton e name. Ringing tones use shared memory . See âÂÂShared mem oryâ on page 1 8. Note: Y ou can ch ange ringing tones in two places: Profiles or Contacts. See â Add a r inging tone for a contact card or grou pâ on page 52. ⢠Ringing options - Wh en A scending is selected, th e ringing volu me starts from level o ne and in creases le vel by le vel to t he set volume l evel. ⢠Ri ng in g v ol um e - T o set the volume level for the ringing and message alert tones. ⢠Mess age alert ton e - T o set the ton e for m essages. ⢠Vibr ating alert - To set the phone to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messa ges. ⢠K eypad t ones - To set the volume le vel for keypad tone s. ⢠W a rn in g t o ne s - Th e phone soun ds a war ning ton e, for exam ple, wh en the bat te ry is running out of power . ⢠Alert for - To set the p hone to ri ng only upon calls from phone n umbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming fr om people outside the s elected grou p will have a silent alert. The choices are All c alls / (list of contact groups, if you have created th em). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâ on page 54. ⢠Profile n ame - Y ou ca n rena me a pr ofile with any na me you w ant . Th e Normal profile cann ot be renamed.
[ 1 03 ] Fa v o r i t e s 11 11 F a v o r i t e s Go to Menu â Fa v o r i t e s . Note: Y our pho ne mu st be switched on to us e this function. Do not switch th e phone on when w ir e l es s p ho ne us e is prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Y ou can u se Fa vorites to store shortcu ts, links to your favorite photos, video clips, notes, Recorder sound files, br owser bookmarks, and saved browser pa ge s. The default s hor tcuts ar e: - ope ns the Note s editor - opens the Calendar w ith the current date selected - opens the Messaging Inbox Optio ns in the Favorit es mai n vie w are: Open , Edit s hortcut name , Del et e shor tcut , Mo ve , List view / Grid view , Help , an d Exit . ⢠ADD SHORTC UTS Shortcuts can be added on ly from the individua l applications. Not all applications have this f unctionality . 1 Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to add as a short cut to F avorites. 2 Select Opti on s â A dd to F avorites and press OK . Note: A shortcut in Fa vorites is automatically updated if you move th e item it is pointing to, for example, from one f older to another .
[ 1 04 ] 11 ⢠SHORTCUT OPTIO NS ⢠To open a s hor tc u t , scroll to the icon and press . T he file is opened in the cor responding application. ⢠T o delet e a shortcut , scroll to the shortcut you want to remove and se lec t Opti ons â Delete shortcut . Removing a shortcut does not affect the fil e it is re ferr ing to. ⢠T o change the shortcut h eading , sel ect Opt i on s â Edi t sh ortc ut name . Write the new name . T his c hange affects only the s hortcut , not the file or item the shortcut refers to.
[ 1 05 ] Calendar and T o-do 12 1 2 C a l e n d a r a n d T o - d o Go to Menu â Cal end a r Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . Optio ns in the d iffere nt calendar v iews ar e: Open , New entry , W eek view / Month view , Delete , Go to d ate , Send , Settings , Help , and Exi t . In C alendar , you can keep t rack of you r appo intmen ts, me eting s, bi rthdays, anniversaries, and other events. Y ou can also set a c alendar alarm to remind you o f upcomi ng event s. Calendar use s shared memory . Se e âÂÂShare d memoryâ on page 18. ⢠CREATE C ALENDAR ENTRIES 1 Select Opti on s â New entry and select: ⢠Me eti ng t o remi nd y ou of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to write a gener al entry for a day . ⢠Anni vers ary to r emin d yo u of birthdays or specia l dates. Anniversar y entries are re peated every ye ar . 2 Fill in the fields, see the âÂÂCalen dar entry fieldsâ on page 1 0 6. Use the scroll key to move between fields. Pre ss to change between upper and lower case . 3 T o save the entry , press Done . Edit calendar entries Optio ns when ed itin g a calend ar en try are: Delete , Send , He lp , and Exit . 1 In the Day view , scroll to the entry and press to open it. 2 Edit the en try fields and press Don e .
[ 1 06 ] 12 ⢠If you are editin g a repeated entry , ch oose how you wan t the changes to take effect: All o ccurrences - all repe ated en tries are changed / This e nt ry only - only the current entry wil l be changed. Delete c alendar entries ⢠In the Day view , scr oll to the entry you want to delete and select Opti on s â Delete or press . Press OK to confirm . ⢠If you are deleting a repeated entry , choose how you want the change to take effect: All o ccurrences - all repe ated en tries are deleted / This en tr y on ly - on ly the curren t entry will be dele ted. Example: Y our week ly c lass has been ca ncell ed . Y ou hav e set the calend ar to remind you every week. Ch oose This entry only and the calendar will r emind you again next week. Calendar entry fields ⢠Subj ect / Oc casion - Write a description of the event. ⢠Locati on - the place of a meeting, optional. ⢠Star t time , End tim e , Start d ate , and End d ate . ⢠Alarm - Press to activa te the fields for Alarm t ime and Alarm date . ⢠Repeat - Press to change the e ntry to be repeating. Shown w ith in the Da y view . Example: The re peat function is ha ndy if you h ave a recurring event, a weekly class, a biweekly me eting, or a daily routin e you need to reme mbe r . ⢠Repeat un til - Y ou can set an en ding d ate for th e repe ated en try , for exampl e, the ending da te of a weekly course you are taking. T his option is sh own only if you have selected to r e peat th e event. ⢠Synchronization - If you se lect Private , after sync hr onization the calendar entry can be see n only by you and it w ill not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar . This is usef ul when, for example , you synchron ize yo ur calendar on a compatibl e compu ter a t wo rk. I f yo u s el ect Pub lic , th e calendar entry is shown to o thers who ha ve access to view your calendar online. If you select None , the calendar entry will not be copi ed to your PC wh en you synchron ize your c alendar .
[ 1 0 7 ] Calendar and T o-do 12 Cale nda r vi ews MONTH VIEW In the M onth v ie w , on e row equal s one wee k. Th e cu rrent date is un derlin ed. Dates that have calendar entries are marked w ith a small triangle at the right bottom corn er . Th ere is a fra me around th e currently se lected date. ⢠To open the Day vie w , scr oll t o the date yo u want t o op en and p ress ⢠T o go to a certain date, select Opti ons â Go to dat e . Write the date and press OK . Tip: If you press in Mon th, Week, or Da y views, the curren t date is automatically highlighted. Cale ndar entry ico ns in Day an d Week views Synchronization icons in Mont h view Meeting Red Priva te Memo Blue Publi c Anni versary None Purple The day has mor e than one view
[ 1 08 ] 12 W EEK VIEW In the W e ek view , the calenda r entries fo r th e selected week are s hown in seven day boxes. T he curren t day of the week is underlined. Memos and Anniversaries a re placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Me e ting entries are marked with colored bars according to starting and e nding times. T o view or edit an entry , scroll to the cell that has an entry a nd press to open the Day vie w , then scroll to the e ntry and press to open it. Optio ns in the d ifferent cal endar v iews are: Open , New entry , W eek view / Month view , Delete , Go to d ate , Send , Settings , Help , and Exi t . DAY VI EW In the Day view , you can see th e calendar entries for the selected day . The entries are grouped according to their startin g time. Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. ⢠T o open an entry for editin g, scroll to it and press . ⢠Press to go to the next day or press to go to th e previous day. SETTI NGS FOR CALENDA R VIEWS Select Opti on s â Settin gs and select: ⢠Default view - To select the view that is shown firs t when you open Calendar . ⢠W eek starts on - T o change the starting day of the week. ⢠W eek view title - T o change the title of the W eek view to be the week number or the week dates. Shortcut: T o write a calen dar entry , press any key ( - ) in any calendar view . A Meeting entry is opened and the characters you keyed in are added to th e Su bject field. ⢠SET CALENDAR ALARMS 1 Create a new Meeting or Anniversary entry , or open a previousl y created entry .
[ 1 09 ] Calendar and T o-do 12 2 Scroll to Alarm and press to open, Sel ect On, press to open the Al arm ti me and Alarm date fields. 3 Set the alarm time and date. 4 Press Don e . An alarm indicator is shown next to the e ntry in the Day view . Stop a calendar alar m The a larm du ration is on e minu te. Whe n the ala rm tim e expir es, pres s Stop to end the calendar alar m. If you press an y other key , the alar m is set to snooze. ⢠SEND CALEN D AR ENTR IES In the Day view , scroll to the entry you want to send an d select Opti ons â Send . Then sele ct the me thod, the choice s are: Via text m essag e , Via e-m ail (av ailable only if t he correct e-mai l settings a re in place), Via B luetooth , or Via infra red . For further information, see âÂÂMessagingâ on page 69, âÂÂSe nd and receive data via inf rar edâ on page 140, and âÂÂSend data v ia Bluetoothâ on pa ge 13 6. â¢T O - D O Go to Menu â To - d o . In To- do you can keep a list of tasks that you need to do. The T o- do list uses shared memor y . See â Shared memoryâ on page 1 8. 1 T o start to write a to- do note, press any key ( - ) . The editor opens and the cursor blinks after the letter s you have ke yed in. 2 Write the task in th e Su bje c t field. Pr ess to add special characters. ⢠T o set the due date for the task , scroll to the Due da te field and key in a dat e. ⢠T o set a pr iority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field an d press . 3 T o save the to-do note, press Don e .
[ 1 1 0 ] 12 Note: If you remove all ch aracters and press Done , the previously saved note will be deleted. ⢠T o open a to-d o note , scroll to i t and press . ⢠T o dele te a to-do note , scroll to it and select Opti ons â Del et e or pr e ss . ⢠T o mark a to-do note as completed , scroll to it and select Opti on s â Ma rk as d one . ⢠T o resto re a to- do note , select Optio ns â Mark as not done . Prio ri ty icon s High Lo w no icon Normal Status icons task c ompleted not completed
[ 111 ] Ex tra s 13 13 Extra s ⢠CAL CULA TOR Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Cal cu lat or Optio ns in Ca lcu lato r are: Last r esult , Memory , Clear screen , Help , and Exit . 1 Enter the f irst number of your calculation. Pr ess to erase any mist ak es. 2 Scroll to a function and press to select it. Use to add, to subtract, to m ultiply , or to divide. 3 Enter the second number . 4 T o execute the ca lculati on, s croll to a nd press . Note: Th e Ca lcul ato r ha s lim ite d acc ura cy an d rou ndi ng er ror s ma y occ ur , especially in long divisions. ⢠T o add a decimal, press . ⢠Press and hold to clear the resul t of the previous calculation. ⢠Use a nd to v iew previous calculations and move in the sheet. ⢠Select to save a number to the memory , indicated by M . T o r etrieve th e number from th e memor y , se lect . ⢠T o retrieve th e result of the las t calculation, select Opt ions â Last res ult . Tip: Press repeatedly to scroll the functions. Y ou can see the selection change between th e functions.
[ 1 1 2 ] 13 ⢠COMPOSER Go to Menu â Extras â Compo ser . Optio ns in the C omposer mai n view a re: Open , New tone , Delete , Ma rk/ Unmark , Rename , Duplicate, Help , and Exi t . Composer allows you to c reate your own, customized ringing tones. Note that it is not pos sible to edit a default ringing tone. 1 Select Opti on s â New tone to open the editor an d to start composing. ⢠Use t he keys to add notes and r ests. See the table on page 1 13. Or , se l ec t Options â Insert symbol to op en a li st of not es and re sts. The defau lt durat ion for a not e is 1/4. ⢠T o listen to th e tone, press or select Opti on s â Play . The playback is always started from the beginning of the tone. To stop playing, press Stop . ⢠T o adjust the volume while a tone is playing, press to increase or press to decrease it. Or , select Opti on s â V olume before you start to play the tone. ⢠T o adjust the te mpo, select Opti ons â Te m p o . To increase or decrease the tem po gradually , press and hold or , re spe cti ve ly . T empo is measur ed in beats per min ute. The maxi mum is 250 beats, the default tempo for a new tone is 160 beats, and the min imu m is 50 beats . ⢠To apply d ifferen t playing style s, select Options â Style â Legato - played in a smooth and even manner or Staccat o - note s are played separately to produce s hort sharp so unds. ⢠T o select many notes or r e sts at the same time, press and hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠T o move note(s) u p or dow n on t he staff by a half step, scroll to the note an d press or . ⢠For example, press and hold togeth er wit h to produce C#. 2 Select Bac k to save.
[ 1 1 3 ] Ex tra s 13 Op tion s when co mposin g ar e: Play , Insert sym bol , Style , Te m p o , V olume , Hel p and Exit . â¢C O N V E R T E R In Co nver ter , you c an c onve rt me as ures such a s Length from one uni t ( Ya r d s ) to a nother ( Met ers ). Go to Menu â Extr as â Co nver t er . Optio ns in Conv erter are: Select unit / Change curr ency , Convers ion type , Currency r ates , Hel p , an d Exit . Note: The Converter has limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur . Note: Before you can m ake currency conversion s, you need to choose a base currency (us ually your domestic cu rrency) and add exchange rates. See âÂÂSet a base currency and exch ange rates â on page 1 14. Convert u nits 1 Scroll to the Ty pe field and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use and press OK . Key No t e Key and function c Shor ten s t he durat ion of th e se lect ed not e(s)/r est(s) i n ste ps. d Len gthens the duration of the selected note(s)/rest(s) in steps. e Inser ts a res t. f Press to open a list of notes and rests. g Switche s octaves, all selected note(s) or rest(s) is/are moved to the ne xt octave. a Deletes selecte d note(s). b A long press of keys - produ ces a lengthen ed (dotted) note or rest or shortens a lengthe ned note.
[ 1 1 4 ] 13 2 Scroll to the f irst Unit field an d press to o pen a list of av ailable units. Select the unit from whi ch yo u want to conv ert an d pre ss OK . Scroll to the n ext Unit fie ld and select the u nit to whi ch you w ant to convert. 3 Scroll to the f irst Amount field and ke y in the value you want to convert. Th e other Amoun t field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal an d press for the , - (for tempe ratur e), an d E (exponent) sym bols. Note: The conversion order changes if you write a value in th e second Amou nt field. The result is shown in the first Amount field. Tip: T o renam e a currency , go to the Curren cy rates view , scroll to the currency , and select Opti on s â Rename currency . Set a base curr ency and exchange rate s Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base curr e ncy (u sually your domestic curr ency) and add exch ange rates. Note: The rate of the b ase currency is always 1. T he base curren cy determ ines the conversion rates of the othe r curren cies. Example: If you set the C anadian Dollar (CAD) as the base cu rre ncy , a US Do llar is .65. Thu s, you woul d wri te .65 as th e exch ange rate for the U S Dollar (USD). 1 Select Currency as the measure type and select Opti on s â Curr ency rate s . A list of cu rrencies opens and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 T o change the base cu rrency , scroll to th e currency (usually your domestic c ur rency), and select Opti ons â Set as base curr . Impo rtant : When you c hange the base cu rre ncy , all previously set exchange r ates are set to 0 and you need to key in new rates. 3 Add exchan ge rates (see exam ple), scrol l to the cur rency , and key in a new rate, th at is, h ow many u nits of the cu rrency equ al one un it of the bas e currency you have selected. 4 After you have inserted all the needed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions, see âÂÂConvert unitsâ on page 1 1 3.
[ 1 1 5 ] Ex tra s 13 â¢N O T E S Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Note s . Y ou can link notes to F avorites and send th em to other devices. Plain text files (T XT format) you receive can be saved to Notes. Press a ny key press ( - ) to s tart to write. Pres s to clear letters. Press Don e to save. â¢C L O C K Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Cloc k . Op tion s in Cl ock ar e: Set alar m , Reset alar m , Remo ve alarm , Settings , Help , and Exi t . Change clock settings T o change the time or date, select Opti ons â Settings in Clock. T o change the clock shown in stan dby mode, scroll down in the Da te an d tim e setting s and select Clock t y pe â Anal og or Digital . Set an alarm 1 T o set a new alarm , select Opti on s â Set alar m . 2 Enter the ala rm time and press OK . When the alarm is a ctive, the indicator is shown. The alarm clock works even if the phon e is switched off. T o cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Optio ns â Remo ve alarm . T URN OFF TH E ALARM â¢P r e s s Stop to turn off the alarm. ⢠When th e alarm ton e sounds, pr ess any key or Snooze to s top the alarm for f ive minutes, after wh ich it will resume. Y ou can do this a max imum o f five time s. If the alarm tim e is reached wh ile the phone is switched of f, the ph one switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you pr ess Stop , the phone asks wheth er you want to activa te the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phon e or Ye s to make and receive calls.
[ 1 1 6 ] 13 Note: Do not press Ye s when wir eless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . ⢠RECORD ER Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Reco rde r . Optio ns in Record er are: Open , Record so und clip , Del et e , Mo v e to phone me m , Mo ve t o mem. ca rd , Ma rk/Unm ark, Rename sound clip, S e n d, Settings , A d d t o F a v o r i t e s , Help, an d Exi t . The voice recorder allows you to record telephone conversations an d voice memos. I f you are recording a telephone con versation, both parties will hear a tone every five seconds during recording. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. Do n ot use this feature illegally . Select Optio ns â Record so und cl ip and scroll to a function and press to select it. U se: - to recor d , - to pa us e, - to stop, - to fast forward, - to fast rewind, or - to play an open ed sound file . Note: Recorder cannot be used when a data call or a G PRS connection is active. ⢠MEMO RY CARD Go to Menu â Extras â Mem ory card . Options in the memory card are: Bac k up ph on e mem . , Restore from ca rd , For ma t me m. ca rd , Mem ory ca rd name , Set pas sword , Change pas sword , Remov e password , Unloc k memory card , Mem. in use , Hel p an d Exi t . If you have a memor y card you can use it to store you r multimedia files like video clips and sound files, photos, messaging information, and to backup information from your phone âÂÂs memory . Impo rtant : K eep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Note: De tails of how you can use the me mor y card w ith othe r fea tur es and appli cations of you r Nokia 3600 se ries phon e are given in the se ctio ns describing these features and applications.
[ 1 1 7 ] Ex tra s 13 Insert the memory card 1 Make sure th e phone is switched off. 2 With th e b ack of t he p hone facing y ou, slid e ope n th e c over and remove the battery , see Quick start âÂÂInsert the SI M cardâ for in structions on removing the cover . 3 P osition the mem ory card in its slot. Make sure that the g old contacts of the card are facing down. 4 Slide the silver c atch over the mem ory card to secure it. 5 When you ha ve secured the card in place, replace the battery , th en replace the cover by slidin g it back i nto place. Impo rtant : Do not r emove the memory card in the m iddle of an operation. Be sure to close all mem ory card applications before removing the card. AB
[ 1 1 8 ] 13 Impo rtant : If you are installing an application to the memory card and need to reboot the phone, do not r emove the card until the reboot is co mplet e. Othe rwise the appl ication fil es may be l ost. Format the memory card Y ou must fo rmat the m e mory ca rd before yo u can u se it for th e first ti me. Select O p t io n s â Format mem. c ard . Y ou will be asked to con firm your request and once you con firm, form atting starts. Back up and r estore information Y ou can backup informa tion from your phoneâÂÂs memo ry to the memory card. Select O p t io n s â Back up phone me m. Y o u can r estore in fo r mati on from the me mory card to the phoneâ s memory . Select O p t io n s â Rest ore from car d . Memory c ard password Y ou can set a password to protec t your memory card against unauthor ized use. Note: The password is stored in your phone and you do n ot have to enter it again while you are using the memory card on the same phone. If you want to use the memory card on another phone, you will be asked for the password. SET UP, C HANGE, OR REMO VE Y OUR P ASSWORD Select O p t io n s â Set pass word , Change pas sword , or Remo ve password . The password can be up to eight ch aract e rs long. Impo rtant : Once the password is removed, th e memory card can be used on any phone without a password. Check m e mory consumption Using the Mem. in use option, you ca n check the memory consumption of different data groups and the available memory for installing new applications or s o ftware on your memory card. Select O p t io n s â M emory detail s .
[ 1 1 9 ] Services (XHTML) 14 14 Services (XHTML) Go to Menu â Servi ces or press a nd hold in sta ndby mode. Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . Glossary: XH TML browser suppo rts pages writt en in the Hyp ertext Marku p Langua ge (XHTML) an d the Wireless Mar kup Langu age (WML ). V arious service providers on the I nternet mainta in pages s pecifically design ed for m obile phones , offerin g ser vices s uch as news , weather reports, banking, tr avel information, entertainment, and ga mes. With the XHT ML browse r you can view these services as W AP pages written i n WML, XHTML pages written in XHTM L , or a mixture of both. Note: Check the avail ability of services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/or service provider . Service prov iders w ill also giv e you instru ctions on ho w to use their ser vices. ⢠BASIC STEPS FOR ACCESSIN G THE WEB ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the web service that you want to u se. See âÂÂPhone browser service settin gsâ on page 120. ⢠Make a c onnec tion to the s ervic e. See â Ma ke a co nnecti onâ o n page 120. ⢠Start browsing the web pages. ⢠End the con nection to the se rvice.
[ 120 ] 14 ⢠PH ONE BROW SER SERVIC E SETTINGS Receiving settings in a smart message Tip: Settings may be available, for example, on the site of a networ k operator or ser vice provider . Y ou may recei ve servi ce settin gs in a special text m essage, a so-calle d smart message, from the n etwork operator or service provider that of fers the se rvic e. Se e âÂÂRecei ve sma rt mes sag esâ on page 85. Fo r more in form atio n, contact your network ope rator o r service provider . K ey in the settings m anually Follow the instructions given to you b y your service pr ovider . 1 Go to Menu â Tools â Settin gs â Connection â A ccess poin ts an d define the settings for an access point. See â Connection settingsâ on page 33. 2 Go to Service s â Opti ons â A dd book mark . Write a na me fo r th e bookmark and the a dd ress of th e browser page defined for the current access point. Make a connection Tip: T o access the Bo okmark s view wh ile browsi ng, press an d hold down . T o return to the browser vi ew again, select Options â Bac k to page . Once you have stored all the re quired connection settings, you can access browser pages. There are three dif ferent ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the homepage ( ) of your service pr ovider , ⢠Select a bookmark f rom the Bookmarks view , or ⢠Press the keys - to start to write the addr ess of a brow ser service. The Go to f ield at the bottom of the display is im mediately activated and you can con tinue writing the address there. After you have sel ected a page or written the address, pr ess to start to download the page. See also âÂÂData conn ection indi catorsâ on page 12.
[ 12 1 ] Services (XHTML) 14 Connection security If the secu rity indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the phon e and th e browser gateway or server is encrypted and secure. Note: The se curity icon does n ot indic ate that d ata tran smission b etween the ga teway and the conten t serv er ( place wher e the requ ested resource is stored ) is secur e. It is up to th e servi ce pro vider t o secure data tr ansmission between the gateway and th e content server . View bookmarks Options in the Bookmarks view (selection on a bookm ark or folder) are: Open , Do wnload , Back to pag e , Send , Go to URL addr ess / Find bookmark , Ad d bookm ark , Edit , Dele te , Read ser vice msgs. , Disco n nec t , Mo ve to folder , New fold er , Ma rk/Un mark , Rename , Clear ca che , De tails , Add to F a v or ite s , Settin gs , Hel p , and Exi t . Glossary: A bookma rk consi sts of an I nternet address (mandatory), bookmark title, W AP access poin t, and if the service r equires, a user name and password. Note: Y our phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia doe s not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to acce ss them, you should tak e the same precautions, for secu rity or content, as you would with any site. In the Bookmarks view , you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of web pages. Bookmarks are in dicated by the f ollowing icon s: - The starting page define d for the browser access point. If you use another web access point for browsing, the starting page is changed acc ordin gly . - The last visited page. W hen the p hone is disconnected from the service, the address of the last visited page i s kept in memory until a new page is visited during the ne x t con nection. - A bookm ark showing the title . When you scroll th rough bookmarks, you can see th e address of the highlighted bookmark in the Go to field at the bottom of th e display .
[ 122 ] 14 Op tion s when bro wsing are: Open , Service option s , Bookmarks , Hist ory , Go to URL addr ess , V iew i mage s , Re ad se rvic e m sgs. , Save as boo kmar k , Sen d bookm ark , Reload , Disc onnec t , Sho w im ages , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Sess ion , Security , Settings , Hel p , and Exi t . Add bookmarks manually 1 In the Bookm arks view , sele ct Opt ions â A dd bookm ark . 2 Start to fill in th e fields. Only the address must be def ined. The defau lt access point is assigned to the bookmark if no ot her one is sel ec t e d. Press to e nter special characters such as / , . , : , an d @ . Pre ss to clear ch aracters. 3 Select Opti on s â Save to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks T o send a bookma rk, scroll to it and select Opt i ons â Send â Via text message . ⢠BROWSING On a br owser page, new link s appear under lined in blue an d previou sly visited links in purple. Im ages that act as lin ks have a blue bor der around them. K eys and commands used in browsing ⢠T o open a lin k, press . ⢠T o scroll the view , use the scroll key . ⢠T o enter letters and numbers in a fi eld, pr ess th e key s - . Pr ess to enter s pecial char acters s uch as / , . , : , an d @ . Press to clea r cha racters. ⢠To go t o t he pre vious page whi le br owsin g, press Ba ck . If Bac k is n ot available, select Optio ns â Histor y t o view a chronologica l list of the pages you have visited during a browsing ses sion. The histor y list is clear ed each time a session is c losed.
[ 123 ] Services (XHTML) 14 ⢠T o check boxes a nd make selections, pr ess . ⢠To retrieve the latest co ntent from the server , select Options â Relo ad . ⢠T o open a su blist of commands or actions for the currently open web page, sele ct Opt io ns â Service o ptions . ⢠Press to disconnect from a w eb service and to qu it browsing. VIEWING NEW SERVI CE MESSAGE S WHILE BROWSING T o download and view new service messages w hile browsing: 1 Select Opti on s â Read ser vice msgs. (shown only if there are new mes sages) . 2 Scroll to the m essage and press to download and ope n it. For more i nformation about service messa ges, see â Service m ess agesâ on page 87. SAVING BOO KMARKS ⢠T o save a bo okmark while browsing, select Optio ns â Save as bookmark . ⢠T o sa ve a bookmark received in a s mart messa ge, open the messa ge in the In box in Messaging and select Opti ons â Save to bookma rks . See also âÂÂRece ive smart messages â on page 85. ⢠VIEWING SAVED PAGES Optio ns in the Save d page s vi ew are: Open , Back to p age , Reload , Remov e , Read ser vice msgs. , Disco n nec t , Mo ve to folder , New folder , Ma rk/U nmark , Rename , Clear cache , De tails , A dd to F avourites , Se ttings , Hel p , and Exit .
[ 124 ] 14 If you r egularly browse pages containing information which does not ch ange very often, for example a train timetable, you c an save and th en brow se them when offline. If you have a memory card, you can save web pages on it instead of the phoneâÂÂs mem ory . ⢠T o save a page, while browsing select Opti on s â Save pa ge . Saved pages are indicated by th e following icon: - The saved web page. In the saved pages view y ou can a lso create folders to s tore your saved web pages. Folders are indicated by the following icon: - Folder con taining saved web pages. ⢠T o open the Saved pages view , press in the Bookmarks view . In the Saved pages view , p ress to open a saved page. If you want to start a conn ection to th e web service an d to retrieve the page again, select Options â R elo ad . Y ou can al so arrange th e pages into f older s. Note: The phon e stays online after you reload th e page. ⢠DOWNLOAD THROUGH THE BROWSE R Y ou can download items such as ringing tones, images, oper ator lo gos and video clips through the mobile browser . T hese items can be provided free or for a price. Once downloaded, items a re handled by the respective applications on your phone, for example a downloaded photo will be saved in th e Imag es . Download directly from the web page T o download the item directly f rom a web page: ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti ons â Open .
[ 125 ] Services (XHTML) 14 Purchase an item Glos sary: Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a system for protecting th e copyrig ht of digital content that is distributed onl ine. Note: Copyright prot ections may prevent som e images, ringtones a nd other content from being copied, modified, transferred or f orwarded. T o download the item: ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti ons â Open . ⢠Select Buy if you wan t to buy the item. Check an item before downloading Y ou can see details about an item before you download it. Details about an item may inclu de the price, brief description and size. Note: Check with your service provide to see if they of fer this service. ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti on s â Ope n . Details about the item are displayed on your phone. ⢠If y ou want to cont inue wit h t he downloading, press A ccept or if you want to can cel the download, press Cancel . ⢠END A CO NNE CTI ON ⢠Select Opti on s â Disco nnect , or ⢠Press and hold to quit browsing and to return to standby mode. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memo ry of the pho ne. If you h ave tried to access or have accessed con fidential information requiring passwords ( for example, your bank account), empty the c a che of your phone afte r each use. To empty the cache, sele ct Opti ons â Clear cac he .
[ 126 ] 14 Glos sary: A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data tem porarily . ⢠BROWSER SETTINGS ⢠Default access poi nt - If you w ant to change the default access point, press to open a list of available access po ints. The curren t defau lt access point is highlighted. For more informa tion , see âÂÂConnection settingsâ on p age 33. ⢠Sh o w im age s - Choose if you want to view pictures whe n you are browsin g. If you choose No , you can late r load image s du rin g bro wsin g by se lec tin g Options â Show images . ⢠T ext wrapping - Ch oose Off if you do not want the te xt in a par agr aph to automatically wrap, or On if you do. ⢠Fon t s iz e - Y ou can choose f ive text size s in the browser: Smallest, Small, Normal, Large and Largest. ⢠Cookies - A llow / Reject . Y ou can enable or disable th e receiving and sending of cookies. ⢠Confirm to uch to nes - Alwa ys / Fir st sending on ly . The browser supports functions you can access w hile browsing. Y ou can : make a voice call while you are on a browser page, send touch tones while a voice call is in progress, save in C ontact s a name and p hone number from a browser page. Ch oose wheth er you want to confirm before th e phone sen ds touc h to nes dur ing a vo ice ca ll.
[ 127 ] Applications (Javaâ¢) 15 15 Applica tions (Jav aâ¢) Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wire less phone use is prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Go to Menu â Appl icatio ns Optio ns i n the A ppl icatio ns ma in v iew a re: Open , View detai ls , Setting s , Remo ve , Go to URL addr ess , Up date , Help , an d Exit . In the Applications main view you can open installed Java applications or remove them. In the Install view you can install new J ava applications (file extensions .JAD or .J AR). Note: Y our phone supports J2MEâ¢Java applications. Do not download P e rsonal Java⢠ap plication s to y our ph one as t hey can not be install ed. When you open Applications, you ca n see a list of Java a pplications that have been installed to your phone. ⢠Scroll to an application and select Opti ons â View detai ls to view: ⢠Statu s - Installed , Runnin g , or Do wnloaded (shown only in Install view) ⢠Ve r s i o n - the application ver sion nu mber ⢠Supp lier - t h e supplier or ma n ufacturer of the a ppli cation ⢠Size - the size of the application file in kilobyte s ⢠Ty p e - a brief description of the application ⢠URL - an addre ss of an information page on the Internet ⢠Data - the size of application data such as high scores, in kilobytes T o start a data connection and to view extr a information about the application, scroll to it and select Opt ions â Go to URL addr ess .
[ 128 ] 15 ⢠T o start a data con nection and to check if there is an update available for the application, scroll to it an d select Opti on s â Upda te . Applications uses shared mem ory . See âÂÂSh ared memoryâ on page 1 8. ⢠INSTALL A JAV A APPLICATION Optio ns in th e Install view a re: Inst all , View det ails , Dele te , Hel p , and Exit . Installation files may be transferred to your phone from a computer , downloaded during br owsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, via Bluetooth, or via in frared. If you are u sing P C Sui te for Nokia 3650 or PC Sui te for Nokia 3600 to transfer the file, place it in th e c:\nokia\installs folder in y ou r phone. Impo rtant : Only install software from sources that off er adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. 1 In the Applications main view , to view the installation packages, press to open the Do wnloaded view . Note: In the In stall view , you can only insta ll Java software installation files with th e extens ion .JAD or .JAR. 2 T o install an application, scroll to an installation file and sele ct Opti on s â Inst all . Alternatively , search the phone memory for the installation file, select the file, and press to start the installation. Example: If you have received the in stallation file as an e-m ail attachment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the in stallation file, and press to start the installation. 1 Press Ye s to confirm the installation. The .JAR file is required for installation. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to downlo ad it. If ther e is no acce ss poin t defi ned for Appli catio ns, you w ill be asked to select on e. Wh en yo u are d ownlo ading t he J AR fi le, you may need to enter a user name and pa ssword to access the server . Y ou obt ain these from the suppli er or manufactu rer of the appli cation.
[ 129 ] Applications (Javaâ¢) 15 During installation, the ph one checks the integrity of the package to be installed. T he phone shows information about the checks bein g carried out, and you are given options whether to continue w ith or cancel the i nstallation. Once the phone has c hecked the integrity of the software package, the application is installed on your phone. 2 The phone infor ms you when installat i on is complete. T o open th e Java application after installation, you must go to the Applications main view . Tip: When you are br owsing WA P or browser pages, you can download an inst allation file an d install it im mediately . Note, however , that th e connection is left running in the bac kground during installation . Open ing a Ja va ap plic atio n ⢠Scroll to an application in the Applications main view an d press to open it. Un install ing a Ja va appl ication ⢠Select the application in the Applica tion s m ain view an d select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠JAVA APPLICATION SE TTINGS T o define a def ault access point for downloading missing application components, select Settin gs â Default a ccess p oint . Fo r more inf ormati on on creating access points, see the â Access pointsâ on page 36. Select an application and select Setting s , and th en se lect one of: ⢠A ccess point - Sele ct an a ccess point to be used by the application for downloading extra data. ⢠Network connect ion - Some Java applications may require a data connection to be made to a defined access point. If n o access point has been selected, you will be asked to select one. T he options are: Allo wed - The connection is created immediately wi thout a notification. A s k fi rst - Y ou will be asked before th e application makes the connection . Not allo wed - Connections are not allowed.
[ 130 ] 16 16 Manager ⢠INSTALL APPLICAT IONS AND SOFTWARE Note: Y our phone must be switch e d on t o use the functions in the To o l s folder . Do not switch th e phone on when wireless ph one use i s prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Go to Menu â To o l s â Manager In Manager you can install new applications an d software packages, and remove application s from your ph one. Y ou can also check th e memory consumption. Options in the Manager main view are: View deta ils , View certif icate , Inst all , Remo ve , View log , Send log , Mem ory details , Hel p , an d Exit . When you open Ma nager , you can see a lis t of: ⢠installation packages that have been saved to Manager ⢠partially installed applications (indicated by ), and ⢠fully installed applications that you can remove (indicated by ) Note: In Manager , you can only use device software installation files with a n exten sion .S IS. Tip: T o install Java⢠applications (file extension .J AD or .JAR), go to Appli cations . For further i nformati on, see â Applica tions (Ja vaâ¢)â on page 12 7. ⢠Scroll to an inst allatio n file and s elect Opt ions â View det ails to view the Name , Ve r s i o n , Ty p e , Size , Suppl ier , and Statu s of the s oftware pa ckage . ⢠Scroll to a software package and s e lect Opti on s â View cert ificate to display the s ecurity certificate details of a software package. See âÂÂCertif. m anagementâ on page 4 3. Impo rtant : Only install software from sources that off er adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software.
[ 13 1 ] Manager 16 T o help you , the software installation system uses digital sign atures and certi ficates on software packages. Do not install t he appli cation i f Manager gives a security warning during in stallation . Tip: Select Opt ions â Vie w l og to see what software packages h ave been installed or removed and when. ⢠INSTA LL SOFT WARE Y ou ca n install applications that ar e specifically intended for Nokia 3600 series phones or suitable for the Symbian ope rating system. A software pa ck age is u sual ly on e larg e co mpr ess ed fi le con tain ing ma ny co mpon ent file s. Note: If you in stall a program that is not intended specifically f or Nokia 3600 series ph ones, it may function and look very different f rom the usual Nokia 36 00 series phone applications. Impo rtant : If you in stall a file that co ntain s an update or r epair to an exis tin g applicatio n, y ou can only restor e th e or iginal applicati on if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed sof tware package . T o restore the or iginal app lic ation, first remove the application and the n install the application again from the or iginal installation file or th e back-up copy . 1 Inst allat ion pack ages may be tr ansferr ed to your phone from a comput er , downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, via Bluetooth, or via in frared. If you are using PC Suite f or Nokia 3650 or PC Su ite for 3600 to transfer the file, place it in th e c: \no kia\in st alls folder on your phone. Example: If you have received the in stallation file as an e-m ail attachment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the in stallation file, and press to start the installation. 2 Open Manag er , sc roll to th e install ation pack age, and select Options â Inst all to start the installation. Alternatively , search th e phone me mory or th e memory card f or the installation file, select th e file, and press to start th e installation.
[ 132 ] 16 If you are install ing sof tware w ithou t a dig ital signature or a certi ficate, the pho ne warns you of the risks of insta lling softwa re. Continue inst allati on only if you are absolutely sure of th e origin and contents of th e software package. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the package to be installe d. The ph one sh ows infor mation abou t the c hecks bein g carrie d out and you are given option s whether to continue or cancel the installation. Once the ph one has checked th e integrity of the software package, the application is installed on your ph one. Tip: T o send your installation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, sele ct Opti on s â Send log â Via text mes sage or Via e-mail (ava ilable only if the c orr ect e -mail settin gs are in place) . ⢠REMOVE SOFTWARE 1 T o remove a sof tware package, scr oll to it and s elect Opt i on s â Remo ve . 2 Press Ye s to confirm the removal. Impo rtant : If you remove software, you can only re- install it if you have the orig inal sof tware package or a full back -up of the r emo ved software package . If you remove a so ftware package, you may no lo nger be able to ope n doc uments creat ed with th at software. If anoth er software package dep ends on the software package that y ou remo ved, the othe r softw are package may st op wo rkin g. Refer to the documen tation of the installed software package for details. ⢠VIEW MEMORY CONSUMPTION ⢠T o open th e memory vie w select Opt ions â Memor y details. Note: If you have a m emory card installed on your phone, you will ha ve a choice of tw o memory view s, one for the phone or Phone me mory and one f or the Mem ory card . If not, you will on ly have the Ph on e memor y view .
[ 133 ] Manager 16 When you open either of the memory views, the phone calcul ates the amount of free memor y for storin g data and install ing new softw are. In the me mory views, you can view the memor y consu mptio n of the diffe rent data gr oups: Calend ar , Contacts , Docu ments , Mess ages , Images , Sound f iles , Video c lips , Appli cations , Mem. in use , and Free memory . Tip: If the ph one me mory is getting low , remove som e documents, or move them to the memory card. Se e also the â T e chnical informationâ on page 1 68.
[ 134 ] 17 17 Connectivity Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use the f unctions in the Con ne ctiv ity fold er . Do not swi tch the ph one on when wireles s phon e u se i s pro hibite d or whe n it may cau se inte rfer ence or d ang er . Y ou can transfer data from your phone to another compatible device, for example, a phon e or a computer , via Bluetooth or infrared. ⢠BLUE TOO TH CONN ECTI ON Go to Menu â Connecti vity â Bluet ooth Bluetooth enables cost-free wireless co nnec tio ns b etw een ele ctr onic de vices w ith in a maximum range of 30 fe et. A Bluetooth connection can be used to send images, texts, bus ine ss car ds, c ale ndar n ot es, o r t o co nnec t wirelessly to Bluetooth en abled devices such as co m put e rs. Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your ph one and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be with in a maximum of 1 0 m eters of each other , although the connection can be subject to inte rference from obstruc tions such as walls or from other electronic devices. Using Bluetooth consumes the battery and th e phone's opera ting time will be reduced. Take this into accou nt when performi ng other operations with your ph one. There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth devices. C heck with your local au thorities.
[ 135 ] Connectivity 17 Activate the Bluetooth application for the first time When you activate the Bl uetooth application for the first time, you are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phone. Note: Aft er you ha ve set Bl ueto oth to be active and changed My phon e's visibility to All , your phon e and this name can be seen by oth er Bluetooth device user s. Write a name (ma x. 30 letters ) or us e the default n ame âÂÂNokia 3650â or âÂÂNokia 3600 â . If you se nd da ta vi a Blu et oot h b efo re y ou hav e given an individual Bluetooth name t o your phone, the default n ame will be used. Tip: T o send text via Bluetooth (instead of text messages), go to Notes, write the te xt, an d select Opti ons â Send â via Blu etooth . Bluetooth settings T o modify Bluetooth settings, scroll to th e setting you want to change and press . ⢠Blue tooth - Se lect On if y ou wa nt t o use Bl ue toot h. If yo u se t Bl uet oo th Off all active Bluetooth connections are ended and Bluetooth cannot be used f or sending or r eceiving data. ⢠My p hone's visib ility - If you sele ct Sho wn to all , your phone can be found by other Bluetooth devices during device search. If you select Hidden , your phone ca nnot be found by othe r devices during device se arch. ⢠My Bluetoo th name - Def ine a Blu e t ooth na me for yo ur pho ne. Aft er you have set Bluetooth to be active and chan ge d My phone's visibil ity to Al l , this name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Tip: When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Blue tooth addresses (device addresses). T o find out what the u nique Bl u etoot h a ddress o f your p hone is , enter the code *# 2820# in s tandby mode.
[ 136 ] 17 Send data via Bl ue tooth Note: There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a tim e. 1 Open an application wh ere th e item you wish to send is stor ed. For exa mple, to send a photo to an other device, open the Images application. 2 Scroll to the item you wan t to send, f or example, a photo and select Optio ns â Send â Via Blu etooth . 3 The phone starts to search for devices within range. Bluetooth en abled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. Y ou can see a device icon, the deviceâÂÂs Bluetooth name, the device type, or a short name. P a ired devices are shown with . Note: If you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier , a list o f the devices that were found previously is shown first. T o start a new sear ch, select More devices . If you switch off the ph one, the list of devices is cleared and the de vice search needs to be started again before sending data. ⢠To interru pt the search , press Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a co nnection to one of the devices already found. 4 Scroll to the device you w an t to con n ect with and pres s Select . The item you are send ing is copied to Outbox an d the note Connecting is shown. 5 P airing (if not re quired by the other d evice, see step 6). Glossary: P airing m eans authent ication. The users of th e Bluetoo th enabled devices should agree on the passcode and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices th at do not have a user interface ha ve a factory set passcode. ⢠If th e other devic e requir es pair ing before data can be transm itted, a tone sounds and you are asked to e nter a passcode.
[ 137 ] Connectivity 17 ⢠Create your own passc ode (1-16 c haract ers long , numeric) a nd ag ree with the owne r of the ot her Bluet ooth de vice to use the sam e code. This passcod e i s used only o nc e and you do n ot have to mem orize it. ⢠After pairing, the device is saved to th e P aire d devices vie w . 6 When the connection h as been successf u lly e stablishe d, the note Sendi ng data is sh own. Note: Data received via B luetooth can be found in the Inbox folder in Messagin g . See page 83 for further information. Note: If sending fails, the message or data will be deleted. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent via Blu etooth. Check the status of the Bl uetooth connection ⢠When is shown in standby mode, Bluetooth is active. ⢠When is bl inking, your phone is tr ying to connec t to the other d evice. ⢠When is shown con tinuously , the Bluetooth con nection is active. P aired dev ices view Optio ns in the paired de vices vi ew are: New paired d evice , Conne ct / D i s c o n n e c t , As sign shor t name, Delete, Delete al l, Set as authorized / Set as unautho rized, Help, and Exit . P a iring with a device m akes devi ce search es easier and quic ker . P aired dev ices are eas ier to rec ogn ize, the y are in dica te d by in th e sear ch res ult li st. In the Blu etooth main vie w , pre ss to ope n a list of pai red devic es ( ). Icon s for di fferen t Blueto oth de vices Com put e r Pho ne Other Unknown
[ 138 ] 17 PA I R W I T H A D E V I C E 1 Sel ec t Options â New paire d dev ice in the P aired devic es vie w . The p hone starts to search for devices w ithin range. Or , if you have searched for Bluetooth device s earlier , a list of the devices that were found previously is show n first. T o start a new sea rch, select More d evice s . 2 Scroll to the device you wan t to pair with and press Select . 3 Exchange passcodes, see step 5 (P airing) in the previous section. The device is added to the P a ired devices l ist. Tip: Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games via Bluetooth. CANC EL P AIR ING ⢠In the P aired devices view , scroll to the device w hose pairing you want to cancel and press or sele ct Opt io ns â Delete . The device is removed from the P aired devices list and the pairing is cancelled. ⢠If you want to cancel all pairings, select Opti on s â Delete all . Note: If you are currently connected to a device an d delete the pair ing with that de vice, pairin g is remove d immedi ately but the conn ection will remain active. ASSIG N SHORT NAMES FOR PAIRED DEVICES Y ou can define a short name (nickname, alias) , to help you recognize a certain device. T his name is stored in the phone memory and cannot be seen by oth er Bluetooth device users. Example: Give a short name to your friendâÂÂs Bluetooth e nabled device or to yo ur own c omputer t o be able to recog nize it more e a sily . T o assign a short name, scroll to the device and select Opt ions â Ass i gn shor t name . W rite the short name and pre ss OK . Note: Choose a name wh ich is easy to remember an d recognize. Later wh en you are searchin g for devices or a device i s requestin g a conn ection, the name you have chosen will be u sed to identify the de vice.
[ 139 ] Connectivity 17 SET A DEVICE TO BE AUTHOR IZED OR UNAUTHOR IZED After you have paired with a device, you can set it to be authorized or unauthorized: Unautho rized (default) - Connection requests from this de vice need to be accepted separatel y every time. Autho rized - Connections between your phone and this d evice can be made w ithout your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorization is needed. Use this status for your own de vices, for example, your PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. The icon i s added next to authorized devices in t he P aired devices view . In the P aired devices view , scroll to the device and select Opti ons â Set as autho rized / Set a s u nau th or iz e d . Receive data via Bluetooth When you re ceive data v ia Blue tooth, a tone sounds an d you are asked if you want t o accept th e Bl uetooth message. If y ou accept, is shown and the it em is placed in the I nbox fo lder in Messagin g. Bluet ooth message s are indic ated by . See page 83 for fur ther info rmati on. Disconnect Bluetooth A Bluetooth c onnection is dis connected automatically after sending or receiving data. ⢠INFRARE D CONNECTIO N T o start infrared, go to Menu â Conn ectivity â Inf rared . Via in frared, you can send or receive data such as busin ess cards and calendar n otes to an d from a com patible phone or data device. Do not point the I R (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. T his device is a Class 1 Laser product.
[ 140 ] 17 Send and receive data via infrared Note: All items which are recei ved via infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. New infrared messages are indicated by . Se e page 83 for fu rthe r infor mat ion. 1 Make sure that th e infrared ports of the sending an d receivin g devices are pointing at each other and that th ere are no obstruction s betwe en the devices. The pref erable distance be tween th e two devices is one meter at most. To f ind the i nfrare d port, see the pictur e of th e differen t keys in the Ge neral information section o f this guide. 2 The user of th e receiving device activates the infrared port. T o activate t he i nfrared port of you r phon e to receive d ata via infra red, go to Men u â Connecti vity â Infrar ed and press . 3 The user of th e sending device selects the desir ed infrared function to start data tran sfer . T o send data via infrared, s elect Opti ons â Sen d â via inf rared in an application. If data transfer is not started within two minutes after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be sta rted again. Tip: Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games via infrared. Example: T o send a contact card via infr ared: (1) Ask the receiver to activate the infrared port in his/her device. (2) Go to Contacts, scroll to a card and select Opti ons â Sen d â via inf rared . Note: Windows 2000: To be able to use infrared to transfer files between your Nokia 3600 series phone and a compatible computer , go to âÂÂC o n tr o l P anelâ and select âÂÂWireless Linkâ . In the âÂÂWireless Linkâ â File T ra ns f er â tab check the âÂÂAllow othersâ to send files to your computer u sing infrared. Check the status of th e infrared connect ion ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown cont inuously , the infrared connection is active and your phone i s ready to send and receive data via its infrared port.
[ 14 1 ] Connectivity 17 ⢠CONNECT YOUR PHONE T O A COMPUTER For further information on how to m ake a connection to a com patible computer via infrared or Bluetooth an d how to insta ll the PC Suite for Nokia 36 50 or PC Suit e f or 3600, see the Installation Guide for PC Suite on th e CD -ROM in th e âÂÂSoftware f or PCâ section. For further information on how to use the PC Su ite for Nokia 36 50 or PC Su ite for 3600, see the PC suite on line h elp . Use the CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch itself after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of your com patible PC. I f not, proceed as f ollows: 1 Clic k th e Wind ow Start but ton and se lect Programs â Windo ws Ex plor er . 2 On the CD-ROM dr ive, locate a f ile called Nokia3650 .exe or Nokia3600 .exe and double- click it. The CD- ROM i nterface opens. 3 Y ou can find PC Suite for Nokia 365 0 or PC Su ite for 3600 in th e âÂÂSoftware for P Câ section. Dou ble-click âÂÂPC Suite f or Nokia 3650 â or âÂÂPC Suite for 360 0â . The installation wizard will guide you through the installation process. ⢠USE YOUR PHON E AS A MODEM TO CONNECT TO THE INTERNET OR TO SEND OR R ECEIVE FAXES Detaile d in stallation inst ruction s can be fo und in Quic k guide fo r Modem Options fo r Nokia 3650 or Quick Gu ide for M odem Opti ons for Nokia 3600 on the CD- ROM sup plied w ith the phone.
[ 142 ] 18 18 PC Suite for Nokia 3600 series Ple ase refe r to other section s of this us er guide for i nstructi ons on operation, care, and maintenance, including important safety i nformation . This section explain s how to install PC Suite for N okia 360 0 series phones on a com patible PC, how to connect your phone to the PC, a n d h ow to sta r t u sing PC Suite . For mor e detai led in formati on on the use of PC Sui te, pl ease refer to th e online help of the PC Suite applications. With PC Suite f or Nokia 3650 or PC S uite for Nokia 3 600 you can: ⢠Share information betwe en your PC and phone. ⢠Make bac k-up copies of the phone files to protect data in case of loss or damage. ⢠Synchronize your calendar , contacts, an d tasks with Microsoft a nd Lotus a pp lications. ⢠Copy and move files betw een your PC and phone. ⢠Copy contacts and ca lendar information f rom another Nokia m obile phone, Nokia communicator , or P alm device to your Nokia 3600 series phone. ⢠Configure phone settings. ⢠Install software on your ph one. ⢠SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS T o install and r un PC Suite, you nee d: ⢠a compatible PC running Windows 9 8, Windows ME, Windows 2 000 with Serv ice P ack 2, or Windows XP . ⢠at least 1 1 0 MB of free disk space. To connec t you r Nokia 3600 s eries ph one to th e PC, yo u ne ed t o have: ⢠an infrared connection: an infrared port on th e computer , or ⢠a Bluetooth connect io n: a Bluetooth card an d the required software, or built-in support for Bluetooth on the PC. To be able to connect your Nokia 36 00 seri es phone to you r PC, the Bluet ooth sof tware ne eds to su ppor t the Serial P ort Profile (SPP).
[ 143 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 ⢠INSTA LL PC SUITE PC Suite for Nokia 3600 series is in the âÂÂInstallâ section of th e CD-ROM include d in th e PC Sui te for N okia 3600 series package. T he CD -ROM shou ld launch aut oma tically af ter you have inserted it into the CD-R OM drive of your PC. If not, proceed as foll ows: 1 Click the Window s Start button, poin t to Programs , and select Windo ws Explor er . 2 Go to the CD-R OM root di recto ry and do uble-cl ick the Nokia3 650.exe or N ok ia3600 .exe file . The CD-R OM us er in terfa ce o pens. When the CD-ROM interface is ope n, proceed as follows: 1 Click Inst all . 2 Select Install now and click PC Su ite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 . 3 Select the language f or the installation and click Next to start the installation wizard. This wiz ard will guide you through the installation process. Generally , it is r ecommended that you a ccept the suggested destination f olde r a nd program folder . Note: In t he Data Import dialog box, make su re that th e Insta ll the Nokia Connectivity SDK check box is selecte d if you want to transfer calendar and con tacts data fro m another Nokia mobile phone to your Nokia 3600 series phone. If you do not insta ll the Nokia Connectivity SDK component, y ou can tran sfer data only f rom the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municato r , a P alm device , a Noki a 7650 or anoth er Nokia 360 0 series phone to your Nokia 3600 series phone. Note: In t he File Trans fer Video and Audi o Converters dialog box it is re comm ende d t hat yo u le ave th e Insta ll Video an d Audio Conver ters check box se l ected. When t he co nverters are insta lle d, video and audio format files that you copy from the PC to you r Nokia 3600 series phone are automatically converted to the video and audio format used by the phone. If y ou do not ha ve the C D-R OM: 1 Download the installa tion file (setup.ex e).
[ 144 ] 18 2 Go to the dire ctory wher e you downloaded the file an d double-click it. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. ⢠CONNECT YOUR PHONE TO THE PC When you use PC Suit e for the first time , y ou mu st connect yo ur Nokia 3600 serie s phon e t o the PC. Th ereaf ter , you can u se P C S uite whet he r or not your ph one is connected to your PC. Y ou can conn ect your phone to the PC via an infrared or Bl uetoot h conne ction . See the Conn ecting y our No kia 365 0 t o a PC an d Disconnecting and r e c o n n e c t i n g your No kia 365 0 or Connect ing your Noki a 3600 to a PC and Diconnecting and r econnecting your Nokia 36 00 online help topics for details. Note: When you co nnec t your N oki a 3600 s erie s phon e to your PC, PC Suite automatically synchronizes the clock on the Nokia 3600 seri es phone with the PC. There fore, you nee d to ma ke sure that the clock on your PC is correct. Tip: Check the icons on the taskbar to see the connection status. T he connection icon changes to when your phone is connected to the PC. Use an infrare d connection 1 Check that an infrared driver is already installed on the PC. G o to the Windows Cont rol P anel . If th e Inf rared icon is visible, the driver has been in stalled. Also check that in frared is en abled on the PC. Note that in Windows 2000 the infrared con nection is called Wireless Link . Note: T o be able to use an in frared connection w ith Windows 200 0, you must first disable the Image Tran sfer application in the Wireles s Link software . 2 Double-click the PC Suite Connection icon on the taskbar to open the Conne ction Pro perties dialog box. Make sure that the correct COM port is selected for the infrare d connection. If no port is selected, select the COM port with infrar e d as the connection type. Note that you can select more than one C OM port.
[ 145 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 Note: If you cannot sele ct the port you w ant to use, another PC appli cation is using that port. T o use PC Suite with that port, you must either close the other application or disable it temporarily . 3 Make sure tha t the infrared port of th e phone faces the infra red port of the PC an d that they are w ithin range of each other . 4 Activate the infrared connection of your phone. Go to Menu, open the Connectivity folder , and select Infrared. Use a Bluetooth c onnection Note: Before you can co nnect yo ur Noki a 3600 seri es p hone to the PC via Bluetooth for the first time, you must have provided a nam e for your phone to be used in a Bluetooth connectio n. For instructions on giving a name to your phone, see âÂÂActiva te the Bluetooth a pplication for th e firs t timeâ on page 135. Make sure that Blu etooth is activ ated on the phone to make your Nokia 3600 series phone discoverable a nd connectabl e. Go to Connectiv ity and sel ect Bluetooth . Then sel ect Bl uetoot h On . T o make your phone discoverable, change My phon eâ s v i s i b i l i t y to Shown to all in the Bl uet oo th menu. T o establish a Bluetooth connection: 1 Make sure th at a Blue tooth card is inserted in the PC card or CompactFlash (CF ) slot and that the software provided w ith the Bluetooth card is installed on the PC, or che ck that your PC includes built-in support for Blu e tooth. A serial port profile must exist for the Bluetooth card on the PC. For fur ther information, see the user documentation provided wi th the B luetooth card or PC. 2 Establish a serial port connection betw een your N okia 3600 series phone and your PC . For in formation on how to do this, refer to the user documen tation of the B luetooth software. 3 Double-click the PC Suite Connection icon on the taskbar to open the Connect ion Properties dialog box. M ake sure that th e correc t port is selected for the Bluetooth connection. If no port is selected, select the COM port with B luetooth as the connection type. Note that you can select more than one COM port.
[ 146 ] 18 Note: If you cannot select the port you wan t to use, another PC application is using that port. T o use PC Suite with that port, you must either close the other application or disable it temporarily . 4 If y ou ar e conn ect ing yo ur N oki a 36 00 se ries phone to your PC us ing a Bluetooth con nection for the first time , you need to pair the devices. T o pair th e device s, you need to en ter a passcode in both devices. Create your o wn passcode (1-1 6 character s long, n umeric) and ent er the same passcode in both the phone and the PC when reque sted. This pas scode is used only once and you do not need to memorize it. For further information, refe r to âÂÂConne ctivityâ on page 134 . 5 Auth orize th e connec tion b etween your N okia 3600 series phone and yo ur P C. Sele ct Ye s when a connection request appears on the phoneâÂÂs display . Y ou can s e t you r PC as a uthorize d, w hich m eans that the c on n e ct i o n bet ween yo ur phone a nd yo ur PC i s made w ithout s epara te a u t ho r i z at io n. T o do this, go to the P aire d devi ces view on your phone, scroll to th e device, and s elect Opti ons . Select Set as autho rized . Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other Bluetooth devic e do not n eed to be in line of sight. The two devices only need to b e within a maximum of abo ut 30 feet (1 0 meters) of each ot her , although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from othe r electronic devices. There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth devices. C heck with your local au thorities. The Bluetooth connection does not close automa tically . Y ou must close it from the B luetooth software on your PC. C lose the Bluetooth connection when you stop us ing PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Su ite for Nokia 3600 in online mode. Tip: Y ou c an find the o nline help from the Windows Start button. P oint to Progr ams and select PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for 3600 an d PC Suite for 3650 Help or PC Suite for 3600 Help.
[ 147 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 Note: If you h ave prob lems connecting you r phone to the PC, check to see if both your Nokia 3600 ser ies phone and your PC are switched on and th at you h ave selected the corr ect communications port. Se e th e Connecting your Nokia 3650 to a PC and Disconnecting and reconnecting y our Nokia 3 650 or Conn ecting your Nokia 36 00 to a PC an d Disconnecting and reconnecting your Nokia 3600 onl ine help topics for details. ⢠START TO USE PC SUI TE Y ou can start PC Suite from the Start menu: click the Start button, select Prog rams and point to PC Suit e for Nok ia 365 0 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 , and then click PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 . If you are connecting your phone to the PC for th e first time, after starting PC Suite you are asked to do two things: ⢠Name your phone. Y o u can use more than one Nokia 3 600 series ph one with PC Suit e. T o be able t o identify in dividual p hones, you must give a name to you r phone. ⢠Select tasks to be created. T o be ab le to back up and syn chron ize inf ormat ion bet ween yo ur Noki a 3600 series phone and PC, you must have the appropriate tasks create d. During the f irst connection, PC Suite lists tasks that can be cr eated aut omati cally . Y ou do not h ave to c rea te the s e ta sks a t th is poi nt, if you do n ot wa nt to . How eve r , if you c rea te the tas ks, you can e dit t he m lat er . T o create these tasks, proceed as follows: 1 When the first connection is established, the W elcome to PC Suite f or Nokia 3650 or W elcome to PC Suite for Nokia 3600 dialog box appears. T ype a name for your phone in the box and click OK . 2 Next, you will be asked for tasks that you want to perform w ith PC Suite. In t he Create T asks dialog box, sele ct the tasks th at you want PC Suite to create and click OK . Y ou can edit these tasks later , if you want. Note: Making or answering ph one calls during a PC connection is not recommended. I t might disrupt operation. Tip: The folders o n your PC that con tain information about you r phone will also be nam ed accor ding to the name you give your phon e at this poin t.
[ 148 ] 18 ⢠O NLINE AND OFFLINE MODES Y ou ca n use PC Suite either in online mode or in offline mode. Y ou have the following options: ⢠W ork online - Connect your phone to th e PC and let PC Sui te identify it. In onl ine mode your phone i s connected to your compatible PC, and you can wor k with the in formation store d on the ph one. ⢠W ork offline - L eave your phone dis conne cted an d choose the na me of your phone from a list of n amed devices. The menus and other available option s in offline m ode differ from those of online m ode. ⢠CON NE CT IO N S TA T US The icon on the right-hand side of the status bar and on the Windows taskbar displays the connection status as foll ows: ⢠D i s c o n n e c t e d ⢠C o n n e c t e d ⢠T ransferring data (ani ma ted icon)
[ 149 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 ⢠MAIN WINDOW INFORMATION The m ain windo w of P C Su ite di spla ys t he fol lowing i nform atio n and contr ols : application bar toolbar shortcuts for menu commands menu commands the name of the application that is cur ren tly op en information about the selected command the na me of the connected phone connection sta tus
[ 150 ] 18 ⢠PC SUITE APPLICATIONS A number o f icons are displayed on the left-hand side of the PC Suite window - th is area is known as the application bar . T o use an application, click its icon . For informat i on on u sing an application , see the online h el p. Backup/Restore With Backup/Restore, you can b ack up information on your phon e. If you ever lose information from your Nokia 3600 series ph one (for example, through ac cidental deletion), or need to refer to an earlier , backed up version, you can r e store it to your phone. Backup/Restore supports Memory cards. Note: Operator logos, ringing tone s (polyphonic ringing tones (M IDI) and si ng le t on es) a n d Ja va -ap pli ca tio ns th at yo u ha ve i nsta lle d on you r Nokia 3600 series phone after you first star ted u sing it are n ot saved durin g ba ck up. T heref ore thes e it ems can not be rest ore d. Only the original No k ia 3 6 00 s er i es r i ng i n g t o n es a re sa ve d . Control P anel Y ou can use Con trol P anel to change some of the gener al settings of PC Suite. The following features are included in Control P anel: ⢠Connect ion enables y ou to specify the port that PC Suite uses when attempting to connect to a ph one. ⢠Data Locatio n enables you to specify where you want to store backups and synchronization files. ⢠Devi ce Ma nager enables you to see which phones have be en connected to your PC, and to remove details of phones that you no longer want to connect. Impo rtant : Y ou cannot restore information that you have removed us ing Device Manager . ⢠File T ransfer C onv erters enables yo u to sel ect which, i f any , video and audio conver ters are used w hen files are copied to the ph one using File T ransfer .
[ 15 1 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 Data Import With Data Import, you can transfer contacts an d calendar dat a to your Nokia 3600 seri es phone from the Nokia 3320, Nokia 3360, Nok ia 3600, Nokia 3650, No kia 62 1 0 , N oki a 62 50, N ok i a 6 3 1 0, No ki a 63 10i, Noki a 6 320 , No kia 6340, Noki a 6340i, N okia 636 0, Nokia 6 37 0, Noki a 6385, N okia 65 1 0, N oki a 659 0, Nokia 66 1 0, Nokia 6650, Nokia 7 1 1 0, Nokia 7 160, Nokia 7 190, Noki a 721 0, Nokia 7 650, N okia 82 1 0, N okia 8290, Nokia 83 1 0, No kia 83 90, Nokia 88 1 0, No kia 8850 , Nokia 8890, No kia 89 1 0 , Nokia 9 1 1 0 Commu nicato r , or P alm device. Synchronize With Synchronize, you can s ynchronize your phone contacts and calendar data with Microsoft and Lotus applications. T o be able to syn chron ize, yo u must hav e tasks cre ated for syn chroniz ation. When you connect your Nokia 3600 series phone to your PC for the first ti me , PC Suite i dentifies your phone and c reates a n umber of task s. Y ou can modify these tasks and create othe r tasks i f you w ant. Y ou can also sch edule tasks to be run at regular intervals, every time you connect your phone to your PC, or on command only . An animated icon appears on the Windows taskbar when synchronization is in progress: Synchronizing your phone with the PC (animated icon). File T r ansfer With Fi le T ransfer , you c an copy fil es betw een your phone a nd your PC, as well as delet e and rena me sele cted f iles. With the Multimed ia conve rters, video and audio format files that you cop y from the PC to your Nokia 3600 series ph on e are au tom atica lly co nvert ed to th e video and au dio for mat u sed by th e phone. Image T ra nsfer With Image Transfer , you can copy , move, r ename, and delete im age files on your phone and your PC. Y ou c an also view image files if there is an associat ed view er application.
[ 152 ] 18 Settings wizard With th e Settings wizard, you can configure the e- mail account, rem ote connection, message center , and multim edia message center settings of your phone. For example, you can manage settings m anually or copy a working configuration from th e PC to th e phone . Y o u can al so back up your phone s ettings to a f ile. Install software on your phone With PC Suite, you can install Java  and device software on your phone. These applications do n ot have an icon on th e application bar . I nstead, you can star t these application s from the To o l s menu. See the Inst alling d evice softwa re online help topic f or details. Note: Installation pa ckages can be received in a multimedia message, as an e-mail at tachment , via Bluetooth, or via infr ared and downloaded to your phone. If you are using PC Suite to transfer the file, save it to the c:\ nokia \ins ta lls folder . Note: Y ou can only use Java installation files with the ex tension .JAD or .JAR, and device software installation files with the extension .SIS. Impo rtant : Only install software from sources that off er adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. ⢠REMOVE PC SUITE FR OM YOUR PC Uninstalling PC Suite removes all files and fold ers that were added by the PC Suite i nstallati on pr ogram, b ut does n ot rem ove backed- up and arch ived files or synch roniz ation inf ormation . Theref ore, if you reinstall PC Suite you can back u p, restor e , and synchronize using th e same settings a s before. Note: If you want to remove backe d-up f iles, synch roniz ations, and other information relating t o th e phone s you h ave connected, you must do this before rem oving PC Suite. For further information, see the Viewing and remov ing details of a Nokia 3650 or Viewing an d remo ving details of a Nokia 3 600 online help topics.
[ 153 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 T o remove PC Suite, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Window s Start button, point to Settings , and click Control P anel . 2 Double-click Add/R emove Pr ogram s . 3 Select PC S uite for N o kia 36 50 or PC Sui te for 36 00 from th e list of inst alled program s. Cli ck Add/R em o ve . A con firmation di alog box opens. 4 After confirming th at you want to remove PC Suite f rom your PC, the uninstall program removes the program files an d informs you that you need to resta rt your PC to complete the uninstall process. When your PC r estarts, the uninstall program completes th e r emoval of PC Suite from your PC. Note: Uninstal ling PC Su ite doe s not remove th e Noki a Connecti vity SDK. Y ou can remove the Nok ia Conne ctivity S DK from your P C using the Add/Remove Progr ams application of the W indows Control P a nel. The uni nstall pro gram leav es some files on your P C that contain inf ormation about the Nokia devices you have connected to your PC. I f you decide to reinstall PC Suite, you will be able to continue using PC Suite as before. Important safety notes All the safety instr uctions in the us e r guides of your phone and computer also a pply when this product i s u sed with the phone. Remember to make back-up copies of all important data to protect against pos sible loss or alteration.
[ 154 ] 19 19 Reference informatio n ⢠BAT TERY STATEM ENTS Charging and Discharging Y our phone is pow ered by a rechargeable battery . Note that a new batter y's full per formance is achieved only after tw o or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be ch arged and discharged h undreds of times but it will eventu ally wear ou t. Whe n the oper ating time (tal k-tim e and stan dby tim e) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is tim e to buy a new battery . Use only batte ries appr oved by the phone ma nufac turer and recharge your battery only with the charger s approved by the manufacture r . Unpl ug the charger w hen not in use. Do not leave the ba ttery connected to a charger for longer than a w eek, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery wil l discharge itself over tim e. T emperature extremes can affect the ability of your batter y to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use an y charger or ba ttery that is dam aged. Do not short-circu it the battery . Accidental short-circu iting can occur when a metallic o bject (coin , clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal s trips on the batte ry) f or exam ple when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- cir cuiting the terminals ma y damage the battery or the con necting obje ct. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A phone w ith a hot or cold battery may temporarily not w ork, even wh en the batt e ry is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particularly limited in temperatures w ell below fr eezing. Do not dispose of batter ies in a fire !
[ 155 ] Referen ce information 19 Dispose of b atteries accordin g to local regulations (e.g. recyclin g). Do not dispose as household waste. Remove th e battery on ly when the phone i s switched off. ⢠USE PROPER CARE AND MAINTENANCE Y our phone is a product of su pe rior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below w ill help you to f ulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many year s. ⢠K ee p the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠K ee p the phone dry . Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that wil l corrode electr onic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the phone in du sty , dirty areas. Its m oving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, an d warp or melt cert ain plastic s. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it war ms up (to its normal tempe rature), moistu re can for m inside , wh ich ma y damage elect roni c ci rcu it boa rds . ⢠Do n ot attempt to ope n the phon e. Non-ex pert han dling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, kn ock or shake the ph one. Rough handl ing can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not pa int the phone. P aint can clog the moving par ts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use on ly the s upplie d or an ap proved r epl aceme nt ante nna. Una uth oriz ed antennas, modification s or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio device s.
[ 156 ] 19 All of th e above sug ge stion s apply equally to y our phone, battery , charger or any accesso ry . If any of th em i s not wo rkin g pro perly , take i t to y our neare st qualif ied ser vice facil ity . The p erson nel ther e will assist you and, if necessar y , arra nge for se rvic e. ⢠UNDERSTAND IMPORT ANT SAFETY INFORMATION T raffic Safety Do not us e a hand-he ld telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on th e passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Rememb er ro ad s afe ty alway s comes fir st! Operating environment Remembe r to foll ow any spe cial regu lation s in force in any area and alw ays switch off you r phone wh enever it is forbidden to use it, or wh en it m ay cause in terferen ce or da nger . Use the phone only in its normal oper ating positions. P arts of the ph one are m agnet ic. Metalli c material s may be attracte d to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid should not h old the phone to t he ear with the hearing ai d. Always secure the phone in its holder , because metallic materials may be attracted by th e earpiece. Do n ot place credit ca rds or o ther mag netic st ora ge m edi a ne ar t he phon e, be cau se inf orm ati on stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equ i pment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However , ce rtain el ect ronic eq uipmen t may n ot be shie lded again st the RF signals from your wireless ph one. PA C E M A K E R S P acemaker m anufacturers recom mend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid pote ntial interference w ith the pacem aker . These recommendations are consistent w ith the indepe ndent research by and recom mendatio ns of Wire less Technolo gy Re searc h. P er sons wit h pace make rs:
[ 157 ] Referen ce information 19 ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (8 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is s w itched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a bre ast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite th e pacemaker to minimize the potential fo r interfer ence. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately . HE ARI NG AI DS Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such inter ference, you m ay want to consult your serv ice provider . Other medical de vices Operation of a ny radio transmitting equipment, including cellu lar phones, may interfere with the f unctionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine i f it is adequ ately shielde d from ex ternal RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off you r phone in health care facilities whe n any regulatio ns posted in th ese areas instru ct you to do so. Hospitals or health car e facilities may be using equipment that c ou ld be sen sitive to extern al RF ener gy . V ehicles RF signal s m ay a ffect improper ly installed or inadequately s hielded electron ic systems in motor vehicles (e .g. electronic fuel injectio n systems, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems). Check with th e manufacturer or its representative re garding your vehicle. Y ou sh ould also consult th e manufacturer of a ny equipment that has been ad ded to your veh icle. P osted facilities Switch your phone off in an y facility where posted notices s o require.
[ 158 ] 19 P otentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area w ith a potentially explosive atmosphe re and obey all s igns and in structions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fi re resulting in bodily injury or even de ath. Users are advised to switch of f the phone w hen at a refuelin g point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of r adio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or whe re blasting operations are in pr ogress. Areas with a potentially ex plosive atmosph e re are often but n ot always clearly marked. T hey include be low deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas ( su ch as propane or butan e); areas wh e re the a i r contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, d ust or metal p owders; and any oth er are a where you woul d norm ally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. V ehicles Only qualified personnel should ser vice the ph one, or install the phon e in a v ehicle. F a ulty installat ion or s ervice may be dangerous and may inva lidate any warr anty which may apply to th e unit. Check regularly tha t all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating prope rly . Do not s tore or carry flammable liq uids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the ph one, its parts or accessor i es. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place obje cts, including both installed or portable wirele ss eq uipmen t in the ar ea ove r the air bag or in t he air b ag de ploym ent area. If in-vehicle w ireless equipment is im properly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could r esult. Aircraft Using your ph one wh ile in the air is prohibited. Sw itch your phone off before boarding an aircraf t. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operati on of the aircraf t, disrupt the wire less telephone network and may be i llegal.
[ 159 ] Referen ce information 19 F ailure to observe th ese instructions may lead to suspension or d enial of telephone services to th e offender , or legal action or both. Emergency calls Impo rtant : This phone, lik e any wire less phone, o perates usin g radio signals, wireless, and landline n etworks as well as user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all con ditions cannot be guaranteed. T herefore you should n ever rely solel y upon an y wireless phone for essential communications ( for exampl e, medica l emer gencies ). Emergency calls m ay not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in u se. Check with local servi ce providers. T o make an emergency call: 1 If the phone is n ot on, switch i t on. Che ck for ade quate si gnal str ength. Some networks ma y require that a valid S IM card is properly in serted in the phone. 2 Pre ss a s many times as need ed (e .g. to exit a cal l, to exi t a me nu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 3 K ey in the emergency number for your present location (e.g. 9 1 1 or other official emergency number). Emergency n umbers vary by location. 4 Press the key . If certai n featu res are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide an d your local cellular service pr ovider . When making a n emergen cy ca ll, remember to give all th e necessary information as accurately as possible. Rem ember that your wireless phone may be the onl y means of communication at the scen e of an accident - do not cut off th e call until given permission to do so.
[ 160 ] 19 ⢠CERTIFICA TION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEET S GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO R A D I O WAV E S Y our mobile phon e is a radio tr ansmitter and receiver . It is designed and manufactu red not to exce ed the limits f or ex posure t o radio frequ ency (RF) energy set by I ndustry Can ada. These limits are part of com prehensive guidelines and establish pe rmitted levels of RF e nergy for the general population. The guidelines are based on st andards that wer e d eveloped by independen t scientific organisations throug h per iodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines in clude a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR l imit set by the Industry Canada is 1.6 W/kg* T ests for SAR are conducted u sing standar d operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power leve l in all tested fre quen cy bands. Alth ough the SAR is deter mine d at the high est certified pow er level, the actual SAR of the p hone while oper ating c an be we ll be low th e m aximu m value . Th is is be cause th e pho ne is designed to operate at multiple pow er levels so as to use on ly the pow er required to reach the n etwork. I n general, th e clo ser you are to a base station, the low er the powe r output of the phon e. Before a phone model is a vailable for sale to th e public, compliance with the Canadia n Standard must be shown. The follo wing value s are t he hig hest SAR values for these phone mode ls wh en test ed fo r use a t the ea r and w orn on t he b ody , as d escrib ed in th is use r guid e: (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and Industry Canada requirements). Phone mod el FCC ID# Ear SAR value B ody worn SA R value Nokia 3600 QF XNHM- 1 0 0.7 0 W/kg 1.27 W/k g Nokia 3650 QF XNHL- 8 0.55 W/k g 0.8 3 W/kg
[ 16 1 ] Referen ce information 19 While there may be differe nces between the SAR le vels of various ph on es and at various positions, they al l meet the gove rnment requiremen t for RF exposure. * The SAR li mit for mobile phones u sed by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of body tissue. The standard incorporates a substan tial margin of s af ety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any va riations in mea surem ents. SAR va lues may vary depending on national r e porting requirements and th e network band. For SAR information in other region s please look under product information at www . nok ia.com .
[ 162 ] 19 ⢠USE ACCESSORIES SAFELY A f e w practic al rules for a ccessory operation: ⢠K ee p all accessories out of th e reach of small children . ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of a ny accessory , gras p and pull the plug, n o t th e cor d. ⢠Check regularly th at any vehicle-installed accessories ar e mounted and are operating properly . ⢠Installation of any complex car a ccessories mus t be made by qu alified personnel onl y . ⢠Use only batteries, char gers, and accessories that have been appr oved by the phone manufacturer . The use of an y other types could invalidate any app r oval or warranty a pplying to th e phone and c ould be dang erous. ⢠ACCESSORIES Original Nokia acce ssories ensure the best possible operati on o f your Nokia mobile phone in v a rious conditions. Specifications are s ubject to change without notice. The availability of particular products a nd services may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia de aler neare st y ou. Operations an d some fe atures are network depen dent. N okia enh ancem ent s enable the be st possible oper ation of yo ur Nokia 3 600 series mobile phon e in various conditions. V ariation in operation times will occ ur dep ending on SIM card, network and usage settin gs, usage style and environments. Please check the availability of W A P services with yo ur n etwork op erator and/or WAP servic e provi der . The availabil ity of Bluetoot h wir eless tec hnology ma y vary by country an d Blue tooth prod ucts are not a pproved for use ever ywhere. Please check with the loca l authorities.
[ 163 ] Referen ce information 19 Audio accessorie s WIREL ESS HEADSET HDW-2 The Nok ia Wire less Heads et HDW-2 is designed with Bluetooth technology and is compatible with Nokia 3600 series phones and phones supporting the Bluetooth 1.1 specification and Headset or Handsfree p rofiles. The compact headset g ives h and s-fr ee c on tro l of your phon e wi thou t ca bl es o r wir es . Th e ea rpie ce f its in ei ther ear al low ing for c onven ient and disc reet access to all basic call controls. Then Answer/ End button lets you answer and make calls, r edial, and switch the audio back and forth between the handset and headset. A separate volume control lets you change the call volume as necessary while m oving from place to place. T o maximize ca ll securit y , the he adset al so suppo rts encyrptio n of the w i reless connection for com patible phone models. HEADSET HDE-2 The HDE-2 headset is a small and lightweight portable headset for easy handsfree operation. It has a clip to hold the h eadset firmly in pla ce. HEADSET HDC-5 The HDC-5 he adset, with a r emote button, connects directly to the phone. No extra adaptor is required, and the remote con trol is provided. DUA L HEADS ET HDD- 1 The HDD-1 Dual Headset pr ovides comfortable handsfree ope ration with a remote control bu tton for answering and ending calls.
[ 164 ] 19 RETRA CTABLE HEAD SET HDC-1 0 The HD C-1 0 Retractable Head set is a compac t headset with a retractable mechanism and remote control. BOOM H E ADS ET H D B-5 HDB-5 Head set pr ovides h andsfree functiona lity and a new âÂÂover th e earâ concept providing excellent audio quality . Battery The 850 m Ah, Li-Ion based BL-5C battery provides power in a thin an d light package. It provides a talk tim e of u p to 2- 4 hour s and up to 15 0-20 0 ho urs standby time. Charging time is one hour and 35 min utes . V ariation in oper ation times will occur depe nding on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environments. Ta lk time is reduced by 5 perc ent if Enhanced Full Rate is active, and incre ased by up to 3 0% if Half Rate is active. Charge rs Y our Nok ia 3600 ser ies pho ne uses t he A CP -1 2U standard charger and mobile char gers LCH-9 and LCH-12. The LC H-12 Cigarette Lighter charger can be used with 12 V dc o r 2 4 V dc. T he 3600 se ries pho ne is a lso co mpatible with the A CP-8U trave l charge r . ACP -12U
[ 165 ] Referen ce information 19 Car accessorie s WIREL ESS CAR KIT CARK- 1 12 The wireless car kit supports Bluetooth 1.1 specification and offers a convenient handsf ree option in a car , wi th a rem ote control button . The kit includes the R emote Control Button CU W-2, Handsfree Unit HFW-1, Microphone HFM- 8 , HF Speaker HFS-12, and power cable PCU-4. MOBI LE HOLDER MBC -16 The MBC-16 Mobile Holder has ergonom ic release buttons and a swivel mount. It supports use w ith the mobile charger and Plug-in HF Car Kit. PLUG -IN HF CA R KIT PP H-1 This handsfree car kit in cludes a built-in speaker . It u ses the phone microphon e, but also has a con nector for an ex ternal micr ophone , HFM-8. HEADRES T HANDSFREE BH F-2 This headres t installs on a car headrest f or handsfree audio. The terminal charges with the LCH-9 or LCH-12 Cigarette Lighter charger . MICROPHONE HFM-8 This HFM-8 i s a s mall, directional microphone. Memory c ard The 64 MB memory card provides removable storage for your phone. The memor y card increases availa bl e memory and storage for your multimedia files like video clips, an d sound files, photos, me ssaging information, or to backup information from your phoneâÂÂs memory .
[ 166 ] 19 ⢠GLOSSARY Busine ss card A business ca rd is the same as an entry in the phone book. It may contain a name, phone n umber , and text ent ry . It ca n als o b e s ent to othe r dev ices . Call for war din g A netw ork se rvice s feat ure you u se to for ward incoming calls to another n umber . Call lis ts A list used to track numbers for incoming, outgoing, or missed calls. Call log A log that registers information about calls you make and receive. Call timer s Timers used to track the amount of time you spend on calls. Call wa itin g A network services f eature that enables your phone to beep while you are in the middle of a call. The beep lets you kn ow that someone else is callin g you. Elec tro nic s erial number (ESN) The identification number that is assigned to th e phone. T his number is located under the battery . In- cal l o ption s Features available f or use while you are in a ca ll. K eyguard Locks the keypad to preven t accidental key presses. K eypad tones The tone y ou hea r wh en you pre ss a ke y . Menu A list of choices you can make to change settings on your phon e or use various phone featu res. Predict ive text A method of entering in formation in your phone that uses a diction ary to predict, or guess, wh at you are writing.
[ 167 ] Referen ce information 19 Pro file A group of settings you can use to customize the way your phone works. Quick save A fast me thod for saving a nu mber . Ringing to ne The sound your phone makes when you receive a call. Ringing tones can be ringing sounds or s hort tunes. Scro ll b ar A bar that appears on the right side of the s creen when you scroll through the m ain menus. SMS The quick way to say s hor t m essa ge s ervice. Star t scr een Y our phon eâÂÂs idle scr een. Vo i c e m a i l A net work se rvices fe ature th at enables people who call and miss you to leave a voic e message on your phone. Wa r n i n g t o n e s Sounds your ph one makes during error conditions, during confirmations, when the bat te ry is low , and when you ne ed to re charge the battery .
[ 168 ] 19 ⢠T ECHNICAL INFORMATI ON Feature Sp ecif icatio n We i g h t 4.5 oz . (130 g ) with 850 mAh Li-lo n batter y Size 139 c c Frequency Rang e 3650 Lowb an d 9 00 880 - 9 15 MHz (TX ) 925 - 9 60 M Hz ( RX) Highband 1 900 1850 - 19 10 M H z (TX) 1930 - 19 90 MHz (RX) Frequency Rang e 3600 Lowb an d 8 50 824 - 8 49 M Hz ( T X) 869 - 8 94 M Hz ( RX) Highband 1 900 1850 - 19 10 M H z (TX) 1930 - 19 90 MHz (RX) T ransmitt er Ou tput Po w e r Lo wba nd up to 2W High ba nd up t o 1W Ba ttery V olt age 3.7 V no mi nal Operating T emperature -1 0ðC to 55 ðC ( 14ðF to 13 1ðF) Number of Channels 3650 194 lowband 299 highband Number of Channels 3600 124 lowband 299 highband
[ 169 ] Referen ce information 19 ⢠T RO UBLE SH OOTIN G Memory low When following notes are shown, the phone memory is low and you must start to delete some data: Not en ough memory to per form operation. Delet e so me da ta firs t. or Memory lo w . Delete so me data. In the even t follow the instructions below: ⢠T o view what k ind of data you ha ve and how m uch m emory the dif ferent data groups consume, go to Men u â To o l s â App. M an age r and select Opti on s â Memory details . ⢠T o avoid memory getting low , you should regularly delete, or transfer to your memory ca rd: ⢠messages from the Inbox, Dr afts, and Sent fold ers in Messaging ⢠retrieved e-mail messages f rom the phone memory ⢠saved br ow ser pa ges and ⢠images and photos in Images ⢠If you want to delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to rem ove the data. Clearing calendar memory - T o remove more than one event at a tim e, go to the Month view and select Optio ns â Delete entry â and delete either ⢠Before date - to delete all calen dar notes which take place be fore a certain date. Enter the date before w hich all calendar notes will be deleted, or ⢠All entr ies - to delete all calen dar notes. Erasin g log info rmat ion - T o erase all the log contents, Rece nt calls log, and Messaging delivery reports pe rmanently , go to Menu â Log and se lec t Opti ons â Clear log or go to Settin gs â Log dur ation â No log .
[ 17 0 ] 19 Dif ferent ways to sto re data : ⢠use PC S uite for Nok ia 3650 or P C Suite for No kia 3600 to take a backup copy of all data to your computer ⢠send images to your e-mail address and then save the images to your computer , or ⢠send data via infrared or Bluetooth to another device ⢠FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) Pho ne di sp lay Q. Why do mis sin g, di sco lor ed, or b righ t do ts ap pea r on the s cr een ev ery tim e I turn on my ph one ? A. This is an intrinsic characteristic of the active m atrix display . Y our phoneâÂÂs display contains multiple switching elements to con trol the pixels. A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen m ight exist. Camera Q. Why does the image appear dark when I am taking a p i cture with the Cam era or vi ew ing i ma ges ? A. The display contrast setting af fects the appearance of images. Check the display contrast setting and adjust it to ligh ter . Go to Settin gs â Phone s ettings â Display â Con t ra s t . Q. Why d o imag es look smudgy? A. Che ck th at the camera lens protection window is clean. To clean th e window follow the instructions in â Use proper care and maintenanceâ on page 1 55. Bluetooth Q. Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluet ooth co nnecti on? A. If another device is pair ing with your ph one but not sending data, and leaves the connection open , then the only way to disconnect is to deactivate the Blu etooth link altogether . G o to Blue tooth and select the setting B l u e t o o t h â Off.
[ 17 1 ] Referen ce information 19 Q. Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs Bluet ooth enabled device. A. Check that both have activated Bluetooth. Chec k that the distance betw een the two d evices is not over 1 0 m eters or that there ar e no wal ls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in âÂÂHidden â mode. Mult imed ia mes sag ing Q. What should I d o when the pho ne tell s that it c annot rec eive a multimed ia message because me mory is full? A. The amount of me mory needed is indica te d in the error message: Not enough m emory to re trieve mes sage. Delete som e data f irst. T o v i e w w h a t kind of dat a you ha ve and h ow mu ch memor y th e diff erent data grou ps consum e, go to Menu â T ools â App. Manager and selec t Opt i o ns â Me mo ry de tail s . After you ha ve freed up mem ory , th e m ultimedia message center tries t o send the multimedia m essages aga in automa tically . Q. Wha t sho uld I do whe n th e ph one give s the m ess age: Unable to retrieve multimedia mess age. Network connection already in use. ? A. End all active data connections. Multimedia messages cannot be received if another data connection usin g a different gateway address is active for W AP o r e-mail . Q. H ow ca n I end th e data conne ction w hen the p hone s tarts a d ata conn ection ag ain and again? The notes : Retrie ving m essa ge or Tr y i n g to retri ev e mes sag e ag ai n are sho wn br ief ly . Wh at is hap penin g? A. The ph one is trying to retrieve a multimedia m essage from the multimedia messagin g center . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging have bee n defined corr e ctly an d that there are no mista kes in phone numbers or addr e sses. Go to Messa gi ng and se lec t Option s â Settin gs â Mult imedia mes sage . T o stop the ph one from making a data connection, you have the following options. Go to Messaging and select Opt io ns â Settings â Multim edia mess age .
[ 172 ] 19 ⢠Select On r e ceiving msg. â Defe r retrieval if y ou wa nt th e multimedia messaging center to sa ve the message t o be retrieved later , for example, after you have checked the settings. After this change, the phone still needs to send information n otes to the network. To retrieve the message later , sele ct Defer r e tri eva l . ⢠Select On r eceiving m sg. â decline mess age - if you want to decline all incoming multimedia messages. After this c h ange, the phone needs to send information notes to th e network and t he multimedia messaging center will de lete all multimedia messages that are waiting to be sent to you. ⢠Select Multimedia reception â Off - if you want to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. A fter this change the phone will no t ma ke any ne twor k co nne ctio ns r ela ted to mul t i media m essag ing . Images Q. I s the for mat of the imag e I am trying to open su ppor ted? A. See page 55 for further information on the suppor ted image formats. Messag ing Q. Why canâÂÂt I select a contact ? A. If you canno t select a contact in the Contacts directory , the contact card does not have a phone nu mber or an e- mail address. Add th e missing in formation to th e contact car d in the Con tacts application. Calendar Q. Why are the wee k numbers a re mi ssing? A. If you have chan ged the Calendar settings so that the week will start on some other day than Mon day then the week numbers will not be shown. Brow se r ser vic es Q. No valid a ccess poin t defi ned. Def ine one in W AP settin gs. A. In sert proper br owser setting s. Contact your service provider for instructions.
[ 173 ] Referen ce information 19 Log Q. Why do e s the log a ppe ar empt y? A. Y ou may have activated a filter and no communication events fitting that fil ter have b een logge d. T o se e all eve nts, se lec t Options â Filt er â All c ommunica tion . PC co nnectivity Q. Why d o I have problems in connecting the phone to my P C? A. Make sure that PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 i s installed and running on your PC. Se e the Installation guide for PC Suite on the CD-R OM in the âÂÂInstal lâ section. For furthe r informatio n on how to use t he PC Suite for Nokia 3 600 series phon es, see the PC su ite online help. Access code s Q. Wha t is my pass word f o r th e lock , PIN, or PU K code s? A. The de fault lock code is 1234 5 . If you f orget or lose the lock c ode contact your phone dealer . If y ou for get or l ose a PIN o r PUK cod e, or if you ha ve no t receive d such a code, contact your network service pr ovider . For information about passwords, conta ct your access point provider , for e xample, a co mmercial Inte rnet se rvice pr ovider (ISP ), WAP service provider , or n etwork operator . App lication not respondi ng Q. How do I clo se an application that is not responding? A. Open the appl ication switc hing windo w by pressin g and holdin g . Then scroll t o the application, and press to c lo se th e applica tion.
[ 174 ] Nokia One -Y ear Limited W arranty Nokia warrants th at the Nokia wireless phone and accessor ies are free from defects in m aterial and workmanship. The warranty period for the Phone (Radio) u nits and all a ccessories (excluding carry ca ses) is twelve (12) mo nt hs f rom t he d at e o f p urc hase O R fo urteen ( 14) mo nths fr om date of wh olesale shipment f rom Nokia, OR fifteen (1 5) months from the date of m anufacture by Noki a. The warranty per iod for the Carry cases is three (3) months from the date of pu rchase or five (5) months from the date of w holesale shipment from No kia. During the warranty pe riod, Nokia will, at its op tion, re pair or replace the defective product f ree of charge. Replacement Product may be either new or remanufactured or refurbished. However , if Nokia determines that the warranty conditions cannot be applied, the purchaser will be billed for the repair and sh ipping. EXCEPTIONS This warranty is subject to the f ollow ing exceptions: 1 Mobile or f ixed installation, which is not in accordance with the installation instructions, published by Nokia, w ill void the warranty . Damage caused by a r epair or an attempt to r epair by other than a service centre authorized by N okia will void the warranty; 2 This warran ty cov ers normal consumer use and does not cover defects or damage to an y product wh ich, in the sole opi nion of Nokia, has bee n subject to : imp roper storage, exp osure to moisture or dampn ess, expo sure to fire, sand, dirt, windsto rm, l ightnin g, o r e arthquake; to th eft, batte ry lea kage, u naut horize d modifi c at ion, m isus e, negl ect, abu se, m isapp licat ion, accident, alt eratio n, im prope r instal lation, malad justmen t of c onsumer controls , or ab normal operating con ditions, or which has been attributable to acts of God;
[ 175 ] Nokia One-Y ear L imited W arr anty 3 Fuses are not covered by the warranty; 4 This warr anty does not cover defects or dam ages caused by a product which is not appr oved by Nokia to be connected to its wireless ph one; 5 This warranty does not cover defects or damages caused by improper or defective func tion of th e carrier system or by inadequate signal reception by the antenna; 6 Removal and reinstallation costs are n ot covered by this warranty; 7 This war ranty is a pplicable only to pr oducts bought through Nokia Products Ltd. in Ajax, Ontario, Canada, and sold eith er in Canada or Bermud a. 8 Removal, alter ation, or de facing of the Serial Number Plate, or the accessory Date Code L abels will void the war ranty . In no eve nt shall No kia be liable for incid ental, sp ecia l, or conse quen tial damages, direct or in direct, loss of unanticipated benefits or profits, loss of use of its wireless tele phone, resulting f rom the use of its wireless phone, or its accessories, or ar ising from any breach of this warranty . CLAI M PROCE D URE In order to obtain warranty performa nce, return the def ective unit to the No kia Servi ce Cen tre wi th transportat ion charge s prepai d (Shippi ng of the r epaired unit may be paid by Nokia, in which case Nokia sh all have risk of loss or damage during this shipmen t). The proof of date of purc hase will be requir ed befo re in-war ranty serv ice is rendered. Maintenance and service may be obtained in an y auth oriz ed service centre in Canada. EXTENSION OF W ARRANTY PERIOD When a repair is made, an extra 90-day s ervice warranty is given to the labour and parts of the r epair concerned. If replacement of a faulty unit is applied, instead of r epairing, this 90-day service warranty is applied to the replaced u nit.
[ 176 ] Besides t h is 90 -day service w arranty , th e warranty repairs or r eplacements do not affect the origi nal warranty conditions, which ar e determined by the date of pu rchase. THE FOR EGOING WARRANT Y IS THE PURC HASERâÂÂS SO LE AND EXC LUSIVE REME D Y AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER W AR RAN TI ES, EXP RESS ED OR IMPLI ED, INCL UDIN G BUT NOT LIMITE D TO ANY IM PLI ED WARRA NTY OR MERC HANTABIL ITY O R FI TNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PUR POSE O R U SE. Some prov in ces do not allow limit ation s on how long an impli ed warran ty lasts, s o the above limita tion s m ay not apply to you. FOR W ARRANTY SERVICE LOCA TIONS, CON TACT Y OUR SERV ICE PR OVIDER/ R ET AILE R/ DEA LER O R DI RECT L Y T O: NOKI A PROD UC TS LI MITE D 60 1 Westne y Road Sou th Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 905- 42 7-137 3 1-88 8- 226-6 54 2 W ebsite: www .nokia.ca For produ cts being return ed to Nokia or its au thorized service cen tres, the servic e provider/ retailer/dealer shall prepay sh ipping charges, taxes, duties, insur ance. Nokia shall h ave n o risk for loss or dam age durin g this sh ipment. NO TE: As warranty is automatically registered, no f urther action is required by the con sumer .
[ 177 ] In dex Numeri cs 1-t ouch d ia ling 52 Making ca lls 20 A Access codes 40 Access points 33 Settings 36 Settings, Advanced 38 Access points, glo ssary explana tion 33 Service provider , glossary explanation 33 Accessories Settings 46 Activating lou dspeaker Alarm clock 11 5 Snooze 11 5 Animations 60 Answering a ca ll 21 Automatic 46 Applications 127 Installing a Java application 128 Java a pp lication settin gs 129 Opening a Java application 129 Uninsta l ling a Java application 129 Attach ments Retrieving 91 Viewing 91 Audio files See Media files Automatic an swer 46 B Battery infor mation 154 Bluetooth 134 Cancelling pairing 138 Connection r equests 136 Con nect io n st atu s in dica to rs 137 Device icons 137 Dis conne c ting 139 F a ctory s et passcode 136 P airing 136 P airing requests 136 P asscode, glos sary explanation 136 Receiving data 139 Sending data 136 Settings 135 Short names for paired devices 138 Bookmark, glossary explanation 12 1 Browser browser a ccess points, see A ccess points Co nne cting 120 Emp ty ing me mo ry 125 Ending connections 125 Icons 12 1 W AP pages 11 9 XHTML pages 11 9 Brows ing 122 Bu fferin g Glossa ry e xplanation 66 Business card, glossary explanation 53 Sending 53 C Cache, glossary explanatio n 126 Emp ty ing 125 Calculator 111 Calendar 10 5 Al ar m 10 8
[ 178 ] Calendar entry fields 10 6 De let ing ma ny ent ri es si mul tan eous ly 169 Sending entries 10 9 Settings 10 8 Stopping a larms 10 9 Symbols 107 Views 107 Call cost limit Resetting the counter 27 Set by a service provider 26 Call register See Log Call restrictions 45 Calling 19 Calls 1-t ouch d ia ling 20 Ans we ri ng 21 Charging units 26 Conferen ce calls 20 Cost limit 26 Declining 21 Dialed 25 Duration 25 Forwarding 21 Int ern ati ona l 19 Mi ssed 24 Options during a call 22 Received 24 Settings 31 Settings fo r forwarding 23 Tra ns f er r i n g 23 Using the Cont acts directory 19 Camer a 55 Image types 57 Me mor y ca rd 58 Memory consumption 58 CD-ROM 14 1 Cell broadcas t messages 93 Cell info display 46 Certifi cates 43 T rust s e ttings 44 Char ges P acket da ta 35 Clear ing memo ry Calendar entries 169 Log information 169 Clip See Video recorder Clock 11 5 Al ar m 11 5 Settings 11 5 Composer 11 2 Adjusting s ound volume 11 2 Adjusting tem po 11 2 Changing tone s tyle 11 2 Listening to tones 11 2 Computer con nections 14 1 Conferen ce calls 20 Connection ind icators Bluetooth 137 Data c onnections 12 Infr ared 140 Connection settings 33 Contact cards Adding voice tags 50 Assigning 1-touch dialing numb ers 52 Assign ing de fault numbers and addre sses 49 Attaching ringing tones 52 Changing v oi ce tags 52 Deleting voice tags 52 Inserting pictures 49 Listening to voice tags 52 Removing ringing tones 53 Vo i c e t a g s 50
[ 179 ] Contact groups 53 Ad ding man y memb er s at the sa me time 54 Adding ringing ton es 52 Re moving memb ers 54 Converter 11 3 Adding exchange rates 11 4 Conve rtin g c urr encie s 11 4 Co nver ting un its 11 3 Copying Contacts between the SIM card and phone memory 47 T ext 75 Crea ting Contact car ds 47 Cutting T ext 75 D Data connections Indicators 12 Settings Date, settings 40 Declining calls 21 Definition of terms 168 Deleting Calendar entries 10 6 Contact car ds 48 Delivery reports 70 Dialed n umbers 25 Digital rights management 125 Disconnect i ng Bluetooth 139 Display s ettings 31 DNS, Domain Name Servic e , glossary explanation 38 DRM 125 D T MF tones, glossary explanation 23 E Editing Calendar entries 10 5 Contact cards 48 T ext 72 E-ma il 81 Attach ments 91 Deleting 92 Offl i ne 89 Online 88 Ope ning 90 Remote m ailbox 88 Retrieving from mailbox 89 Sa vin g a tt a ch me nts 92 Settings 97 Emergency calls 159 Era si ng Call cost counters 27 Log 27 Recent calls log 25 F Fa v o r i t e s 10 3 Add ing a sh ort cu t 10 3 File formats JAD and JAR 130 RealOne Player 65 SIS file 130 Supported 91 Fixed dialing 42 Folders, creating, organizing items to folders 16 Forwarding ca l ls 21 G Genera l settings 29 GIF animations 60 glossary 168 GPRS See P a cket data
[ 180 ] H Hand sfre e See Lou dsp e ake r Hea dset 17 High speed data, glossary explanation 34 HSCSD See High speed data I Idle state See Standby mode Image modes 57 Image s 59 Formats 61 Full screen 60 K eyboard shortcuts when viewing image s 61 Memory consumption 58 Moving the focal point 61 Org anizi ng 61 Picture messages folder 62 Receivin g from a d igital camera 59 Rotating 61 Viewing image details 61 Zooming 60 Indicators 11 Data connections 12 V oice message 33 Info se rvi ce 93 Infr ar ed 139 Installing software 13 1 Internet access points (IAP) See A ccess points Internet service provider , glossary explanation IP address, glossary e xplanation 38 ISDN, glossary ex planation 37 ISP See Internet ser vice provider J JAD and JAR files 130 Java See Applications. JPEG, glossary ex planation 55 L Lang ua ge for writing 30 Limit for call costs 26 Lock c ode 41 Log Era si ng co n ten ts 27 Filtering 27 Recent calls 24 Settings 28 Loopset Activatin g 46 Lou ds peake r Activatin g 17 T urning off 17 M Mailbox 88 Dis conne c ting 90 Making calls 19 Media files File formats 65 Glossa ry e xplanation 65 Playing 65 Sending 67 Me mor y ca rd 11 6 Camer a 58 Consumption 11 8 Format 11 8 P assw ord 11 8 Restore 11 8 Video clips 11 6
[ 18 1 ] Memory low T roubleshooting 169 Viewing memory consumption 1 1 8, 132 Me nu 13 Me nu k ey 13 Rearranging the m ain Menu 14 Messaging Delivery reports 70 Genera l settings 10 0 Inbox 83 Mai n v iew 69 Messages on the SIM card 93 Multimedia messages 78 My folders 87 Picture messages 77 Saving picture message graphics 62 Settings 94 T ext mes sages Writing e-mail 81 Writing text 72 Missed c alls 24 Modem Using your phone as a modem 14 1 Multimedia messages 78 Playing sounds 85 Re-playing sounds 85 Viewing 84 Mus i c fi le s See Media files My folders 87 N Notes 11 5 O Offline 89 Online 88 Org aniz ing Me nu 14 P P acket da ta 34 Connection time r 28 Data c ounter 28 Glossa ry e xplanation 34 Pricing 35 Settings 39 P airing, glossary explanation 136 P assw ord Me mor y ca rd 11 8 Pa s t i n g T ext 75 PC Co nne cting 14 1 Phonebook See Contacts Pictures Tak i n g 55 Viewing 60 PIN code 41 Unblocking 41 Playing video 64, 6 5 Predictive text input 73 Tips 74 T urning off 75 Prepaid SIM cards 26 Prices for packet data 35 Profiles 101 Renam ing 10 2 Settings 101 R RealOne Player⢠65 File formats 65 Media guide 66
[ 182 ] Streaming 66 V olu me control 66 Received calls 24 Receiving Data via Bluetooth 139 Data via infr ared 140 Ringing to nes , Operator logos , an d settin gs, see Smart messages Recent calls log 24 Call charging units 26 Call cost limit 26 Call costs 26 Call duration 25 Dialed n umbers 25 Erasing call lists 25 Missed c alls 24 Received calls 24 Reco rder , recordin g sound s 11 6 Recording video 63 Remote m ailbox 88 Disconnect i ng 90 Removing sof tware 132 Reports 70 Resolution, glossary explan ation 58 Retricting calls 45 Ringing tones 101 Adding a personal r inging tone 52 Mut ing 22 Receiving in a smart m essage 86 Settings 101 S Safety informa tion Care and maintenance 155 Electronic devices 156 Emergency calls 159 Operat ing environm ent 156 P otentially explosive atm os pher es 158 Traffi c s afe t y 156 Ve h i c l e s 158 Screen saver Settings 31 Search field 16 Security Access codes 40 Security certificates 43 Settings 40 Sending Calendar entries 10 9 Cont act cards, Busin ess cards 53 Data v ia Bluetoot h 136 Data v ia infrar ed 140 Media files 66 Video clips 64, 66 Service command editor 94 Service messages Service message settings 99 Service messages 87 Service provider for data conn e ction s, glossary expl anation Settings 29 Access codes 40 Accessories 46 Applications (Java â¢) 129 Bluetooth 135 Calendar 10 8 Call Forwarding 23 Call restrictions 45 Certifi cates 43 Clock 11 5 Connection 33 Date and time 40 Device settings 29 Display 31 E-ma il 97 Fixed dialing 42
[ 183 ] Ge neral settin gs for Messaging 10 0 Info se rvi ce 99 Lock code 41 Log 28 Messaging 94 PIN code 41 RealOn e P layer 67 Security 40 Service messages 99 Sounds 101 T ext mes sages 94 Video recorder 64 Shortcuts in F avorites 10 3 in Images 61 SIM card Copying names an d numbers 47 Me ssa ge s 93 Names an d nu mbe rs 28 Viewing messages on SI M 28 SIS file 130 Smart m essages Receiving 85 Sending 77 Snooze 11 5 Software Installing 13 1 Removing 132 T ran sferring a . SIS file to your phone 13 1 Sound files See Media files Sounds 101 Removing a personal ringing tone 53 Standby mode 10 Indicators 11 Settings 30 Stopping Alarm clock 11 5 Calen dar alarm 10 9 Streaming Glossa ry e xplanation 65 Switching between applications 14 Symbols for Calendar entries 10 7 T T aking pictures 55 T ext i nput 72 T ext me ssage servic e center Add ing ne w 95 T ext mes sages 76 See T ext mes sages Writing and sending T ext templates 87 Thumbnails In a cont act card 49 Time, settings 40 To -d o 10 9 To ne s 101 Ringing tone 102 Touch tone s 23 T raditional text input 72 T ransferring calls 23 T roubleshooting 169 U Uni t co nve rter 11 3 USSD commands 94 V vCar d format 53 Video clips See Media files Video player See RealOne Playerâ¢
[ 184 ] Video recorder 63 Me mor y ca rd 64 Saving video clips 63 Sending video clips 64 Settings 64 Video clips 64 Viewing GIF an imations 60 Image s 60 V oice dialing 50 V oice mailbox Changing the nu mber 20 Forwarding calls to voice mailbox 23 V oic e reco rd er 11 6 V oice tags 50 Adding 50 Changing 52 Deleting 52 List eni ng 52 Making ca lls 51 V olu me control 17 During a call 19 W W AP pages Browser 11 9 Writing 72 Predictive text input 73 Predictive text input, turning off 75 T raditional text input 72 X XHTML browser 11 9 XHTML glossary explanation 11 9 XHTML pages Browser 11 9 Z Zooming 60
[ 185 ] NO T ES
[ 186 ] 04/0 3 NO T ES
Nokia 3600 series User Guide
The wireless phone described in this guide is approved for use in GSM 900, GSM 1800, and GSM 1900 ne two rk s . LEGAL INFORMATI ON P art No. 9355946, Issue No. 1 1 1 Copyright é 2002 Nokia. All rights r eserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting P eople, N okia 3650, Nokia 3600, and t he Nokia Original Accessories logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. All other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Printed in Canada 03 /2003 US P atent No 58 18437 and other pending pat ents. T9 text input software Copyright é 1999-200 2 . T egic Communication s, Inc. All rights reserved. Includes RSA BSAFE cryptographic or security protocol software from RSA Security . Java is a trade mark of Sun Micr osystems, Inc. The infor mation in this user guide was written fo r Nokia 3600 series phones. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without pri or notice. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DAT A OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIA L, INCIDEN T AL, AN D CONSEQ UENTIAL OR INDIREC T DAMA GES HO WSOE VER CAUS ED. THE CONTENT S OF THIS DO CUMENT ARE PRO VIDED âÂÂAS IS.â EXCEPT AS REQ UIRED BY APPLICABL E LA W , NO WARRANTIES OF A NY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMP LIED, INCLUDING , BUT NO T LIM ITED T O , TH E IMPLIED W ARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILI TY AND FITNESS FO R A P ART ICULAR PU RPOSE, ARE M ADE IN R ELA TIO N TO TH E ACCUR ACY AND REL IABILI TY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOCU MENT . NOKIA RESERVES TH E RIGHT TO REVISE THI S DOCUM ENT OR WI THDRA W IT A T A NY TIME WI THOU T PRIOR NO TI CE. EXPORT CONTROLS This product contains commodities, technology or software exported from the United States in accordance with the Expor t Administration regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. or Canadian law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Y our phone may cause TV or r adio inte rfer ence (for example, when using a telephone in clos e proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can r equire you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility . This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. This device contains a radio transceiver and digital circuitry that supports its features. Operation of the digital device circuitry is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference rece ived, including interference that may caus e undesired operation. Modifications to this device not authorized by Nokia may void the authority granted for operation of this device and should not be made.
[ iii ] Contents 1. For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Network Se rvices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2. General inform ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Understand your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 Options lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Move the Navigation bar ho rizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Actions com mon to a ll applic ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 Volume control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Shared memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3. Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Make a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Answer a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Log - Ca ll log and general log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SIM folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Change general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Call settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Connection settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Date an d time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Call restriction (System serv i ce) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Accessory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5. Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Create contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Copy contacts between the SIM card and phone memory . . . . 47 Edit contact cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
[ iv ] Options when viewing a contact card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 9 Manage contact groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3 6. Camera an d Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Take pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Store pictures in Im ages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 7. Video recorde r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Record a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Watch a video clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 8. RealOne Player⢠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Play media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Send media files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Change the set tings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9. Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Messaging - General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Write text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2 Create and send new messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6 Inbox - receive mes sa ges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 My folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Remote mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Outbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 View messages on a SIM card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Cell broadcast (system service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Service command editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Messaging settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 4 Wireless village . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 00 10. Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Change the profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Customize profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
[ v ] 11. Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Add shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03 Shortcut options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 12. Calendar and To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Create calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Set calendar ala rms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Send calendar entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 To-do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 13. Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 11 Composer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 15 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16 Memory card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 14. Serv ices (XHTML) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Basic steps for acc essing the web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 19 Phone browser service settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Browsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Viewing saved pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 23 Download through the browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 End a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25 Browser settin g s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 26 15. Applic ations (Javaâ¢) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Install a Java applic ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 28 Java application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29 16. Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Install applications and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30 Install software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
[ vi ] Remove software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 32 View memory consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 17. Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Bluetooth c o nnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 34 Infrared connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Connect your phone t o a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 41 Use your phone a s a modem to connec t to the Internet or t o send or receive faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 41 18. PC Suite for Nokia 3600 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Software and hardware requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Install PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 43 Connect your phone t o the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Start t o use PC Suite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Online and offline modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Main window information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PC Suite applic ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Remove PC Suite from your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 19. Reference information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Battery st at ements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Use proper care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 55 Understand Important safety in f ormation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Certification Information (SAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 60 Use Accessories safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 69 Frequently Asked questions (FAQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 20. Nokia One-Ye ar Limited Warran ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
[ 1 ] 1 For your safety The use of mobil e phones and the ir ac cess ories may be pro hibit ed or res tr icted in c ertai n a rea s. Ob ey ap plic abl e law reg ardi ng m obi le p hon e u sage. Read these simple gu idelines. B reaking the rules m ay be danger ous or illegal. Further detailed in formation is given in this User Guide. Do not swi tch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it ma y cause in terference or danger . ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Don't use a h and-held p hone while driving. INT ERFER ENCE All wireless phones may get in terference, w hich could affect performa nce. SWITCH OFF IN H OSPIT ALS Follow any regulatio ns or rules. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OF F IN AIRCR AFT Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH O FF WH EN R EFU ELING Don't use the ph one at a refuelling point. Don't use near fu el or chemicals. SWITCH OF F NEAR BL ASTING Don't use th e phone where blasting is in progress. Ob serve restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules. USE SENS IB L Y Use only in th e normal position. Don't t ouch the antenna unne cess arily .
[ 2 ] 1 QUAL IFIED SE RVICE Only qualif ied p erson nel may instal l o r repai r ph one equi pment. AC CES SO RIES AND BA T TER IES Use only appr oved accessories and ba tteries. Do not con n ect incompatible products. WA TER- RESISTANCE Y our phone is not wat e r-resistant. K ee p it dr y . BACKU P COPIE S Remember to make backup copies of all important data. CONNE CTING T O OTHER DEVICE S When con necting to an y other device, read its user 's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not co nne ct incompatible products. CA LLIN G Ensure th e phone is swi tch ed on and in ser vice. Enter the phon e num ber , inclu ding the ar ea code, then press . T o end a c all , press . To answer a call, press . EMER GENCY CAL LS Ensure th e pho ne is switch ed on and in servic e. Press as ma ny time s as nee ded (e.g. to ex it a ca ll, to exi t a m enu, etc .) to cl ear the di spla y . Ent er the em ergenc y numbe r , the n press . Give your location. Do not end th e call u ntil told to do so.
[ 3 ] For your safety 1 Network Service s The wire less phone de scribed in this gui de is approved f or use on the GS M 900, GSM 180 0, an d GSM 19 00 ne twork s. A number of f eatures included in this guide are called Netw ork Service s. Thes e are spe cial s ervices that you ar range throu gh your wir ele ss se rvice provider . Before you can take advantage of any of th ese Networ k Services, you must subscribe to the m through your service pr ovider and obtai n instructions for their use from your service provider . Note: Some n etworks may n ot supp ort all lan guage-depe ndent char acters and/or services. Check the model number of any charger before us e with this device. This device is intended for u se when su pplied with power from ACP-12U, ACP-8U, LC H-9 a nd LCH- 12. Wa r n i n g : Use only batteries, charger s, and accessories approved by the phone manufacturer for use with this particular phone model. The use of any other types may in validate any approval or warranty applying to the phone and may be danger ous. For availability of approved accessories, please che ck with your de aler . When you disconnect the pow er cord of any ac ce ssory , grasp and pull the plug, not th e cord.
[ 4 ] 1 Contacti ng Nokia T o help Nokia promptly answer your questions, please have your phoneâÂÂs model number , I MEI number , and your postal code r eady when you call Customer Care. The IMEI and model number are on the back of your phone under the battery . I f you are calling about an accessory , please have it available for reference. Nokia Customer Care Nokia Products Ltd. 60 1 Westne y Rd . S outh Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 1-90 5- 427-1 37 3 1-88 8- 22-NO KIA (1- 888-2 26 -6 542) F ax: 1-90 5- 427-10 7 0 Web s i t e: www .nokia.ca
[ 5 ] General information 2 2 Gen eral inform ation Congratulations on pu rchasing your Nokia 3600 series mobile phone. Y our phone provides many functions which are practical for daily use, su ch as a digital camera, a video r ecorder , m essaging, e-mail, a clock, an alarm clock, a calcu lator , and a ca l endar . A variety of Xpre ss on TM colour covers are also available. Y our phone can connect to a PC, laptop, or other device using a data cable, bluetooth, or the bu ilt-in IR port. For more in formation on connectivity , ref er to the PC Connectivity Guide . The PC Connectivity guide, Nokia PC Suite, and all related software can be downloaded fr om the Download Software section of www .nokia.ca. ⢠UNDER STAND YO UR PHONE Insert the SIM card and load the battery Impo rtant : K e ep all m iniature S IM card s out of the reach o f small ch ildr en. Note: Before removing the covers, always switch off the power and disconnect the phone from the charger or any other device. Always s tore and use th e phone with the cover s attached. 1 Open th e cover w ith the back of the ph one facing you . Press the lockin g catch ( 1 ) in the direction of the arrow and slide the cover ( 2 ). Camera lens 1 2
[ 6 ] 2 2 Find the SIM card slot ( 3 ). Place th e SIM card carefully into the slot. Make sure that the beveled corner on the SIM card faces the bottom of the phone and that the gold en contact area on the card faces downward. 3 Slide the silver ca tch over the SIM c a rd to secure it. ( 4 ). 4 Load the battery ( 5 ): Align the golden contacts of the bat te ry with the corresponding connectors on the ph one, and pu sh the opposite end of the bat te ry until it snaps into place. Replace the cov e r . Charge the battery 1 Connect the l ead to the ch arger . Y ou will hear it click into place. 2 Connect the l ead from the charger to the base of th e phone ( 6 ). 3 Connect the charger to an AC wall outlet. The battery in dicator bar sta rts scrolling. Note that you can use the phone while charging. 3 4 5 6
[ 7 ] General information 2 4 When the battery is fully ch arged, the bar st ops sc roll ing . Di scon nect th e c har ger f rom the AC ou tlet and then from th e phone . See also âÂÂBattery statementsâ on page 1 54 in th e User Guide. Note: Remove the battery only when the phone is switched off. Switch the phone on o r off Press and hold the power key . WA R N I N G! Do not switch on the phone when wireless phone u se is prohibited or when i t m ay cause interference or danger . TI PS O N EF FI C IEN T O PER ATION : Y our phone has a buil t-in antenn a (gray are a in pi cture). As with an y other radio transmitting device, do not touc h the antenna unnecessar ily w hen the phone is switched on. Contact with the antenna affects call quality and may caus e the phone to operate at a higher power le vel than oth erwise needed. Not touchi ng the antenna area during a phon e call optimizes the anten na performan ce and the talktime of your phon e. If the phone r equests a PIN c ode: The PIN code is usually supplied with the SIM car d. K ey in the code (displayed as ****) and press OK . If the phone r equests a se curity code: K ey in the security code (displayed as *****) and press OK . The factory setting for the security code is 1234 5 . For more in formation on the a ccess codes, see âÂÂSecurityâ on page 40.
[ 8 ] 2 FIRST SETTI NGS Use the number keys - to key in first the current time and then the date. Press OK to a ccept the settings. Use the Scroll ke y Press t he scroll key on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with arrows 1 to 4) to m ove in th e Menu. Scroll to an application or a folder and press the scroll key in the middle (shown with arrow 5 ) to open it. For ex ample: 1 T o open an Options list, press Options. The small arrow at the bottom of the displa y ( 1 ) indicat es if the list contains more item s. The lighte r the arrow , the f ewer th e items le ft in the l ist. 2 T o scroll do wn the Options list, p ress . A small arrow to the r ight ( 2 ) indicates a sublist. To open a sublist, pr ess . T o sta rt an ac tion, scroll to a com mand and press . 3 Press to go to a tab ( 3 ), a new page, or view in a n application. Make a call 1 In standby m ode, key in the phone number , including the area code. If you make a mis take, p ress to clea r nu mbers . 2 Press and wait for the answer . 3 Press to finish the call (or to cancel the call attempt). 1 2 3 4 5 2 1 3
[ 9 ] General information 2 Copy names and numbers from a SIM card to the phone memory If you have stored names and phone numbers on a SIM card, you can copy them to the ph one memory . 1 Press to ope n the ma in Menu. 2 Use the scroll key to m ove to Co nta cts . 3 Press to open Co nta cts . 4 Whe n y ou o pen Contacts for the f irst time, th e phone asks you if you want to copy all your contact data from the SIM card to the phone memo ry . Pres s OK . See also âÂÂCopy contacts betwee n the SIM card and phone memoryâ on page 47. Ke y g u a r d Use the keygua rd ( keypad lock) to pr event th e keys fr om being accidentally pressed. To l o c k : Press and . When the keys are locked, appears on the dis p lay . T o unlock : Press and . When the keyguard is on, pr ess to answer a call. During a call, the phone can be operated normally . Note: When K eyguard i s on, calls m ay be possible to t h e emergency n umber progra med into y our phone (9 1 1 or oth er officia l emergency n umber). Just key in th e emergen cy nu mber an d pres s . The numbe r is displayed only after you h ave keyed in its last digit. Shortcuts in standby mode ⢠Press to open the m ain Menu. ⢠Press to open a list of the last dia led numbers. Press to view received and missed calls lists. ⢠Press to open Co nta cts .
[ 1 0 ] 2 ⢠T o change the pr ofile, press briefly and select th e profile. ⢠Press and to call your voice mailbox. Se e âÂÂCall you r voice mailboxâ on page 2 0. Shortcuts in editors ⢠Press to open a list of commands related to wr iting and editing text. Pre ss to switch be tween predictive, traditional text input and num ber mo de ( Pred ictive text â P redictive text o n , Alpha m ode , Number mode ). ⢠When you are writing, press repeatedly to ac ce ss different kinds of special characters, or pr ess to open a list of special ch aracters. ⢠Press to e nter a space. ⢠Y ou can also use to mark items. Press and hold and at the same time, move the scroll key to ma rk text to be copied or erased. Other shortcuts In the main Menu, press a n d h old to open a v i ew where you can see all the applications that are open and switch between them. Standby mode The indicators described are shown when the pho ne is r eady for use, with no characters keyed i n. In this stat e, th e ph on e is in âÂÂst an dby mo deâ . A Shows the signal st rength of the cellular system a t your cu rrent location. The higher the bar , the stronger the signal. The symbol is r e placed with th e GPRS sym bol when the GPRS connection has been set to When avail able and a connection is available in the s ystem or in th e current cell. See â P ac ket d ata ( Gen era l P acke t Radio Se rvice , G PRS)â on page 3 4 and âÂÂG PRSâ on page 3 9.
[ 1 1 ] General information 2 B Shows an analog or a digita l clock. Also see settings for âÂÂDate and timeâ on page 40 and settings for S tandby mode â Background image, on on page 30. C Indicates which cellular s ystem th e phone is currently using. D Shows the battery charge level. The higher the bar , the more power left in the battery . E Navigation b ar: show s the cur rently active prof ile. If t he select ed p rofile is Norma l , th e cur rent d ate is displ ayed inste ad of the prof ile n ame. Fo r furthe r infor mation, see âÂÂMove th e Nav igation bar horizon tally â on page 1 5 and âÂÂPr ofilesâ on page 1 0 1. F Shows the current sh o rtcu ts assigned for the sele ction keys an d . Note: Y our phone h as a screen saver . If there a re n o actions for five minutes, the display is cleared an d a screen saver becomes visible. See âÂÂScreen saver timeoutâ on pa ge 3 1. T o deactivate the screen saver , press any key . Tip: Y ou ca n change the se l ection k ey shortcuts and the ba ckground image. See the settings for â Standby modeâ on page 30. INDI CATOR S RELATED TO A CTIONS One or m ore of the following icon s may be shown when the ph one is in standby mode: - Indicates that you have received new messages in th e Inbox in Messaging. If the indi cator is blinking, the phone memory is low and you must dele te some data. For f urther information, see âÂÂMemory lowâ on page 169. - Indicates that you have received new e-mail. - Indicates that you have r eceived on e or several voice messages. See âÂÂCall your voice mailboxâ on page 20. - Indicates that there are messages waiting to be sent in Outbox. See âÂÂOutboxâ on page 92.
[ 12 ] 2 - I nd ica te s wh e n Ring ing opti ons has been set to Sile nt an d Message alert tone to Off in th e currently active profile. See â Profilesâ on page 1 0 1. - Indicates that the ph oneâÂÂs keypad is locked. - Indicates that you have an active alarm. S ee âÂÂClockâ on p age 1 15. - Indicates that Bluetooth is active. Note th at, when data is transmitted via Bluetooth, is shown. - Indicates that all call s to the phone are forw arded to a voic e m ailbox or ano the r num ber . See âÂÂSett in gs fo r call forwardingâ on page 23. If you ha v e tw o phone l ines, the forw ard indic ator for th e fi rst l i n e i s a nd f or th e sec ond l in e . Se e âÂÂLi ne in use (system service )â on page 32. - In dica tes t hat y ou ca n make call s usi ng phone line 2 only (system service). See âÂÂLine in use (system service)â on page 3 2. DAT A CON NECT IO N IND ICAT ORS ⢠When a n application is esta blishing a da ta connection, one of th e indicators below blinks in standby m ode. ⢠When an indicator is shown continuou sly , the connection is active. for a data call, for a high speed data call, Note: Check with your s ervice provider for ava i lability of h igh speed data ca lls. is shown in stead of the signal strength in dicator when the re is an active GPRS connection. for when the GPRS connection is put on h old during voice calls. for a fax cal l, for a Blu eto oth co nnec tion, and for an infrared connection.
[ 13 ] General information 2 â¢M E N U Press (Menu key) to open the main Menu. I n the Menu, you can access all the applications in your phone. Optio ns in the M enu are: Open , List view / Grid view , Mo v e , Mo ve to folder , New fold er , He lp , and Exit . If you pr ess and hold , the phone r eturns to standby mode and th e application is le ft open in the background. Pressing will always end a call, even if another application is active and displayed. When you switch the phone off, applications are closed and any unsaved data is saved automatica l ly . Tip: Select Options â List view if you wan t to view the appli cations in a lis t. Mo ving i n the Me nu Pr ess the scroll k e y on the top , bottom , left and right (shown with arrows 1 to 4) to move i n the Menu . Opening applications or folders Scroll to a n application or a folder and press the scroll key in the middle (shown with arrow 5) to open it. Closing applications Backstep by pressing Back or Exit as m any times as is neede d to return to standby mode or select Options â Exi t . 3 1 4 2 5 Using t he s croll key t o move
[ 14 ] 2 Rearrange the Menu Y ou ca n rea rra nge th e M enu i n any o rder you like. Y ou ca n move applications th at you u se more often from a f older to the Menu, and place applica tions you use less often in folders. Y ou can also create new folders. 1 Scroll to the item you want to move an d select Options â Move . A check mark is placed beside th e application. 2 Move the selection where you want the a p p l i c a t i o n t o b e a n d p r e s s O K . Switch between appl ications If you have several applications open and want to switch from on e application to another: Press an d hold (Menu key). The application switching window ope ns showing a list of applications that are currently open. Scroll to an application and press . Note: If memory is getting low , the phone may close some applications. The phone saves any unsaved data befor e an application is clos ed. ⢠O PTIONS LISTS In this user guide, you can see the Options list comma nds which tell you what commands are available in diff erent views and situations. The available c ommands change depending on th e view you are in. In some situations, when you press the scroll key , a shorter options list appears showing only the main commands available in the view . Online help Y our Nok ia 36 00 seri es pho ne al so has a help fu nc tion whic h yo u can access fro m an y ap pli cat ion or v iew sho wing the O pti ons se lec tion corresp onding t o t he ke y .
[ 15 ] General information 2 ⢠MOVE THE NAVIGATION BAR HORIZO NTALLY In the navigation bar , you ca n see: ⢠small arrows or tabs which tell you if there ar e more views, folders, or files you can mov e to. ⢠editing indicators, see âÂÂWrite textâ on page 7 2. ⢠other information, for example, 2 /14 in the figure below means that the current picture is t he second of 14 pictures in th e folder . Press to see the next picture . ⢠ACTIONS COMMON TO ALL APPLICATIONS ⢠Op en it ems for vi ewi ng - Wh e n y ou are viewing a list of files or folders, to open an item, scroll to an item and press the scroll key or se lec t Options â Open . ⢠Edit i tems - To open an item for editing, you sometimes need to first open it for viewing and then select Options â Edit , i f you w ant to change its contents. ⢠Rename items - To give a new name to a file or folder , scroll to it and select Options â Rename . ⢠Remove, del ete items - Scroll to the item and select Options â Delete or press . To delete many items at a time, you f irst need to ma rk them. ⢠Mark a n item - There are several ways t o sele ct items w hen you are in a list. ⢠T o select one item at a time, scr oll to it and sele ct Options â Mark /Unmar k â Ma rk or press and the scroll key at the same time. A check m ark is placed next to th e item. ⢠T o select a ll items in th e list, select O ptions â Mark/ Unmark â Mark all . Tip: For information on h ow to inser t text and num bers, see âÂÂWrite textâ on page 7 2.
[ 16 ] 2 ⢠Mark mul tip le items - Press and hold an d at th e same time move the scroll key down or u p. As the selection m oves, a check mark is placed next to the items. T o end the selection, stop the scrollin g with the sc roll key and then release . After you have se lected all the items you want, you can move or delete them b y selecting Option s â Mo ve to folder or Dele te . ⢠T o unmar k an item, sc r oll to it and sele ct Option s â Mark /Unmar k â Unmar k or press and the scroll key at the same time. ⢠Create fol de rs - T o create a new folder , select Options â New folder . Y ou are a sked to give a name to the folder (max . 35 letters). ⢠Move i tems to a fo lder - To move items to a folder or between folders, select Options â Mo ve to folder (not shown if th ere are no folders available). When you select Mo ve to folder , a list of available folders opens and you can also see the root level o f the application (for moving an item out of a folder). Select th e location you want the item to be moved to and pr ess OK. Search for items Y ou can s earch for a name, fil e, folder , or shortcut by u s i n g t h e search field. In some situations the search field is not visible automatically , an d you can activate it by selecting Options â Fin d or just by starting to key in letter s. 1 T o search for an item, start to key in text in the search field. The phone im mediately starts to sear ch for m atches a nd moves the selection on the best match. T o make the search more accu rate, key in more letter s and the selectio n mo v es t o t he item that best matches the letters. 2 When the corr ect item is found, press to open it.
[ 17 ] General information 2 ⢠V OL UME CO NT ROL When you have an active c all or are listen ing to a s ound, press or to increase or de crease the vo lume level, respectively . Loudspeaker Y our phone has a loudspeaker for handsfree use. The l oudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the phone from a short distance wi thout having to hold the ph one to your e ar . The lou dspeaker can be used d uring a call, with sound application s, and when viewi ng multime dia messages. Re al On e Player⢠uses the lou dspeaker by default wh en you watch a video. Using the loudspeaker makes it easier to u se other a p plications during a call. V oice volume icons: - f or ea rpiece m ode, - f or loud speaker mode. ACTI VATE THE LOUDSP EAKER T o use the lou dspeaker during an a l ready active call, select Options â A ctivate han dsfre e . A tone is played, is shown in the navigation bar , and the volume indicator changes. V olu me indicators for earpiece and loudspeaker modes are shown in the navigation bar . The loudspeak e r ne e ds to be activated s e parately each time for phone calls, but the sound applications su ch as Com poser and Recorder use th e loudspeaker by defaul t. The loudspeaker can not be activated when you have a headset connected to the ph one. T URN OFF TH E LOUDSPE AKER When you have an active call or a sound is playing, select Options â Deactiv . hands free . Headset mode T o adjust the volu me level when a headset is connected to your phone, press or or use the headsetâÂÂs keys.
[ 18 ] 2 ⢠SHARED MEMOR Y The followin g features in your ph one use shared memory: contacts, text, text messa ges, multimedia messages, images and ringing tone s, video record e r a nd player , calendar and to-do notes, and downloaded application s. Using any of these features leaves less memory for other featu res. T his is especially true with heavy use of any of the features. For example, sav i ng many images may take all of the shared memory and your phone m ay display th at the me mory is f ull. In this case, dele te some of the inf ormatio n or entries reserving the shared memory .
[ 19 ] Y our phone 3 3 Y our phon e ⢠MAKE A CALL 1 K ey in the phone n umber , including the area code. Press or to move the cursor . Press to remove a n umber . For inter national calls , press twice for the intern ational prefix (th e character r e places the international access c ode ) and then key in the country code, the ar ea code without 0 , and the ph one number . Tip: T o adjust the volume during a call, press to increase and to decrease the volume level. Note: Calls described here as international may , in some cases, be made between regions of the same nation . 2 Press to call the n umber . 3 Press to en d the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Norm al positio n: Hold th e phone as you would hold an y other telephone. Note: Pressing will always end a call, even if another applicat ion is active an d displayed on the displa y . Make a call using th e Contacts directory 1 T o open th e Contacts directory , go to Menu â Contacts . 2 T o find a con tact, scroll to the desired name, or key in th e first letters of the name. T he Searc h fiel d op ens aut omat ical ly and m atch ing contacts a re listed. 3 Press to start the call. If the contact ha s more than one phone number , scroll to th e number and press to start the call.
[ 20 ] 3 Call your voice mailbox The voice mailbox (system ser vice) is an answe ring mach ine whe re call ers who are unabl e to rea ch y ou can leave yo u voic e me ssa ges. ⢠T o call your voice m ailbox, press and in standby mode. ⢠If the phone asks for the voice mailbox number , key it in and pr ess OK . Y ou can obtain this number from your service provide r . See also âÂÂSettings f or call forwardingâ on page 23. Each phone line may have its own voice mailbox numbe r , see âÂÂL ine in use (system service)â on page 32. Tip: If your voice mail re quires you to enter a password every time you call to listen to you r voice messages, you may wan t to add a touch tone number after the voice m ailbox number . Th is way the password is gi ven autom atically ever y time you call your v oice mail. For example, 1234567p1234# where 1234 is the password and âÂÂpâ inserts a paus e . See âÂÂSend touch tonesâ under the section âÂÂO ptions during a call â on page 22. CHANGE THE VOICE MAIL BOX NUMBER T o c hange th e ph one n umber of your vo ice mailbo x, go to Menu â T ools â V o ice ma ilbox and select Opt i on s â Change number . K ey i n the nu mber (obtain ed from your ser vice pr ovide r) and press OK . 1-touch dialing T o view the 1-touch dialing grid, go to Menu â To o l s â 1-touch dial . 1 Assign a phone number to one of the 1-touch dialing keys ( - ) , see âÂÂAs sign 1-touch dialing keysâ o n page 52. 2 T o call t he nu mber: In standby mode, press t he corresponding 1-touch dialing key and . If th e 1-touch dialing function is set to On : Pre ss and hold t he corr espondin g 1-tou ch di aling ke y until t he call is started. Make a conference call Confe rence calling is a system service that al lows you to ma ke a con fere nce call with a m aximum of six participants, including yourself.
[ 2 1 ] Y our phone 3 1 Make a ca ll to the fir st participant. 2 T o make a call to a n ew participant, select Opti ons â New cal l . K ey in or search th e memory for the phone n umber of th e participant and press OK . The first c all is automatically put on hold. 3 When the new call has been answered, join the first par ticipant in the conference call. Select Opti ons â Conference . 4 T o add a new per son to th e call, repe at step 2 and the n select Optio ns â Conference â Add to conference . ⢠T o have a p r ivate conversation with on e of th e participants: Selec t Optio ns â Conferenceâ Privat e . Scroll to the desired participant and press Pri va te . The conference c all is put on hold in your phone, and the othe r participan ts can still contin ue talking with each othe r while you have a private discus sion with one participant only . Once you have fin ished the private convers ation, select Opti ons â A dd to conference to return to th e conference call. ⢠To drop one partici pant from the confe rence call, select Options â Conference â Drop pa rticipan t , t hen s croll to t he p arti cipa nt and press Drop . 5 T o end th e active conference call , pre ss . A conference call with two participants is shown. Tip: The quick est way to m ake a n ew call is to di al t he num ber an d pres s to st art the call. Th e existin g call is automatically put on hold . ⢠AN SWER A CAL L ⢠T o answer an incoming call, press . ⢠T o end th e call, press . If you do not want to answer a cal l, press . The caller will hear a â line busyâ tone or your voicemail message.
[ 22 ] 3 Tip: If you have activated the Call forw ard â If busy function to forwar d calls, for example, to your voice ma ilbox , rejecting an inc oming call will also f orwar d the call. See âÂÂSettings f or call f orwardingâ on pa ge 23. When a ca ll comes in, press Mut e to quickly mute the ringing tone. Tip: T o adj ust the phone tones for differ ent envir onmen ts and events, for example, w hen you wan t your phone to be silent, see âÂÂProfilesâ on page 1 0 1. Note: It is possible that the ph one ass igns a wrong name for the phone numbe r . Th is happe ns if the p hone n umber of the c alle r is n ot stored in Contacts but the seven last digits of the n umber match another number that is stored in Contacts. In this cas e , call identification is not correct. Call wa iting (system service) If you have activated the Call waiting service, the system will notify you of a ne w incoming call while you have a call in progress. See âÂÂCall waiting: (system service)â on page 32. 1 During a ca ll, press to a nswer th e waiting call. T he first call is pu t on hold. T o switch between the two calls, press Swap . 2 T o end th e active call, pre ss . Tip: T o end both calls at the same time, se lec t Opti ons â End al l calls and press OK . Options during a call Many options that you can use during a call are system services. Press Opti on s during a call for some of the f ollowing option s: Mut e or Unmu te , End ac tive call , End all calls , Hold or Unhold , Handset , B T hand sfre e , New call , Confer ence , Private , Drop participant , Answ er , a nd Decline . Swap is used t o switch between the active call an d the call on hold.
[ 23 ] Y our phone 3 Tr a n s fe r is u sed to con nec t a n in comi ng c all or a c all on h old w ith an ac ti ve call and to disconnect yourself f rom both calls. Sen d touch to nes is used to send touch to ne strings, for example, pa sswords or bank account numbers. 1 Key in the digits w ith - . Each keystroke generates a tou ch tone, which is transmitted while the call is active. Press repeatedly to produce: * , p (inserts a pause of about tw o seconds before, or betw ee n touc h tone char act ers .), an d w (if you u se this ch aracter, the remaining sequence is not sent until you press Send again dur ing the call). Press to produce # . 2 T o sen d the tone, pre ss OK . Tip: Y o u can also sto re a sequence of touch tones for a c ontact card. When you make a call to the con tact, you can retrie ve the sequ ence. Add touch ton es to the phone number or T ouc h tone fields in a contact ca rd. Glossary: T ouch t ones ar e the to nes you hear wh en you p ress the number keys on the ph one keypad. Touc h tones allow yo u to communicate with voice mailboxes and computerized teleph ony system s. Settings for call forwarding When th is system servi ce is activate d, you can d irect your incomi ng calls to anoth er number , for exampl e, to your voice m ailb ox numbe r . Fo r details, contact you r servic e provi der . Go to Menu â To o l s â Cal l fo rwar din g Select one of th e forward options, for example, select If busy to for ward voice calls when you r number is b usy or when you decline in coming calls. ⢠Select Opti on s â A ctiva te to tu rn the f orward setting on, Cancel to turn th e forwar d setting off, or Check status to che ck whether the forward is activated or not. ⢠T o cancel all active forwards, select Opti on s â Ca nc e l al l fo rw ar ds . For information about the forward indicators, see âÂÂI ndicator s related to actionsâ on page 1 1.
[ 24 ] 3 Note: Y ou cannot have rejection of i ncomin g c alls and c all forwarding active at th e same time. See â Call rest ric tion (Sy stem serv ice) â on p age 4 5. ⢠LOG - C ALL LOG AND GEN ERA L LOG Go to Menu â Lo g . In the log you can monitor phone calls, te xt messages, packet data connections, and fax an d data calls registered by the phone. Y ou can filter the log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards ba sed on the log information. T o view a list of sen t messa ges, g o to Messaging â Sent . Note: Connections to your r emote mailbox, multimedia messaging center , or browser pages are shown as data calls or packet data connections in the g eneral communications log. Recent calls log Go to Menu â Lo g â Recent calls The p hone re gister s the phone nu mbers of misse d, rec eiv ed, and di aled calls, and t he appr oxim ate duration and cost o f yo ur call s. The p hone re gister s missed and rece ived calls only if the system suppo rts these f unctions, and the phon e is switch ed on and within the syste mâÂÂs service area. Op tion s in the Missed , Recei ved, D ialed vi ews ar e: Call , Use num ber , Dele te , Clear list , A dd to Cont acts , He lp , and Exit . Icon s for m i sse d c alls for r ec eive d ca lls for diale d num bers
[ 25 ] Y our phone 3 Missed calls and received cal ls T o view a list of the last 20 ph one numbers from which somebody has tried to call you w ithou t success (system service), go to Log â Recent calls â Missed calls . When you see a note in standby mode about missed calls, press Show to access the list of mis sed calls. T o call ba ck, scroll to the number or name you wa nt and pre ss . T o view a list of the 20 numbers or names from which you hav e most recently accepted ca lls (system service), go to Log â Recent calls â Received calls . Dialed numbers Press in standby m ode to o pen the Dialed numbers v i ew . T o view the 20 phone numbers that you have most recently called or attempted to call, go to Lo g â Recent calls â Dialed n os. Era sing r e cent c all li sts ⢠T o clear all recen t call lists, select Opti on s â Clear rece nt calls in the Recent calls main view . ⢠T o clear one of the call registers, open the log you want to erase and se lec t Opti ons â Clear list . ⢠T o clear an ind ividual entry , open a log, scr oll to the entry , and press . Call duration Go to Menu â Lo g . Allows you to view the du ration of your in coming and outgoing cal ls. T o see the call duration timer w hile you have an active call, select Opti ons â Settings â Sho w call d uration â Ye s . Erasi n g c all durati on tim ers - Select Opt i ons â Clear timers . For this you need the loc k code. Se e âÂÂSe curi tyâ on pag e 40. To clear an individu al entr y , scroll to i t and pre ss .
[ 26 ] 3 Call costs (system service) Go to Log â Call cos ts . Call costs allows you to ch eck the cost of the last call or all calls. The call costs a re displayed separately for each SIM card. The actual invoice for calls and services f rom your ser vic e pro vider may vary , depen ding u pon system features, rounding-off for billing, taxes and so forth. CALL C OSTS LIMIT SET BY A SERVI CE PROV IDER Y our service provider can limit the cost of you r calls to a cer tain amount of charging units or units of currency . W hen the lim ited charging mode is active, calls can be made on ly as long as the preset credit limit (call cost limit) is not exceeded and you are in a system th at supports call cost lim it. The number of remainin g units is shown during a call and in standby m ode. When the ch arging units have ex pired, the note Call cost limit reached is displayed. Contact your service provider for info rmation on the limited charging mode and charging unit prices. Cost shown as charg ing units or currency Y ou can set the phone to show the remaining talk-time in charging units or units of cu rrency . For this, you may need th e PIN2 code . See âÂÂSecu rityâ on page 4 0. 1 Select Opti on s â Se ttings â Sho w cost s in . The options are Currency an d Units . 2 If you choose Currency , a note requesting you to w rite the un it price is sh own. K ey in the cost of your home system charging or credit unit and press OK . 3 Write a name for th e currency . U se a three-letter abbreviation, for exampl e, C AD. Note: When no more charging units or currency units are left, calls may only be p ossible to the emer gency number programed i nto your phone (such as 9 1 1 or other official em ergency numbers).
[ 27 ] Y our phone 3 SET A CAL L COST LIMI T FOR YOURSELF 1 Select Opti on s â Settings â Call cost limit â On . 2 The phone r equests you to enter th e limit in units. For th is you may need the PI N2 code. Depen ding on the Sho w co sts in setting, enter either the a moun t of charging units or curr e ncy . When the ch arging l imit you have set you rself is reached, t he counter st ops at its maximum value an d the note Reset all cal ls' cost coun ter is dis played. T o be able to ma ke calls, go to Opti ons â Settings â Call cost lim it â Off . For this you ne ed the PIN2 code. See âÂÂSecu rityâ on page 4 0. Erase call cost co unters - Se lect Opti ons â Clear counters . For this you need the PIN2 code. T o clear an individual entry , scroll to it and press . GPRS data counter Go to Log â GPRS counter . Allows you to chec k the amount of data sent and r eceived during packet data (GPRS) connections. For exam ple, you ma y be charged for your GPRS connections by the amount of data sent and received. View the gener al log Go to Menu â Lo g and pr ess then . In the general log, for each commu nication event, you can s ee the sender or recipient name, phone number , name of the service provider , or acc ess point. Note: Sub-events, such as a text message sent in m ore than one part and packet data con nections, are logged as one communication event. Filt er the log 1 Selec t Options â Fil ter . A l ist of filters ope ns. 2 Scroll to a filter and press Select . Erase the contents of the log T o er ase all th e log co nten ts, Re cent cal ls lo g, and Messaging delivery repor ts perman ently , select Opti on s â Clear log . Confirm by pr essing OK .
[ 28 ] 3 P a ck et da t a co un t er a n d c o nne ct i o n t i me r T o view how much dat a , meas ured in kiloby tes, has been transfer red and how long a certain GPRS con nection has last ed, scroll to an Incomi ng or Outgoing event with th e access point icon and select Opti on s â View details . Lo g set tings Select Opti on s â Settings . The list of settings opens. ⢠Log d uration - T he log events remain in the phone memory f or a set nu mber of days a fter which th ey are automatica lly erased to free me mor y . If you select No log , all the l og contents, Recent calls log, and Messaging delivery reports a re permanently deleted. â¢F o r Show call du ration , Show c ost s in , Call c ost lim it , see the section s âÂÂCall duration â and âÂÂCall costs (sy s tem service)â earl ier in this chapter . ⢠SIM FOLD ER Go to Menu â SI M Y our SIM card may provide addition al services that you can access in this folder . See also âÂÂCopy contacts between the SI M card and phone memoryâ on page 4 7, âÂÂConfirm SI M servicesâ on page 43, âÂÂFixed dialin gâ on on page 42, and â View m essages on a SIM card â on page 9 3. Op tion s in the SIM d irect ory ar e: Open , Call , New SIM contact , Edit , Delete , Mark /UnM ar k , Copy to Co ntacts , Own numbe rs, SIM detai ls , Help , an d Exit . Note: For av ailability , rates and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor , e.g. system operator , service provider or other v endor . In the SIM d irectory, you can see th e names and numbe rs stored on the SIM card, you can add or e dit them, and you can make calls. Icon s for incoming for o utgoi ng for miss ed communication event s
[ 29 ] Settings 4 4 Set tings ⢠CHANGE GENERAL S E TTINGS Go to Menu â To o l s â Setti ngs . 1 Scroll to a setting group and press to open it. 2 Scroll to a setting you want to change and press to ⢠switch between option s if there are only two ( On / Off ). ⢠open a list of option s or an editor . ⢠open a settings slider such as the Contras t setting. Press or to increase or decrease th e value. Note: Y ou may be able to r eceive some settings from your service provider in a text message. ⢠PHONE SETTINGS General ⢠Phone la nguage - Y ou can change the language for the di splay texts in your phone. This change will also aff e ct the form at used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. There are three languages in stalled in your ph one. If you select Autom atic , the phone selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you have changed the displa y text language, you must restart th e phone. Note: Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your phone and the change remains eff ectiv e until you cha nge the se set tings ag ai n.
[ 30 ] 4 ⢠Writin g langu age - Y ou can change the writing lan guage of your phone perm anently . Ch anging the langu age affect s ⢠the characters ava ilable when you press any key ( - ), ⢠the predictive text dictionary used, and ⢠the special characters that are available wh en you pre ss the and keys. Tip: Y ou can also make this change in some of the editors. Press and se lec t Writing lan guage: . Example: Y ou are using a phone where th e display texts are in English but you want to write all your messages in French. After you change th e language , the pr edicti ve text di ctio nary sea rch es f or w ords in French and the most common special characters or punctuation m ark s us e d in the French lan guage are available when you press the and keys. ⢠Predictiv e text - Sets the predicti ve tex t input On or Off for all editors in the phon e. Y ou can also change th is setting when you are in an editor . Press and select Predic tive text â Predict ive text on or Off . Note: The predictive text diction ary is n ot available for all languages. ⢠W elcome note or logo - Press to open the settin g. The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the ph one. Sele ct Default if you wan t to use t he defau lt image or animation. Select T ext to write a welcome no te (max. 5 0 letters). Select Image to select a photo or pictu re from Imag es . ⢠Or ig . ph on e se t ti ng s - Y ou can reset some o f the settings to t h eir original values. To do this , you need the lock code. Af ter resetting th e settings, the phone m ay take a longer time to po wer on. Note: All documents and files th at you have created are left as t hey are. Standby mode ⢠Back gro u nd i mag e - Y ou can se lect any im age to be use d as a bac kgr ound image in s tandby mode. Select Ye s to select an image from Im ages .
[ 3 1 ] Settings 4 ⢠Left s election key and Right selection key - Y ou ca n chang e th e short cu ts that appear over the left and right selection keys in stan db y m ode. In addition to t he applications, you ca n have the shortcut point to a function, for example, New message . Note: Y ou can not have a s hortcut to an applica tion that yo u have installed. Display ⢠Contrast - To change the contrast of the display to lighter or darker . ⢠Color palette - To change the color palette used on th e display . ⢠Screen saver timeout - Th e scr een saver is activated when the s creen saver time-o ut period is over . W hen the scr een saver is active, th e display is cleared and you can see the screen saver bar . T o deactivate the screen saver press any key . ⢠Screen saver - Se lect what is shown on th e screen saver bar: time and date or a tex t you have written yourself. The location and background color of th e screen saver bar changes in one minute intervals. Als o, the screen saver ch anges to indicate th e number of new messages or missed calls. ⢠CALL SET TINGS Note: T o change the settings for call forwardin g, go to Men u â To o l s â Call fo rwar din g . Send my caller ID This syst em service allows you to set your phone number to be displayed ( Ye s ) or hidden ( No ) from the person to whom you ar e calling. Or , the value may be set by you r servic e p rovide r whe n you make a subs cripti on ( Defau lt ).
[ 32 ] 4 Call waiting: (system service) The system will notify you of a new incoming call wh ile you h ave a call in progress. Select Ac ti v at e to reque st the system to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the system to deactivate call waiting, or Check s tatus , to check if the function is active or n ot. Automatic redial When this setting is activated, you r phone w ill make a maxim um of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. Press to stop automatic redialing. Summary after call Activate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the duration and cost of the last call. T o show costs, the Call co st limit needs to be activated f or your SI M car d. 1-touch dialing Selec t On and the numb ers assigned to t he 1-touch d ialing key s ( - ), can be dialed by pr essing and hold ing the key . Anykey answ er Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key , except , , and . Line in use (system service) This sett ing i s sh own onl y if the SIM car d suppor ts two subscr iber numbe rs, that is, two phone lines. Sel ect which ph one line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) yo u wan t to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lin es can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. Note: Y ou will no t be able to make calls if you select Line 2 an d hav e not subscribed to this system service. T o prevent line s election, s elect Line change â D isable if supported by your SIM card. T o change th is setting, you need the PIN2 code supplied by your service provider . Tip: T o switch between the phone lin es, press and hold in standby mode.
[ 33 ] Settings 4 V oice m es sage indi cators: , , or is shown if you have one or seve ral voice messages. ⢠CON NEC TIO N SETTI N GS General information about data c onnections and access points T o defin e settings for acce ss points, go to Settings â Conne ction se ttings â A ccess poin ts . A dat a connection is required to c onnect to an a ccess point. Y our phone supports three k i nds of data con nections: ⢠a GSM data call ( ), ⢠GSM high-speed data call ( ), or ⢠packet data (GPRS) connection ( ). There are three different kinds of access points th at you can define: MMS access poin t, browser access point, and Inter net access po int (IAP). Check w ith your service provider f or the kind of access point needed for th e se rvic e yo u wi sh to a cce ss . Y ou ne ed t o se t a cce ss p oi nt s et tin g s, if yo u want to , for examp le, ⢠send and receive multimedia messages, ⢠send and receive e-mail, ⢠brows e pages, ⢠download Java TM applications, ⢠use Image u pload, or ⢠use your phone as a modem . Glossary: Access point - The point where your phone connects to the Interne t by way of a data call or packet data connection. An access poi nt can be pr ovide d, for e xample, by a comme rcial In ternet service provider (ISP), or service provider .
[ 34 ] 4 GSM D ATA C ALL S A GSM data call enables data transm ission rates to a maximum of 14.4 kbps . For availability a nd subscription to data s ervices, contact your service pr ovider . Minimum settings needed to make a d at a cal l T o insert a s et of basic GSM da ta call settings, go to Settings â Connection setti n gs â A ccess point s and select Opti ons â New acces s point . Fill in the following: Data bear er : GSM dat a , Dial-up nu mber , Sessi on mode : Pe r m a n e n t , Data c all type : Analog , an d Maximum data speed : Auto matic . High s peed d ata call (Hi gh Speed Ci rcuit S witched Data , H SCSD) Glossa ry: High-speed data enables data tr ansmission rates to a maximum of 43.2 Kbps, which is three times fa ster than the standard data rate s of the G SM system . HS CSD i s comp arable to the spee d of many comp u ter m ode ms tha t commu nicate w ith toda y's fixed telepho n e system s. For avai lability and sub scripti on to high-sp eed data ser vices, please c ontact your service pr ovider . Note: Sending data in HSCSD mode may drain the phoneâÂÂs battery faster than n ormal voice or data ca lls, as the phone may send data more frequen tly to the s ystem. Tip: The Se ttings wizard program inc luded in the PC Suit e for Nokia 3650 or P C Suite for Nok ia 3600 can hel p you to configu re acce ss point and mailbo x sett ings. Y ou can al so copy exi sting setti ngs, f or example, fr om you r co mp uter to your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. P ACK ET DATA (GENERA L P ACKET RAD IO SERVICE, GPRS) Glossary: P acket data, or Ge nera l P acket Rad io Ser vice (G PRS) , uses packet data technology where information is sent in sh ort bursts of data over th e mobile system. The benefit of sendin g data in packets is that the system is occupied only w hen sending or rece ivin g da ta. B ecaus e GPRS uses the s yst em eff icien tly , it all ows for quick data co nnection set up and fast da ta transmission speeds.
[ 35 ] Settings 4 Minimum s ettings needed t o make a p acket data co nnection ⢠Y ou n e ed to s ubscribe to the GPRS service. For availability an d subscription to GPRS, contact your service provider . â¢G o t o Tools â Settin gs â Connection â A ccess points and select Option s â New acces s point â Edit . Fill in th e followin g: Data bea rer : GPRS and A ccess point name : enter the name given to you by your service provider . Pri cing f or p ack et data and a pp lic ation s Both the active GPR S connection and the applications used over GPRS require a fe e (for exam ple, using services, sending and r eceiving data, and text messages). For more detailed information on fees, contact your service provider . Create an access point Optio ns in th e Ac cess po ints list are: Edit , New ac cess poin t , Delete , Help , an d Exi t . Y ou may have preset access point settings in your Nokia 3600 series mobile phone. Or , you may receive access point settings in a smart messa ge f rom a service provider . If no access points are defin ed when you open A ccess points , you will be asked if you wa nt t o cr eat e on e. If access poin ts a re def ined, to cr eate a new access point, select Opti ons â New acces s poin t and select: ⢠Use default settings to use the default setting s. Make the needed changes and press Back to s ave the settings. ⢠Use existing s ettings to use existing setting info rm ation as th e basis for the new acce ss point se ttings. A list of existin g access points is o pened. Select one and pr ess OK . Access point settings are opened with some fields alr eady filled.
[ 36 ] 4 Edit an acces s poin t When you open Access points, the list of already available access points opens. Scroll to th e access point you want to edit, and press . Delet e an access point In the list of access poin ts, scroll to the access point you want to remove and select Opt ions â Delete . Access points Options wh en edi ting a ccess poi nt set tings are: Change , A dvanc ed settings , Help , and Exi t . Here you can see a short explanation for eve ry setting that may be neede d for different data connections and access points. Note: Enter the settings from the top because depe nding on what data connection you select ( Data bearer ) or w hether you n eed to ins ert a Gateway IP addr ess , only certain setting fields are available. Note: Follow the instructions given to you by your service p rovider very carefully . ⢠Connection na me - Give a descriptive name for th e connection. ⢠Data bea rer - The options are GS M da ta , High speed GSM , and GP RS . Depending on what data connection you select, only certain s e tting fiel ds are availabl e. Fill in all fields mark ed wi th Must be de fined , or marked with a r ed asterisk. Oth er fields ca n be lef t empty , unless you have been instructed oth erwise by your service provider . Tip: See also âÂÂSettings nee ded for m ultimedia messagingâ on page 7 8, âÂÂSettings needed for e- mailâ on page 8 1, and âÂÂPh one browser service se tti ngs â on page 120. Note: T o use a data connection, the system service provider must support this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. ⢠A ccess poin t name (for packet data only) - The access point name is needed to es tablish a connection to the GPR S system. Y ou obtain the access point name from your service pr ovider .
[ 37 ] Settings 4 ⢠Dial-up numb er (for GSM data and high speed data only) - The modem telephone number of the a ccess point. ⢠User na me - Write a user name if required by the service provider . The user name may be ne eded to make a data connection, and is usually provi ded by the serv ice p rovide r . T he us er na me is o ft en case-se nsitiv e. Tip: When you ar e writing, press to open the special cha racters table. Pr es s to en ter a sp ace . ⢠Prompt pass w ord - If you must key in a new password e very time you log on to a server , or if you do n ot want to save your password to the phone, choose Ye s . ⢠Pa s s w o r d - A pas swor d may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider . The password is of ten case- sensiti ve. W hen yo u are writin g th e passwor d, t he char acters you ent er are shown br iefly and then changed to asterisks (*). The easiest way to enter numbe rs is to press an d select Insert number and then continue entering letters. ⢠Auth entication - Normal / Secure . ⢠Gat eway IP address - The IP address used by required browser gateway . ⢠Hom epage - Depen ding on what you are setting up, write either: ⢠the ser vice addr ess, or ⢠the address of the m ultimedia messaging center . Glossa ry: ISDN connections are a way to establish a data call between your phone an d your access point. ISDN connections are digital from end to en d and as su ch offer quicke r set-up times a nd faster data rates than ana log conne ctions. In order to use an ISDN co n n ec t i on , both your service provid er and your Internet service provider mus t support it . ⢠Connection security - Choose whether T ransport Layer Security (TLS) is used for the conne ction. Follow th e instructions from you r service provider . ⢠Sess ion mode - Pe r m a n e n t / T emporar y .
[ 38 ] 4 ⢠Data c all type (for GSM data and high speed data only) - Analog , ISDN v .1 1 0 , or ISDN v .120 defines wheth er the phon e uses an analog or digital connection. This setting depends on both your GSM service pro vider and Inte rnet Ser vice P rovider (ISP), because so me GSM syst ems do not support certain types of ISDN connections. For details, contact your ISP . If ISDN connections are available, they esta bl ish connection s more quickly than analog methods. ⢠Maximum data speed (for GSM data and h igh speed data only) - The options are Autom atic / 9600 / 14400 / 19200 / 28800 / 38400 / 43200 , depending on what you have ch osen in Se ssion m ode an d Data c all type . This option allows you to li mit the maximum connection speed when high speed data is used. Higher data rates may cost more, depending on the s ystem service provider . Note: The spe eds above r epresent the ma ximum speed at which your connection will operate. Du ring the con nection, the ope rating speed may be less, dep ending on system conditions. Glossa ry: DNS - Domain Name Se rvice. An I nternet service th at translates domain names such as www .no kia.c om into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124 .195 . Optio ns â Ad vanced sett ings ⢠Phone IP a ddress - The IP addre ss of your phone. ⢠Primar y name s erver: - The IP address of the primary DNS ser ver . ⢠Second na me server: - The IP ad d re ss of the seconda ry DNS server . Note: If you need to enter the Phone IP ad dress , Primar y name ser ver , or Sec ond name ser ver contact your Internet servi ce provider to obt ain th es e add res ses . The following settings are show n if you have selected data call and high speed data as the connection type: ⢠Use call back - This option allows a server to call you back once you have made th e initial call, so you have a connection with out paying for the call. Contact your service pr ovider to subscribe to this service.
[ 39 ] Settings 4 Note: Charges may ap ply for cert ain typ es of receiv ed calls, such as r oaming and high speed data calls. Con tact your GSM service provider f or more infor mation. Note: The phone expects the c allback call to use the same data call settings that were used in the callback-requesting call. T he system must support this type of call in b ot h dir ections, to and from the phone. ⢠Callbac k type - The options are Use server no. / Use other no. Ask your service provider for the correct setting; it will de pend on the s e rvice providerâÂÂs configuration. ⢠Callbac k numb er - Ke y in your phoneâÂÂs data phone number which the dial back serve r uses. Usually , this number is the data ca ll phone number of you r phon e. ⢠Use PPP compressi on - When set to Ye s , this option speeds up th e data transfer , if supported by the remote PPP server . If you h ave pr oblems with establishing a connection, try s etting this to No . C ont act your service provider for guidance. Glossa ry: PPP (P oint-to-P oint Protocol) - a common networ king software protocol that enables any computer with a modem and a phone lin e to connect dir ectly to the Inte rnet. ⢠Use login script - The options are Ye s / No . ⢠Logi n script - Insert the logi n script. ⢠Modem initialization (Modem initialization string)- Controls y our phone using modem A T commands. If r e quired, enter char acters specified by your GSM system service pr ovider or In ternet se rvice provider . GPRS Go to Menu â Tools â Setti ngs â Connection â GPRS . The GPRS settings affect all access points using a pa cke t data con nection .
[ 40 ] 4 GPRS connection - If you select When available an d yo u ar e i n a sys t em t ha t supports pac ket d ata, th e pho ne regi sters to t he GPRS syst em and sendin g text messages will be done via GPRS. Also, starting an active packet data connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, is qu icker . If you se lec t When needed , the phone will u se a packet data c onne ction only if you star t an application or action th at needs it. The G PR S connection is closed after it is not used by any application. Note: If th ere is no G PRS co verage an d you have chosen Wh en a vail able , the phon e will pe riodi cally try to establ ish a packet data connec tion . A ccess poin t - The access point name is needed wh en you want to use your phone as a packet data modem to you r computer . Data call Go to Menu â Tools â Settin gs â Connect ion settings â Data c all . The Data call settings affect all access points using a data call and high speed data call. Online t ime - If there are no actions the data ca ll is dropped automatically after a time-out period. The options are User defined , in which cas e you enter a tim e, or Unlimi ted . ⢠DATE AND T IME Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Date and tim e . The date and time settings allow you to define the date and time used in your phone, as well as chan ge the date and time fo rm at and separators. Choose Clock type â Analog or Digital to change th e clock shown in standby mode. Choose Auto time update if you want th e mobile ph one system to update time, date, an d time zone information to your phone (sy stem service). Tip: For the Auto ti m e upd ate setting to take effect, the ph on e n eeds to be restarted. ⢠SECURITY Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Securityâ Phone and Sim
[ 4 1 ] Settings 4 Phone and SIM Explanations for the different security codes that may be needed: ⢠PIN code (4 to 8 dig it s) - Th e PIN (P ers onal I dentif ication Number ) code protects your SIM card against unauthorized use. The PIN code is usuall y suppli ed with th e SIM card. Af ter thre e conse cutive incorrect PIN code e ntries, the PI N code is blocked. If the PIN code is blocked, you need to u nblock the PIN co de before you can use th e SIM card again. See the in formation about the PUK code below . ⢠PIN 2 co de (4 to 8 digi ts) - Th e PIN2 c od e, supplied wi th s om e SIM cards, is r equired to access some fu nctions, such as call cos t counters. ⢠L ock co de ( 5 dig its) - The lock code can be used to lock the ph one and keypad to avoid unauthorized u se. Note: The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . T o avoid unauthorized use of your phone, change the lock code. K eep the new code secre t and in a safe place separ ate from your p hone. ⢠PUK an d PUK2 codes (8 dig its) - The PUK (P ersonal Unblocking Key) code is requir ed to change a blocked PIN code . The PUK2 code is required to change a blocked PIN2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM car d, contact the operator wh ose SIM card is in your phone for the codes. Y ou can ch ange the following codes: lock code, PIN code, a nd PIN2 code. These codes can only include th e number s from 0 to 9 . Note: Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers, such as 9 1 1, to prevent accidental di aling of th e emergen cy number . PIN code request - When the PIN code r equest is act ive, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Note tha t deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SI M cards. PIN code / PIN2 code / Lock co de - Open this setting if you want to change the code. Tip: T o lock the phone manually , press . A list of com mands opens. Select Lock ph one .
[ 42 ] 4 Autolo ck period - Y ou can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the phone is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. K ey in a number f or the time-out in minutes or select None to turn off the autolock period. Lock Code - T o unlock th e phone, key in the lock code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls may be possible to the emergency number programed into you r phone (e.g. 9 1 1 or other official emer gency number) . Lock if SIM ch anged - Select Ye s if you want the phone to ask for the lock code when an u nknown, new SIM card is inserted into your phone. T h e ph one mainta ins a list of SIM car ds that are reco gnized as the ownerâÂÂs cards . Fix ed diali ng - Y ou can restrict your outgoing calls to sel ected phone numbers, if support ed by your SIM card. Y ou need the PIN2 code for this function. When this f unction is active, you can only ca ll those phone numbers that are included in the fixed dialing list or which begin with the same digit( s) as a phone number on the list. T o vi ew t he li st o f F ixed di al ing nu mber s, go to Menu â SIM â Fixed dial ing . Op tion s in the Fixe d diali ng view are: Open , Call , New contac t , Edit , Delete , A dd to Cont acts , A dd from Contact s , Help and Exit . Note: When Fixed Dialing is turned on, calls m ay be possible to certa in emergenc y numbe rs in some syste ms (9 1 1 or othe r official emergenc y numbers). T o add new numbers to th e Fixed dialin g list, select Opt ions â New con ta c t or A dd from Contact s . Closed user group (system serv ice) - Y ou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. For mo re information , contact your service provider . Select: Default to activate the default group agreed on with the ser vice provi der , On if you want to u se another group (you need to k now the group index number) , or Off . Note: When calls are l imited to Closed User Groups, ca ll s may be possible to certain emergency n umbe rs in some systems (9 1 1 or other offici al emer gency numbers ).
[ 43 ] Settings 4 Confir m SIM serv ices - To set the phone to display confirmation messages when you ar e usi ng a S IM card service. Certif. management Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Se c uri t y â C ert . mana gem ent In the Certificate management main view , you can see a lis t of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. Press to see a list of user certificates, if a vailable. Options in the certificate management main view are: Certific ate details , Dele te , T rust se ttings , Mark /Unmar k , Help, and Exit . Glossary: Digital certifi cates are u sed to v erify th e origin of browser pages and installed software. However , they can only be tr usted if the or igin of the certificate is known to be au thentic. Digit al cert ificat es are needed if y ou: ⢠want to con nect to a n online bank, another s ite, or r emote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information, or ⢠want to minimize the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software wh en downloading and installing s oftware. Glo ssary : Authority cer tificates are used by some services , such as banking services, for checking signatures or server certificates or other authority certificates. Impo rtant : Although the u se of certificates ma kes the ri sks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller , they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increa se d secur ity . T he ex iste nce of a certi fi cate does n ot offe r any protecti on by itself; th e certific ate manage r must contain correct, au thentic, or trusted certifi c ates f o r increase d security to be available. Glossa ry: User certificates are issued to u sers by a Cer tifying Author ity .
[ 44 ] 4 Viewi ng c ert ifi cat e deta il s - che cki ng au thenti c ity Y ou can only be sure of the cor rect identity of a browser gateway or a server when the signature and the perio d of validity of a browser gateway or server certificate h ave been checked. Y ou will be notifi ed on the ph oneâÂÂs disp lay ⢠if the identity of the browser ser ve r or gateway is n ot authentic or ⢠if you do no t have t he correct security certificate in your phone. T o check cer tificate details, scroll to a cer tificate and select Opti on s â Certificate details . When you open certificate details, C ertificate management checks th e validity of the certificate and one of th e following notes m ay appear: ⢠Certific ate not trus ted - Y ou h ave not set any application to use the certificate. For more information, see the next section âÂÂChanging the trust settings of an authority certificateâ . ⢠Expir ed certificate - The period of validity has ended for the sele cted certificate. ⢠Certific ate not valid yet - The period of validity has n ot yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certific ate corrupted - The cert ificate cannot be us ed. Contact the certificate issuer . Impo rtant : Certificates have a r estricted lifetime. If Expir ed certifi cate or Certific ate not valid yet is shown even if th e certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. Chang e t he trus t set ting s of an auth or ity c erti fica te Scroll to an authority certifi cate a nd select Opti on s â T rust settings . Depending on the cer tificate, a list of th e applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: Services / Ye s - the cer tificate is able to certify sites. Appli cation m anager / Ye s - the cer tificate is abl e to certify the or igin of ne w soft ware . Internet / Ye s - the ce rtificate is able to certify e-mail and imaging servers.
[ 45 ] Settings 4 Impo rtant : Before changing these settings, you must make sure that you really trus t the o wner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner . ⢠CALL RESTRICTION (SYSTEM SERVICE) Call restriction allows you to restrict the making and receiving of calls with your phone. For th is function, get th e restriction password from your service provider . 1 Scroll to one of the restri ction options. 2 Selec t Options â Activate to request the system to set c all restriction on, Cancel to set th e selected call r estriction off, or Check stat us to check if the calls are restr i cted or not. ⢠Select Opti on s â Edit r estri ction p assw . to ch ange the restriction password. ⢠Select Opti on s â Cancel all rest rictions to ca ncel all active call r estrictions. Note: When calls ar e re str icted, calls may be possible to certain emergency numbers in s ome system s (9 1 1 or othe r official em ergency numbers). Call restricting affects all calls, including data calls. Y ou cannot have restriction of incoming calls and ca ll forwarding or f ixed dialing a ctive at the sa me time. â¢S Y S T E M Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â Sy st em System selection Choose Au tomat ic to set the phone to automatically search for and select one of the cellu lar systems available in your area, or Choose Manual , if you want to select the desi red system manually from a list of systems. If the connection to the manually selected system is lost, the phone will sound an error tone and ask you to select a system again. The selected system must have a roaming agreement with your home system, that is, th e operator wh ose SIM card is in you r phone.
[ 46 ] 4 Glossa ry: Roaming agre ement - An agree ment between two or more system service providers to enable the users of on e serv i ce provider to use the ser vices of oth er service providers. Cell info display Select On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular system based on M icro Cellular Net w ork (M CN ) tech nology and to activate cell info reception. ⢠ACCESSORY SETTINGS Menu â To o l s â Se ttin gs â A ccessory Scroll to an accessor y folder and open the settings: ⢠Select De fault prof ile to select th e profile you want to be activated each time when you connect a certain accessory to your phone. ⢠Select Auto mati c an sw er to set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after five seconds tim e. If the Ringing option is set to Beep once or Silen t , automatic answe r cannot be in use. Note: If you are using a loopset, you need to activate it separately . Open the Loopset f older and selec t Use loopset â Ye s . If you have activated a loopset, the headset will us e the same settings as the loopset. Indicators shown i n standby mode: - a heads et i s conne ct ed. - a loopset is connected.
[ 47 ] Contacts 5 5C o n t a c t s T o open Con tacts, press in standby m ode or go to Men u â Contacts . In Con tacts, you can store and m anage contact information, such as names, phone nu mber s, an d ad d re sses. Contacts use share d me mory . See â Shar ed memoryâ on page 18. Y ou can also add a personal ringing tone, voice tag, or a thumbnail ima ge to a contact ca rd. Y ou can create contact g roups, which allow you to sen d text messa ges or e-mail to m any recipients at the sam e time. ⢠CREATE CONTACT CARD S 1 Open Contacts and select Opti on s â New contact . An empty contact card opens. 2 Fill in the f ields you want and press Don e . The contact card is s aved and closed, and appears in the Contacts directory . ⢠COPY CONTACTS BETW EEN THE SIM CARD AND PHONE MEMORY ⢠T o copy names and numbe rs from a SIM card to your ph one, go to Menu â SIM â SIM di re ctor y . Select the name(s) you want to copy and select Opt ions â Copy t o Conta c ts . ⢠If you want to copy a phone, fa x, or pager number f rom Contacts to your SIM card, go to C ontact s, open a contact card , scroll to the number , a nd select Opt ions â Copy to SIM direct.
[ 48 ] 5 ⢠EDIT CON TACT C ARDS Optio ns in the C ontacts directory a re: Open , Call , Create message , New con ta c t , Edit , Delete , Duplic ate , A dd to grou p , Be lo n gs t o gr ou ps , Mark /Unmark , Send , Contacts info , Help , an d Exit . Optio ns when ed iting a contact card are: A dd thumbn ail / Remo ve thumbnail , A dd detai l , Delete deta il , Edit label , Help, an d Exit . 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact car d you want to edit and press to open it. 2 T o change the in formation on the card, select Opti ons â Edit . 3 T o save your chan ges and to retur n to the conta ct card view , press Done . Delete c ontact cards In the Con tacts directory , scr oll to the contact card you w ant to delete and select Opt ions â Delete . T o dele te many contact cards 1 Mark the cards to be del eted. Scrol l to a cont act you wa nt to dele te and select Options â Ma r k . A check mark is placed be side the contact card. 2 When you have marked a ll the contacts you want to delete, select Opti on s â Delete . Tip: Y ou can also mark many item s if you press and hold and simu lta neously press . See also â Actio ns com mon to all a pplic atio nsâ on pa ge 15. Add and remove contact card fields 1 Open a contact card and select Opti ons â Edit . 2 T o add an extr a field, sele ct Opti ons â A dd detail . T o dele te a field you do not need , select Opt ions â Delete detail . T o rename a con tact card field l abel, select Opti on s â Edit la bel .
[ 49 ] Contacts 5 Insert a picture in a contact card There are two different types of pictu res you can add to a con tact card. See âÂÂCame ra and Imagesâ on page 55 for mor e information on how to take and store pi ctures. ⢠T o attach a s mall thumbnail image to a contact c a rd, open a contact card, select Opt ions â Edit and then select Opt ions â A dd thumbn ail . The thumbnail image is also shown when the contac t is calling you. ⢠T o add an image to a contact card, open a contact ca rd, and press to open the im age view ( ). To attach an image, se lect Opti on s â A dd image . ⢠OPTIONS WHEN VIE WING A CONTACT CARD Contact information view ( ) shows all information inserted in the con tact card. Press to op en th e Imag e vi ew . Note: Only fields that have information are displayed in the c ontact informat i on view . Select Opti on s â Edit i f y o u w a n t t o s e e all fields and add more data to the contact. Optio ns when view ing a contact card (some ar e shown only when t he selection is on a phone number) are: Call , Create message , Edit , Delete , Default s , A dd voice tag / V oice tags , As si gn 1-to uch dial / Remo ve 1-t ouch d ial , Ri ng in g t o ne , Copy to SIM direct. , Sen d , Help, an d Exit . Assign default numbers and addresses If a contact has several phone numbers or e-mail addresses, to speed up calling a nd se n ding messages, y ou can define certain numbers an d addresses to be used as the d efault. Open a contact card and select Opti ons â Default s . A pop-u p window opens, listing th e different options.
[ 50 ] 5 Example: Scroll to Phone nu mber and press Assi gn . A list of phone numbers in the sele cted contact card is shown. Scroll to the one you wa nt to ha ve as the de fault and press . When you ret urn to the contact card view , you can see the default number underl ined. V oice dialing Y ou can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that ha s been added to a contact ca rd. Any spoken word(s) can be a voice tag. Before using voice dialing, note th at: ⢠V oi ce tags are not language depen dent. They ar e dependent on the sp eak e r's vo ice . ⢠V oi ce tags ar e sensitive to bac kgroun d noise. Record th e m a nd make calls in a quiet environment. ⢠V e ry s hort names are not accepted. Use long n ames and avoid s imilar name s for dif fe re nt num ber s. Example: Y ou can us e a personâ s name for a voice tag, for exampl e, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs cellâ . Note: Y ou must sa y the name exactly as you said it w hen you recorded it. This may be difficult in, for exampl e, a noisy environme nt or during an eme rgency , so you should not r ely solely upon voice dialing in a ll circumstances. ADD A VOI CE TAG TO A PH ONE NUMBER Glossary: V oice tags can be any spoken words, for example, a personâÂÂs fir st name. V oice tags allow you to make phone calls by simply saying the w ord aloud. 1 In the Contacts directory , scroll to the contact to which you want to add a voice tag and press to open the contact card. 2 Scroll to th e number to which you want to add the voice tag and se lec t Opti ons â A dd voice ta g . Note: Y ou can have only one voice tag per contact card. V oice tags can only be added to phone numbers stor ed in the phoneâÂÂs memory . See âÂÂCopy contacts between the SIM card an d phone memoryâ on pag e 47 .
[ 5 1 ] Contacts 5 3 The te xt Press Start, th en speak aft er tone is displa ye d. When recording, h old the phone at a short distance away from your mouth. After the starting tone, say clearly the word(s ) you want to record as a voice tag. â¢P r e s s Start to recor d a voice tag. T he phone sounds a starting tone and the note Spe a k n ow is displayed. ⢠Press Quit to retu rn to th e conta ct car d. Af ter the s tarting tone, say clearly the word(s) you want to record as a voice tag. 4 After recordin g, the phone plays the reco rded tag and the note Playin g voice t ag is disp lay ed. If you do not want to sa ve th e r ecor ding, press Quit . 5 When the voice tag has been successfully saved, the note V oic e ta g sav ed is display e d and a beep sounds. A sy m bol can be seen next to the number in the contact card. Note: Y our phone m ay have 3 0 phone n umbers to wh ich voice tags are attached. I f the mem ory becom es full, de let e some of the voice tags. Tip: T o view a list of voice tags you have define d, select Opt ions â Cont acts info â V oic e ta gs in the Contacts directory . MAKE A CAL L BY SAYIN G A VOICE TAG Note: Y ou must say th e voice t ag exactly as yo u said it whe n you recorded it. 1 In standby mode, press and hold . A short tone is played a nd the note Speak n o w is displa yed . 2 When you are making a call by sa ying a voice tag, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the phone a s hor t dista nc e away from your m out h a n d face and say the voice tag clearly . 3 The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number , and after 1 .5 seconds dials th e number of the recognized voice t ag. If t he phon e plays th e wron g voice tag or to re try vo ice diali ng, p ress Retry . Note: When an application u sing a data call or GPRS connectio n is sending or rece iving data, you cannot make a call by usin g voice d ialing. To make a call by using a voice tag, end all active data connection s.
[ 52 ] 5 REPL AY , ERASE, OR CHANG E A VOICE TAG T o replay , erase, or c h ange a voice tag, open a con tact car d and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (in dicated by ) and select Opti on s â V oice tag â th en ei the r ⢠Playba ck - to listen to the voice tag again, or ⢠Dele te - to erase the voice tag, or ⢠Change - to recor d a new voice tag instead of the old on e. Press Start to rec ord . Assign 1-touch di a ling keys 1-touch dialing is a quick way to c all f requently used nu mber s. Y o u can as si gn 1- touc h dia ling keys to eight phone numbers. Number 1 is reserved for th e voice mailbox . 1 Open the contact card for which you want a 1-touch dialing key and select Opti on s â A s sign 1- touch no . Th e 1-touch d ialing grid opens, showing you the numbers from 1 - 9 . 2 Scroll to a number and pres s Assig n . When you re turn to the contact information view , you c an see th e 1-touch dial icon ( * ) ne xt to the nu mber . T o call the contact by 1-touch dialing, go to standby mode and press the 1-touch dialing key and . If th e 1-tou ch dialin g function is set to On : Press and hold the cor responding 1-touch dia ling key until the call is started. Add a ringing tone for a contact card or group Y ou ca n set a ringing tone for each contact card and group. W hen that contact or group member calls you, the phone plays the chosen ringing tone (if the ca llerâÂÂs telephone number is sent w ith the call and you r phone recognizes it).
[ 53 ] Contacts 5 1 Press to open a contact card or go to the Groups list a nd select a contact group. 2 Select Opti on s â Ringing t one . A list of r inging tones opens. 3 Use the scroll key to select the r in ging tone you wish to u se for the contact or group and pr ess Select . T o remove the r inging tone, se lect Default tone from the list of ringing tone s. Note: For an individual contact, the ph one will always use the r inging tone that was assigned last. So, if you first change a group ringing tone and th en the r inging tone of a single con tact that belongs to that gro up, th e rin ging t one o f th e sing le con tact will be u sed when the contact calls you the next tim e. Tip: T o listen to a r inging tone, go to Recorder . Send contact information 1 In the Con tacts directory , scr oll to the card you want to send. 2 Select Opti on s â Send then select the m ethod, th e choices are: Via text message , Via e-m ail (ava ilable only if th e correct e-mail settings are in place), via Infrar ed , o r via Bluet ooth . The contact card you want to send has now become a âÂÂbus iness car dâ . Fo r furthe r infor matio n, see âÂÂMessagingâ chapter 9, on page 69 , âÂÂSend and r eceive data via infraredâ on page 140, and âÂÂSend data via Bluetoothâ on page 136. Y ou can add received bu siness cards to your Con tacts directory . See âÂÂR eceive sma rt message sâ on pag e 85 for furth er inform ation. Glos sary: When you send or receive contact information, the term âÂÂbusiness cardâ is used. A business card is a contact card in a format suitable to be sent in a te xt message, usually in âÂÂvCardâ format. ⢠MANAGE CONTACT GROUPS Optio ns in the G ro ups li st vi ew are: Open , New group , Delete , Rename , Ring ing tone , Contacts info , He lp , and Exit .
[ 54 ] 5 Y ou can create con tact groups, wh ich can, for example, be used as distribution lists for sending te xt messages and e-mail. See also âÂÂAdd a ringing tone for a contact card or grou pâ on page 52. Create contact groups 1 In the Con tacts directory , press to ope n the Groups list. 2 Select Opti on s â New group . 3 Writ e a name fo r the g roup or use th e de faul t nam e Gr ou p and pr ess OK . Add members to a group 1 In the Cont acts directory , scroll to the contact you want to add to a group a nd select Opti on s â A dd to gr oup: . A lis t of available groups opens. 2 Scroll to the gr oup to wh ich you want to add the contact an d press . ADD MULT IPLE MEMBERS A T A TIME 1 In the Grou ps list, open a gr oup and select Opti on s â Ad d m e mb e r s . 2 Scroll to a contact and press to mark it. Repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add and press OK to a dd them to the selected group. Remove members from a group 1 Go to the Groups list, scr oll to the group you want to m odify , and press . 2 Scroll to the con tact you want to r emove and select Opti ons â Remo ve fro m gr oup . 3 Press Ye s to remove the con tact from the group.
[ 55 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 6 Cam era and Ima ges Wit h the cam era you can tak e pictures of peop le or even ts while on the m ove. The pictur es ar e automaticall y saved i n the Image s ap plication , where you can re name them a nd organize them in folders. Y ou can also send photos to your friends in a multimedia messa ge, as an e-mail attachment, or via a Bluetooth or in frared connect ion. The ca mera produces JPEG pi ctures. Press Camera in standby mode or go to Menu â Camera . Op tions bef ore taking a picture are: Capture , Go to I mages , Settin gs , He lp , an d Exit . Glos sary: JPEG is a standar dized im age compression format. JPE G files can be viewe d with th e most common ima ge viewers , image editors, and In ternet b rowsers. Y ou can r ecognize these files by their *.jpeg extension. ⢠TAKE PICTURES Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . 1 Press Camera in standby mode. The Camera application opens and you can see the view to be ca ptured. Y ou can see the viewfinder and the croppin g lines, which show you the ima ge area to be captured. Y ou ca n als o see the im age coun ter , which shows you how many im ages, depending o n the selected imag e quality , fit in the me mory of your phone. 2 T o take a picture, pr ess .
[ 56 ] 6 Note: Do not move th e phone bef ore the Camera application starts to save the photo. The photos are saved autom atically in the Images application. The Camer a goes into ba tte ry saving mode within a mi nute if the re ha ve been no key pres se s. To co ntinu e t aki ng pictures, press . Afte r the im age has been s aved: ⢠If you do not w ant to save the ph oto in the I mages applicat i on se lec t Opti ons â Delete . ⢠T o return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . Op tion s after a p icture has bee n take n are: New imag e , Delete , Sen d , Rename im age , Go to Images , Settings , Hel p , and Exi t . Impo rtant : Obey all local laws gover ning the taking of pictures. Do not use this feature ille gally . Settings In the C amera applicati on setting s, you can adju st the image qual ity settin g and change th e defau lt image name. 1 Select Menu â Camera â Opt ions â Setting s . 2 Scroll to the settin g you want to change: ⢠Image qual ity - High , Normal , and Basic . T he better the im age quality , th e more mem ory the im age cons umes. S ee a lso âÂÂI mages and memory consumptionâ on page 5 8. ⢠Default image name - By defa ult, Camera names photos in the for mat â Image .jpgâ . Default im age name allows you to set a name for the pictures taken. Example: If you s et âÂÂBea châ as the defau lt image nam e, Camer a will na me all the pictures yo u take âÂÂBeach âÂÂ, âÂÂB each(0 1)âÂÂ, âÂÂBe ach(02 )â , and so on, until you change the setting. ⢠Memor y in u se - Select whether you w ant to store your images in the phone memo ry or the memor y card, if you use one.
[ 57 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 CAMERA MODE AFFECT S IMAGE SIZE AND OR IENTATION With the different Camera modes, you can affect the size and orientation of the picture to be ta ken. When you are ta king a picture, press or to change between the dif ferent modes. Choose: ⢠Stan dard when you want to take normal landscape pictures, ⢠P ortra it when you want to take a smaller icon -sized, ve rtical picture, which can be added to a contact card, or ⢠Nigh t whe n the lighting is dim and the Camera needs a lon ger exposure time for the picture to be of good quality . Note that, in dim conditions, any movement wh ile taking a picture may cause it to get blu rred. The image siz e and orientation is th e same for Stan dard and Night . Tip: T ry out the different Ca mera modes to see how they affect the picture taken. Stan d ard , P or tra it , an d Ni ght m o des ⢠When you are taking a picture in Standard or Ni ght mode, the viewfinder resolution is 1 60x120 pixels and 80x96 for P ortrait mode. ⢠The images taken in Standard or Night m ode are saved in 640 x480 pixel (VGA) f ormat and those ta ken in P ortrait mode a re saved in 80x96 pix el form at.
[ 58 ] 6 ⢠When you are viewing images, they are scaled to fit the display , which has 176x 208 pi xels. T his me ans that S tandard and Ni ght mod e pict ures will appear more detailed when v ie wed on a higher resolution screen, for example, a com puter or w hen z oomed in Im ages. Glos sary: Resolution - A measure for the sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolu tion refers to the number of dots (pixels) in an image or a display . The more pixels ther e are, the m ore de tailed the picture is. R esolu tion i s usual ly me asured i n pix els, for ex ample , 640x480=300 kilopixels (kpix)=0.3 megapixels (Mpix). IMAGE S AND MEMOR Y CONSUM PTION Y our phone has 3.4 MB (megabytes) of free memory for im ages, contact information, calendar , m essages, an d so on. See âÂÂShar ed memoryâ on page 18. P ortrait images (always taken in High quality) ar e so small that they take u p very little memory . Images taken using the High qu ality setting and those taken in Night mode take up the most memory . If 1 MB of memory is used for images only , it would fi t approximate ly 22 Normal quality images taken in Standard mode. I n the table below , you can see ap proximately how ma ny images would f it in 1 Mb of memory . Tip: By using a memory card with your phone you can increas e the number of i mages you can s tore. Image quality Ima ge ty pe Basic No rma l High St and ar d 55 22 15 Night 50 25 18 Port rait - - > 300
[ 59 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 ⢠STORE P ICTUR ES I N IM AGES Go to Menu â Images . Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this func tion. Do not switch the phone on when wir eless phone use is prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Images allows you to view , organiz e, delete, and send photos and pictures stored in your phone. In Imag es you ca n organize images: ⢠take n w ith the camer a, ⢠sent to your Inbox in a multimedia or a picture message, as an e-mail attachment, via an infrared or Bluetooth connection. After rece iving the ima ge in Inbo x, you n eed to save it in Imag es. In the Im ages main view , you can see a list o f photos and folde rs. The list shows: ⢠the dat e and time a photo or an image w as taken or sa ved, ⢠a small thumbnail picture, a preview of the image, and ⢠the number o f images inside a f older , and ⢠a t ab showing w heth er the phot os or fo lders are lo cated in the phoneâÂÂs memo ry or the memo ry ca rd, if you use one. Op tion s in Imag es are: Open , Sen d , Image upl oader , Dele te , Mo ve to folder , New fold er , Mark /Unmark , Rename , Receive v ia infrared (on ly from a digital camera that supports the IrT ran-P protocol, otherwise u se the Infrared application, See page 140), View details , A dd to F avorites , Update thumbnails , Help , and Exi t .
[ 60 ] 6 View images Note: When y ou open Ima ges and y ou use a me mory c ard, the s tarti ng tab is de term ined by which memory is se le cted as the Memory in use . 1 Press or to move fr om one memor y tab to another . 2 T o browse th e images, press and . 3 Press , to open a n image. When the image is ope n, you can see the name of the image and the number of images in the folder on the top of the displa y . When you are viewing an image, pressing o r takes you to the next or previous picture in the cu rrent folder . Y o u can view a nimated G IF files in the sam e way as other ima ges. Anim atio ns are played on ly once. When an animation stops, you will see a fixed image. T o view the animation again, you must cl ose it and then r eopen it. Optio ns when vi ewi ng an ima ge are : Send , Rotate , Zoom in , Zoom out , Fu ll screen , Delete , Rename , View detai ls , A dd to F avorites , Help , an d Exit . ZOOM I N OR ZOO M OU T 1 Select Opti on s â Zoom i n or Zoom out . Y ou can see the z ooming ratio at the top of the displa y . See also the section âÂÂK e yboard shortcutsâ later in this chapter . 2 Pr es s Back to ret urn to t he initia l view . Note: The zoom ratio is not stored permanently . Y ou can not zoom in on G I F an imations while they are playing. Full sc reen When you select Opt ions â Full scr een , the pa nes around th e picture are removed so that you can see more of the image. Press to go back to the initial view.
[ 6 1 ] Camer a and Im ages 6 Move the focal poi nt When you are zooming or view ing an image in full screen m ode, use the scroll key to m ove the focal poin t to the le ft, right, up, or down , so that you can take a closer look at one part of the picture, for examp le, its upper right corner. Ro ta te Select Opti on s â Rotate â Le ft or to rotate an image 9 0 degrees counterclockwise or Right to rotate the image clockwise. The rotation status is not stored permanently . KE Y B O A R D S H O R T C U T S ⢠Rotate: - counterclockwise, - clockwise. ⢠- zoom i n, - zoo m out, p ress and hold to return to the nor mal v ie w . ⢠- chan ge between f ull screen and nor mal view . IMAGE DETA ILS VIEW T o view the detailed information about an image, scroll to the image and se lec t Opti ons â View detai ls . A list of i mage information appears: Format - JPEG , GIF , PNG , TIF F , MBM , BMP , WBMP , OTA , WM F , Unsupported , or Unk no wn . Date and Ti me - when the image was created or saved, n x n - th e size of the im age in pixels, see the glossary explanation, on page 58. Resolutn . - t he si ze o f the image in pi xe ls. Se e th e glossar y ex plana tion, on page 5 8. Size - in bytes or kilobytes (kB), Color - T rue color , 65536 colors , 4096 colors , 256 color s , 16 colors , Grays cale , or Black/w hite . Arrange images and folders ⢠T o remove an image or folder , scroll to it an d select Opti ons â Delete .
[ 62 ] 6 ⢠T o rename an image or a folder , scr ol l to the image or folder you want to rename and select Opti ons â Rename . Wr ite the n ew name and press . See â Actions comm on to all applicationsâ on page 15 for further inf ormation on how to cr eate folders and mark and m ove items to folders . Send images Y ou can send photos or images via different messaging services. 1 Scroll to the im age you want to send and select Opti ons â Send . 2 Then sele ct the method, the choices are Via m ultimedi a , Via e-mail , Via infra red , an d Via Blu etooth . ⢠If you selec t to send th e image in an e-mail or a mul timedi a mes sage, an editor opens. Press to select the r ecipient(s) from th e Contacts directory or write the ph one number or e-mail address of the r e cipient in th e To : fie ld. Add text or sound and select Opti on s â Send . For more inf ormation , see âÂÂCre ate and send new messagesâ on page 76. ⢠If you want to send the image via infrared or Bluetooth, see âÂÂSen d data via Bluetoothâ on page 136, and âÂÂSend and receive data via infraredâ on page 140 for more information. Picture messages folder Op tion s in t he Pictu re me ss ages fo lder are: Open , Sen d , Delete , Mar k/ Unmark , Rename , View deta ils , Help , an d Exit . In the Picture messages folder , you can find gr aphics sent to you in picture messages. If you want to sav e a gr aphic y ou have r ecei ved in a pictu re message, go t o Messag ing â Inbox , open the me ssage, a nd select Opti ons â Save pic ture . VIEW PICT URES 1 Scrol l to the pict ure you want to vie w and press . The pic ture open s. Press to view the next pictur e in the f older . 2 Press Back to return to the Pictures main view .
[ 63 ] Video recorder 7 7 Video recorder Go to Menu â Video recorder . Note: Obey all local laws governing the taking of videos. Do not u se this feature illegally . Y our phone must be s witched on to use the Video r ec o rd e r . D o n o t sw itch th e phone on when wi rele ss phone use is prohib ite d or when i t ma y c a us e i n t er fe re n c e o r d a n ge r . Wit h the Video rec order you can recor d video clips, an d play video clips st or ed on your phone or on a m emory card. Also, the Video recorder is in tegrated with the m essaging features allowing you to easily sen d created clips. Video recorder uses sh ared memor y . See â Shared memor yâ on page 18. ⢠RECORD A VIDEO CLIP Glos sary: 3GPP file format (.3gp) is the standard video file format for Multimedia M essaging. Y ou can record video clips up to 95 kB in size , or approximately 1 5 seconds in duration. Recorded vide o clips are in the .3gp for mat. 1 T o begin recording open the Video rec order a nd sel ect Optio ns â Record and you can see th e view to record. 2 T o start recording press . The progr ess bar on th e bottom of th e scre en shows you how m u ch r ec or di ng time rem ains. T o p aus e recording at any time press . T o immediately pla y the video clip you just recorded, press . The video clip is saved to eith er the phoneâÂÂs m emory or the m emory card, depending on the s e tting of your Memor y in us e . See âÂÂSet up your Video recorderâ on page 64. Op tion s in vide o cl ip vie w of Vide o reco rder are : Play , Record , Send , Dele te , Rename , Se ttings , Abo ut pr od uc t , Help , and Exit .
[ 64 ] 7 ⢠W ATC H A V ID EO CL IP T o watch a video clip from the Video recorder video clip li st: 1 Open the Vide o recorder . 2 Scroll to a video clip and select Optio ns â Play . Once a video clip is playing, you have similar options available to you as when playing a vide o clip in â RealOne Playerâ¢â . The ex ception is volume control, as Video recorder does not record sou nd. See âÂÂVideo recorder â on page 63. Send video clips Y ou can send video clips by using th e Send option from you r video clip list. 1 Scroll to the video clip you wan t to send and select Opt ions â Sen d . 2 Select one of th e four ways you have of sending your video clip, Via m ultimedia , Via e-m ail , Via Blu etooth , or Via in frared . Set up your Video recorder Y ou can define whether you store your video clips in the phoneâÂÂs memory or on the memory card, if you have one , and how to name your video clips. Select Opti on s â Se ttings . ⢠Memor y in us e - Ch oose between Phone me mory an d Mem ory card . ⢠Default video name - Define the default n ame of your video clips. Example : If you set âÂÂH olid ayâ as the d efau lt vide o cli p nam e, Vid eo recor der will name all the video clips you take âÂÂHolidayâÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(0 1)âÂÂ, âÂÂHoliday(02) â , and so on, until you change the setting again.
[ 65 ] RealOne Playe r⢠8 8 RealOne Playe r⢠Go to Menu â RealOne Player . With the RealOne Player you can play media files st o red in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or on a memory card, or play music and video files and stre am liv e conten t from the inte rnet. Optio ns in list view are: Play , Open , Rename , Dele te , New folder , Mo ve to folder , Ma rk/Un mark , Send , A dd to F avorites , Settin gs , Abou t product Hel p , and Exi t . Glo ssary: Media files are video, m usic or audio cli ps which you c an play on a med ia player like the RealO ne Player . Files with exten sions .3gp, .mp4, . a m r , . r m , . ra m, .r a a n d . rv . are suppor ted by the RealOne Player . RealOn e P layer u ses s hare d memor y . See âÂÂSha red m emoryâ on page 18. ⢠PLAY MEDIA FILES Y ou can pla y any music or video file from the list shown when you start the RealOne Player , or directly f rom the internet. T o play a media file stor ed in you r phoneâÂÂs memory or memory card, open RealOne Play er , scroll to th e file and select Opti ons â Pla y . Glo ssary: Str eaming is play ing sound or vide o in rea l t ime as it is do wn load ed from the in ternet, as opposed to storing it in a local f ile first.
[ 66 ] 8 T o play a media f ile directly , or stream live content f rom the in ternet: 1 Select Opti on s â Op en â URL addr ess . 2 Enter the URL of th e site you want to play or stream content from. Befor e your medi a file or str eam begin s playing, your phone will connect to th e site and load the fil e. Note: Y ou cannot connect to a s i te unless you have configured an Access P oint, see Default Access P oint settin g on pag e 67. Glo ssary: Buffering is the tem porary storage of a p art of your streaming content into the phoneâÂÂs m emory before it is played. Media guide From you r RealO ne Pl ayer yo u can open a bro wser page con taining a m edia guide with links to streaming m edia sites and files. T o view the media guide , open RealOn e Player and select Opti ons â Open â Guide . V olume control ⢠T o increase the volume press , or to decrease the volume press . ⢠T o mute the s ound pr ess and hold u ntil th e indic ator is di splay ed. ⢠To turn on th e sound p ress and h old unt il you se e the indi cator . ⢠SEND MEDIA FILES Y ou can send m edia files by using the Sen d option from you r video clip options list. 1 Scroll to the f ile yo u want to send and select Optio ns â Send . 2 Select one of the th ree ways you have of sending your file, Via infra red , Via Blu etooth or Via m ultimedi a .
[ 67 ] RealOne Playe r⢠8 ⢠CHANGE THE SETTINGS Menu â RealO ne Pl ayer â Op tio ns â Setting s To c ha n g e t h e Vide o settings, sele ct Video to open the following list of settings: ⢠Video qu ality - Choose Sh ar p im ag e s to have better picture quality , but slower frame rate, or High fram erate for fast er frame rate, but lower picture quality . ⢠Au tomatic sc aling - Cho o se On to have automatic resizing of the video image. To c ha n g e t h e Playback se ttings, se lect Playback to open the following setting: ⢠Repeat - Ch oose On to have th e playing video o r audio file restart automatically once it has finished. To c ha ng e th e Network settings, select Network to open the followi ng list of se ttings: ⢠Default Acc ess P oi nt - As defin ed in Connectio n sett ings , see â Access pointsâ on pa ge 3 6. ⢠Bandwidth - Ch oose Au tomat ic to have th e best delivery ra te available. ⢠Maximu m bandwi dth - Choose th e maximum b andwidth for streaming content. ⢠Connection tim e-out - Open t h e slider view to change the waiting time for the initial server connection on a streaming session. ⢠Server tim e- out - Open the slider vie w to change the tim e allowed for no response f rom the serv er . ⢠Lo west P ort or Highest P ort - Cho ose the port wh ich is available f or streaming. If not sure of the number , ask your service provider . To c ha n g e t h e Proxy settings, se lect Proxy to open the f ollowing l ist of settings: ⢠Use Pr oxy / Host address / Po r t - Choose wh e ther a pr oxy is used.
[ 68 ] 8 Tip: When you select one of the settings a tab view is opened. Press or t o move between the different settin g tabs. The following icons indicate which setting you are in : for Vide o for Playback for Network , an d for Proxy .
[ 69 ] Messaging 9 9 Messaging Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use the f unctions in the Messaging folde r . Do not switc h the phone on whe n wirele ss phone use is prohibited or wh en it may cause interference or danger . Go to Menu â Mes sa g in g Options in th e Messaging main view: Create message , Connect (show n if you have defined settings for the mailbox), or Disc onnec t (s h o wn i f th er e is an active connection to mailbox), SIM me ssages , Cell broa dcast , Service com m an ds , Se ttings , Hel p , and Exit . In Messaging you can cr eate, send, receive, vie w , edit, and organize: ⢠text mess ages, ⢠multimedia messages, ⢠e-mail m essages, and ⢠smart messages, special text messages containing data. In addition to these, you can receive messages an d data via an infrared or Bluetooth connection, receive service messa ge s, ce ll broadcas t messages as well as send service com mands. T ext and multim edia m essages us e shar ed mem ory . See â Share d memo ryâ on page 1 8. When you open Messaging, you c an see the New message function an d a list of default f olders: Inbox - contain s received messages exce pt e-mail and cell br oadcast messa ges. E-m ail m essages a re st ored in the Mailbox . Y ou can read cell broadcas t messages by selecting Opti ons â Cell bro adcast . My fold ers - for organizing your messages into folders . Tip: Organize your messages by adding new folders un der My folders. Tip: When yo u have ope ned one of the def ault fo lders , for ex ample , Sent , you can easily move be tween th e fold ers: by pr essing to open the next fold er ( Outbox ), or by pressing to open the pr eviou s fold er ( Drafts ).
[ 7 0 ] 9 Mailb ox - Whe n you o pen this fo lder , you ca n eit her c onnec t to your remote m ailbox to r etrieve yo ur new e-mail messages or view you r previously retrieved e-mail messa ges of fline. See page 88 fo r further i nformatio n o n online and of fline modes. Af ter you have d efin ed set tings for a new m ail box, the name given to that m ailbox will replace Mailb ox in the main view . See âÂÂSettings fo r e-mailâ on page 97 Dra fts - stores draft messages that have not bee n sent. O ut box - is a temporary st orage place for m e ssa ges waiting to be sent. Sent - stores the last 15 messages that have been sent. T o change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂSettings for the Sent folderâ on page 1 00. Rep ort s - you can r equest the system to send you a deli very report of the text me ssages , smart me ssages , and multimedi a me ssages you have sent. T o turn on delivery report reception, select Opti ons â Settings â text messa ge or Multim edia me ssage , scroll to Receive r eport , and select Ye s . Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail addr e ss might not be possible. Note: Before you can create a multimedia m essage, write an e -mail, or connect to your remote mailbox, you must have the correct connection s ettings in place. See âÂÂSettings needed for e-mailâ on page 8 1 and âÂÂS ettings needed for mu ltimedia m essagingâ on page 78. ⢠MESSAGING - GEN ERAL INFORMATION The me ssage s tatus i s always either draft, s ent, or r eceived. M essages can be saved to the Drafts folder befo re they are sent. Messages are temporar ily placed in Outbox to wait for sending. After a message has been sent, you can find a copy of the mes sage in th e Sent folder . Received and sent messages are in read-only st ate until you select Reply or Forw ar d , which copi es the message to an editor . Note that you cannot forward e -mail mess ages sent by you. Note: Messages or data that have been sent via an infrared or Bluetooth connection are n ot saved in the Draft or Sent f olders.
[ 7 1 ] Messaging 9 Open a rec eived message When yo u receive a message, and the note 1 new message is shown in standby mode. Press Show to open the message. If you have m ore than one n e w messa ge, press Show to open the In box to see the m essage headings. T o open a me ssage in Inbox, scroll to it and press . Add a recipient to a m e ssage When you crea te a message , there a re sever al ways to add a recipi ent: 1 Add recipients f rom the Contacts directory . T o open the Contacts directory , pr ess or in the To: or Cc: fields, or select Opt ions â A dd recipient . Scroll to a con tact and press to mark it. Y ou can mark several recipients at a time. Press OK to return to the message. The recipients are listed in the To : field and automatically separated with a semicolon ( ; ). 2 Write the phone num be r or e- ma il address of the r ecipie nt in th e To : field, or 3 Copy the recipie nt information f rom another application and then paste it in the To: fie ld. See âÂÂCopy te xtâ on page 75 . Press to th e left of the cur sor if you wan t to delete a r ecipient. Note: If you wr ite many ph one number s or e-mail addr esses in the To : fie ld, you must remember to add a semicolon ( ; ) be tween each item to separate them from each other . When you retrieve recipients from the Contacts director y , th e semicolon is added au tomatically . Exa mpl e : 2 14 12 3 45 6 ; 972 45 6 876 Sending options T o change how a message is sent, select Opti ons â Send ing options when you are editi ng a me ssage. W hen yo u save the message , its sendin g sett ings are als o sa v ed.
[ 72 ] 9 ⢠WRITE TEXT Y ou can key in text in two different ways, using the method traditionally used in mobile ph ones or another m ethod called predictive text input. Icon s: and indicate the selected cas e. means that the first letter in the message, or the first letter of the next word, is written in upper case, and all other letters are written in lower case. indicates number m ode. Use traditional text input The indicator is shown on the top r ight of th e display when you are wr iting text usi ng traditional text input. ⢠Press a number ke y ( - ) , repeatedly until th e de sired ch aracter appea rs. Note that there are mor e characters available f or a numbe r key than are printed on the key . ⢠T o insert a number , press an d hold the number k ey . T o switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is locat e d on the sam e key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period), and then key in th e letter . ⢠If you make a m istake, press to remove a character . Press and hold to clear more than one character . ⢠The most common punctuation marks are ava ilable under . Press repeatedly to reach the de sired punctuation m ark. Press t o open a list of special ch aracters. Use the scroll key to m ove through the list and press OK to select a ch aracter . ⢠T o insert a space, press . T o move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠T o switch between u pper and lower case, pr ess . Tip: T o turn predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly when writing text.
[ 73 ] Messaging 9 Use predictive te xt input T o activate predictive tex t input, press and se lect Predictive tex t on . This will activate pr ed ic ti ve text input f or all editors in the phone. The indicator is shown at the top of the display . 1 Write the de sired wor d by pressing the keys - . Press each key only on ce for one letter . The wor d changes after every key press. Note: Do not pay attentio n to what appears on the display . The word match is evolvin g. W ait u ntil you have keyed in the whole wor d before you check the result. For example, to write â Nokiaâ when English dictionary is selected, pr ess for N, for o , fo r k, for i, and for a . As you can see, the word suggestion changes after each key press. 2 When you have finished th e word, check that it is correct. ⢠If th e word is cor rect, you can confirm it by pressin g or by pressin g to insert a s pace. The underlining disappears and you can begin to write a new word. ⢠If the w ord is not correct, you have the f ollowing options: ⢠Press repeatedly to vie w the matching words the dictionary has found one by on e. ⢠Press and sele ct Predic tive text â Matches to v iew a list of ma tch in g words. Sc roll to the word yo u want to use and press to select it. â¢I f t h e ? character is shown after th e word, the word you intended to write is not in the diction ary . T o add a word to the dictionary , pr ess Spell , key in th e word (max. 32 l etters) u sing tr adition al tex t input, and press Save . The word is added to the dictionary . When the dictionary becomes full, a n ew word replaces the oldest added word.
[ 74 ] 9 â¢T o r e m o v e t h e ? and cle ar characters one by one from the word, press . TIPS ON USI NG PREDICTI VE TEXT INPU T ⢠T o erase a character , press . Pr ess and hold to cle ar more than one character . ⢠T o change between the different character cases Ab c , abc , and ABC , press . Note that if you press quickly twice the pr edictive text input is turned of f. ⢠T o insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desire d number key . Or press and select I n s e r t n u m b er , key in the n umbers you want, and press OK . T o switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠The most common punctuation marks are ava ilable under . Press and then repeatedly to r each the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. U se the scroll key to s croll through the list and press OK to select a character . Or press and select I n s e r t s y mb ol . Tip: The predictive text input will tr y to gu e ss which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The orde r and av ailability of the punctuation m arks depend on the la nguage of the dictionar y . ⢠Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary h as found one by one. Y ou ca n also press , select P re d i c t i v e te x t and select: ⢠M a t c h e s - to view a list of words th at correspond to your key presses. Scroll to the de sired word and press the . ⢠Insert word - to add a word (max. 32 letters) to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. ⢠Edit word - to open a vie w where you can ed it the word, available only if the word is active ( unde rlined).
[ 75 ] Messaging 9 Write compound words Write the fir st half of a compound word and confirm it by pr essing . Write the last part of the compound wor d and complete the compo und word by pressing to add a space. T u rn o ff pred ictive t ex t Press and sele ct Predic tive text â Off to tu rn predictive text input off for all editor s in the phone. Editing option s When you p ress , the f ollowing options appear (depending on th e editing mode and situation you are in): ⢠Predictiv e text (predictive text in put), Alp ha m ode (traditional text input), Number mode . ⢠Cut , Copy - available on ly if text h as been selected first. ⢠Pa s t e - available only when tex t has bee n either cut or copied to the clipboard. ⢠Insert number , Insert sy mbol , and ⢠Writin g langu age - changes the in put language for all edi tors in the phone. See âÂÂPhone settingsâ on page 29. COPY TE XT If you wan t to copy text to the clipboard, the following are the easiest methods: 1 T o select letters a nd words, press and hold . A t the same time, press or . As the selection m oves, text is h ighlighted. T o select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or . 2 T o end th e selection, stop pressing the scroll key . 3 T o copy the te xt to cli pboard, while still holding , press Copy . Or , release and then press it once to o pen a list of editing comma nds, f or exa mpl e, Copy or Cut . If you want to rem ove the s elected text f rom the docum ent, pres s .
[ 76 ] 9 4 T o in sert the te xt in to a d ocum ent, pre ss a nd h old an d pre ss P aste . Or , press once and select Pa s t e . ⢠CREATE AND SEND NEW MESSAGES Note: When sending m essa ges, your phone may displa y th e words Mes sage Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message center programmed in to your phone. This is not an indic ation that th e mess age has been received at t he intended destination. For more details about the messaging service, check with you r service provider . Y ou ca n start to cr eate a message in two ways: ⢠By selecting New message â Create: â text message , Multi m edia m essage , or E-mail in th e Messaging main view , or ⢠Start to create a mes sage from an application that has the option Sen d . In this case the file that w as selected (such a s an image or text) is a dded to the mess age. Write and send text me ssages Op tion s in the pictu re mess age e dit or are : Send , Remo ve picture , A dd recipient , Del et e , Insert , Mess age details , Hel p , and Exit . 1 Select New message . A list of m essage options opens. 2 Select Create: â text message . The editor opens with the cursor in the To : fiel d. Press to sele ct re cipien t(s) fro m the C ontacts di recto ry or write the phone n umber of the recipien t. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) to separate each recipient. Press to move to the m essage field. 3 Write th e mess age. Note: Y our pho ne suppo rts sendin g of m ultipl e text m essages at t he same time, ther efor e, the nor mal 160 cha ract ers l imit for one t ext mess age can b e exceed ed. If y our text exc eeds 16 0 chara cters, it will be sent in two or mo re messa ges and message sending may cost you more.
[ 77 ] Messaging 9 In the navigatio n bar , you can see the mes sage length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 1 0 (2) means that you can still add 1 0 characters for the text to be sen t as two messages. 4 To send t he me ssa ge, se l ect Opti ons â Sen d or pr e ss . SEND SMAR T MESSAGES Optio ns in t he te xt mes sage ed itor a re: Send , A dd recip ient , Ins ert , Delete , Mess age details , Se n d ing options , Help , an d Exit . Smart mes sages are s pecial text messag es that can conta in data. Y ou can se nd sm a rt mes s age s su c h as: ⢠picture messages , ⢠business car ds containi ng contact in formation in generic (v Card) form at, ⢠Calendar notes (vCalendar format). For more information, see â Send contact informationâ on page 53, âÂÂSen d calendar entriesâ on page 1 09, and â Send bookmarksâ on page 1 22. Tip: Y ou can also receive ringing tones, oper ator logos, or settings fr om service providers. CREAT E AND SEND PICTURE MESSAGE S Op tion s in the pictu re mess age e dit or are : Send, A dd recipien t, Insert, Remo ve p icture, Delete, Message details, Help, and Exit. Y our phone allows you to sen d and receive pi cture messages. Picture messages are text messages th at contain small black- and-white graphics. There are sever al default pictu res available in the Picture msgs. folder in Images . Note: This function can be used on ly if it is supported by you r service provider . Only p hones that offer picture m essage features can receive and display picture messa ges.
[ 78 ] 9 T o send a picture message: 1 There are two possibilities, eith er: â¢G o t o Images â Pic t ur e ms g s. and select a picture to be sent. Select Opti ons â Send , or ⢠Select Messag ing â New mess age â Create: â T ext mes sage and select Insert â Pictu re . 2 Enter recipien t information and add text. 3 Select Opti on s â Send or press . Note: Each picture message is made u p of severa l text messages. Therefore, sending one picture message may cost more than sending one te xt message. Multimedia messages A multimedia m essage can contain text, images and either video or sound clips. Note: This function can be used on ly if it is supported by you r service provider . Only d evices that offer multimedia message or e-m ail features can receive and display multimedia messages. Devices that do not have th ese features may re ceive details of a link to a web page. SETTI NGS NEEDED FOR MULTI MEDIA MESSAGING Options in t he multimedia message editor are: Send , A dd recipient , Insert , Pr ev iew m ess age , Objects , Remo ve , Delete , Mess age details , Se nd in g o pt io ns , Hel p , and Exi t . Y o u may rec eive the settings as a smart message from your service provi der . See âÂÂReceive smart mess agesâ on page 85. For availability of and subscription to data services, ple ase contact your service provider .
[ 79 ] Messaging 9 1 Go to Settings â Connect ion settin gs â Ac ce s s poin ts and defi ne the settings for a multimedia messaging a ccess point: Connection na me - Give a descriptive name for the connection. Sess ion mode - Select a data con nection type: GSM dat a , High speed GSM , or GPRS . Gateway IP ad dr ess - enter the addr ess. Exa mpl e : D omain names such as www .noki a. ca can be trans l ated into IP addresses like 192.1 00.124.1 95 . Hom epage - enter the address of th e multimedia messaging cent er . ⢠If you selected GSM data or High speed GSM , fill in: Dial-up numb er - a phone number for the data call. ⢠If you selected GPRS , f ill in: A ccess point nam e - the name given to you by your service provider . For further infor mation on different data connections, see also âÂÂConnection settin gsâ on page 33. 2 Go to Messag ing â Optio ns â Settings â Multi m edia m essage . Open Preferred co n nection and select the access point you created to be used as the preferr ed connectio n . See also â Settings for multimedia messagesâ on page 96 . SET UP THE MESSAGI NG STORE The messaging store defin es whether the phoneâÂÂs mem ory or the memory card are used as the default. T o define the messaging store: Messag ing â Opti on s â Settings â Mess aging store and select either the phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emory card, if one is u sed. CREAT E MULTIMEDIA MESSA GES Note: When yo u are s endin g a multim edi a mess age to any phone ot her th an the N okia 3 650, N okia 3600 or Nokia 7650, i t is reco mmen ded to use a smaller i mage size a nd a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds.
[ 80 ] 9 The default setting is Image siz e: Small . If you wa nt to che ck the image size s e tting, go to Me ssaging â Optio ns â Settings â Multimedia message or select Options â Sending options when you are crea ting a multimedia messa ge. When you ar e sending a multimedia messa ge to an e-mail address or another Nokia 3650 , Nokia 3600 or Nokia 7650, select Optio ns â Sending Options â Image size â Larg e when you are creating a multimedia message. 1 In Messaging, select New message â Create: â Multimedia m essage and press . 2 Press to select the re cipient(s) from the Contacts d irect ory or write the phone n umber or e-mail address of the r ecipient in the To : fiel d. Add a semicolon (;) to separate each recipien t. Press to m ove to the next field. 3 Y ou can add the d ifferent objects of the multimedia me ssage in any order you want. ⢠T o add an image, select Opti ons â Insert â Ima g e or New imag e . ⢠T o add a sound, select Opti ons â Insert â Sound c lip or New sound clip . When sou nd has been added, the icon is shown in the navigation bar . ⢠T o add video, select Opti on s â Insert â Vide o clip . ⢠To wr ite text, press . ⢠If you select Insert â Image , Sound clip , Video c lip , or T emplate , a list of item s op ens. S cro ll to the i tem you wis h to add a nd press Select . Note: If you ch ose Image , first you need to s elect whethe r the imag e is stored in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emor y ca rd, if one is us e d. ⢠If you select Inser t â New image , Cam era opens and you can take a new picture. Press Rem ove to remove the picture and take anoth er instead. ⢠If you select Insert â New sound clip , Recorder op ens and you ca n record a new sound. The new photo or sound is automatically saved and a copy is in serted in the m e ssage. Note: A multimedia message can contain only one photo and one sound or video clip.
[ 8 1 ] Messaging 9 4 To send t he me ssa ge, se l ect Opti ons â Sen d or pr e ss . PREVIEW A MUL TIMEDIA MESSAGE T o see what the multimedia m essage will look like, select Opti ons â Pr evi ew m ess age . REM OV E AN OB JE CT FR OM A MU LTI MED IA MESSAGE T o remove a multimedia obje ct, select Opti on s â Remo ve â Ima g e Vi de o c l ip or Sou nd c lip . Press to remove text. W ORK WIT H DI FFERENT M EDIA OB JECTS T o see all the different media objects included in a multimedia message, open a multimedia message and select Opti ons â Objects to open the Objects view . In the Ob jects view , you can change th e order of the di fferent objects, delete objects, or open an object in a corresponding application . Optio ns in the Obj ects vi ew are: Open , Insert , Place image fir st / Place text firs t , Remo ve , Hel p , and Exit . E-mail SETTI NGS NEEDED FOR E-M AIL Before you can send , receive, retrieve, reply to, and f orward e-ma il, you must : ⢠Configure an Internet Access P oin t (IAP) correctly . See âÂÂConnection settingsâ on p age 33. ⢠De fine your e-mail sett ings cor rec tly . See âÂÂSett ings fo r e-mai lâ on page 97. Note: Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and Internet Service Provider . WRITE AND SEN D E-MAIL MESSAG ES Optio ns in th e e-m ail ed itor are : Send , A dd recipien t , Insert , Atta chmen ts , Dele te , Mess age detail s , Se n d ing options , Help , an d Exit . 1 Select New message â Create: â E-m ail . The editor opens.
[ 82 ] 9 2 Press to select the re cipient(s) from the Contacts d irect ory or write the e-mail address of the recipient in the To : field. Add a semicolon (;) to separate each recipient. If you want to send a copy of you r e- mail to someone, wr ite the address in the Cc: field. Press to move to the next field. 3 Write the message. If you want to add an attachment to the e -mail, se lec t Opti ons â Inse rt â Image , Sound clip , Video clip , o r Note . w ill appear in the navigation bar to in dicate that the e-mail has an attachm e nt. T emplate adds pre-written tex t to the e -mail. Y ou can also add an attach ment to an e-mail by selecting Options â Attachments in an open e-m ail. The Attachm ents view opens where you can add, view , and remove attachments. Note: If you choose Image , first you need to select whether the ima ge is stored in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emor y ca rd, if one is us e d. 4 T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Optio ns â Remo ve . 5 T o send the e-mail, select Opti ons â Sen d or pr e ss . Note: E-mail messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. In case something goe s wrong while the phone is sending the e-mail, the e-m ail is left to Outbox w ith the status F ailed . Tip: If you want to send other files than photos, sounds, and no tes as attachments , open the appropriate application and select the option Send â Via e-ma il , if available. ATTAC HMENT VIEW - AD D AND REMOVE ATT ACHMEN TS T o add an attachment to an e-ma il, select Opt ions â Attach men ts in an open e-mail. The Attachments view opens wh ere you can add, view , and remove a ttachments. ⢠T o add an attachment, select Opti on s â Insert â Image , Sound c lip , Video cli p , or Note . A list of items opens. Scroll to the one you want to add and press OK . wi ll appear in the n avigation bar to indicate that the e-mail has an attachment. Note: If you ch ose Image , first you need to s elect whethe r the imag e is stored in th e phoneâÂÂs memory or the m emor y ca rd, if one is us e d.
[ 83 ] Messaging 9 ⢠T o remove an attachment, scroll to the attachment and select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠INBOX - RECEIVE MESSAGES Optio ns in Inbo x are: Op en , Create message , Del et e , Mess age det a ils , Mo ve to folder , Mo ve to phone memory (shown if yo u have def ined the memory card as th e messaging sto re), Mo ve to memory card (shown if you have defined the p honeâÂÂs m emory a s the messaging store), Mark /Unmark , Hel p , and Exit . Messages and data can be recei ved vi a te xt messag e or m ulti media ser vice , via an infrared, or Blu etooth connection. When there are unread messages in Inbox, the icon changes to . In Inbox, unread messages appear in bold. The message icons tell you what kind of a message it is. Here ar e some of the icon s that you may see: for an unre ad text mess age, fo r an unrea d smar t messa ge, for an unre ad multimedia message, for an unre ad s erv ice me ss ag e, fo r data recei ved vi a in frare d, for data received via Bluetooth, and for an unknow n messa ge type. View messages in Inbox T o open a m essage, scroll to the message and pr ess . Use the scroll key to move up and down in the m essage. Press or to move to the previous or next message in the fol der . Options in different message viewers The available options depend on the type of message you have opened for viewing:
[ 84 ] 9 ⢠Save pic ture - saves the pi cture to Imag es â Pictu re msgs. ⢠Reply - copies the addre ss of the sender to the To : field. Select Reply â T o all - to copy the address of the sender and Cc . field recipien ts to the new m essag e. ⢠For w ar d - copies the message contents to an editor . ⢠Call - call b y pressing . ⢠View image - allows you to view and save the image. ⢠Play s ound clip - allows you to listen to the sound in the m essage. ⢠Objects - shows you a list of a ll the different multimedia objects in a multimedia m essage. ⢠Atta chme nts - shows you a list of files sent a s e-mail a ttachments. ⢠Mess age details - shows detailed information abou t a message. ⢠Mo ve to folder / Copy to f older - allows you to move or copy message(s) to My folders, Inbox, or other folder s you have created. See âÂÂMoving items to a f olderâ on page 16. ⢠A dd to Contact s - allows yo u to copy the phone n umber or e-m ail address of the me ssage sender to the Conta cts directory . Choose whether yo u want to creat e a new contact c ard or add the i nformat ion to an existing cont ac t card . ⢠Fin d - S earches the m e ssage for ph one number s, e-mail addresses, and Internet a ddresses. After the search, you can m ake a call or send a mess age to the found number or e-mail address, or save th e data to Contacts or as a bookmark. View multimedia messages in Inbox Y ou ca n recognize multimedia messages by their icon . T o open a m ultimedia message, scroll to it an d press . Y ou can see an image, read a message an d hear a sou nd, simultan eously . If sound is playin g, press or to increase or decr ease the sound volume. If you want to mute the sound, press Sto p .
[ 85 ] Messaging 9 MULTI MEDIA M ESSAGE O BJECTS Optio ns in the O bject s view a re: Open , Save , Send , Call, and Exit . T o see what kind s of media objects have been included in the multimedia messa ge, open the m essage and s elect Opti ons â Objects . In t he Object s view you can view file s that ha ve been i ncluded in the multime dia message. Y ou can choose to save the file in your ph one or to send it, for example, via infr ared to another device. T o open a f ile, scroll to it and press the . Impo rtant : Multimed ia message ob jec ts may contain vir uses or ot herwise be harmful to you r phone or PC. Do not open any a ttachment if you a re not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . For more inf ormation, see âÂÂCer tif. man agementâ on page 43 . Example : Y ou can op en a vCard file and sa ve the contact in forma tion in the file to Contacts. SOUND S IN A MULTIMEDIA MESSAGE Sound objects in a multimedia message are indicated by indicator in the navigation bar . S ounds ar e by default played through the loudspeaker . T o stop the sound, press Stop while sound is playing. Y ou can change the volume level by pressing or . If you want to listen to a sou nd again after all the obj ects have be en shown and the playing of th e sound has stopped, select Opt ions â Play sound c lip . Receive smart messages Tip: If you r eceive a vCard f ile that has a picture attached, the picture will be saved to Contacts as well. Y ou r phone can re ceive ma ny kinds of smart message s, text message s that contain dat a (also cal led Ov er-The -Air (O T A) m essages). T o open a r eceived smart message, open I nbo x, scroll to the smart message ( ), and press . ⢠Pictu re message - to save the picture in the Pictu re msgs. folder in Images for la ter us e, s elec t Optio ns â Save pic ture . ⢠Business card - to save the contac t information, select Opti ons â Save bu siness card .
[ 86 ] 9 Note: If certificates or s ound files are attach ed to business cards, they will not be saved. ⢠Ringing tone - to save the ringing tone to Com poser , select Opti on s â Save . ⢠Operato r logo - to save th e logo, select Opti ons â Save . The operator logo can now be seen in standby mo de instea d of the service provid erâÂÂs own ident ification. ⢠Calendar entry - to save the invitation to Calendar , select Opti on s â Save to Calendar . ⢠W AP m essage - to save the bookmark, select Opti ons â Save to bookmarks . The bookmark is added to th e Bookmarks list in browser service. If the m essage contains both browser access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data select Optio ns â Save all . Or , se le ct Opti on s â View details to view th e bookmark and access point information separately . If you do not want to save all data, select a setting or bookmark, open the details and select Opti ons â Save to Settings or Save to bookma rks dependin g on what you are viewing. Tip: T o later change the default access point settings for browser service or multimedia m essaging, go to Ser vic e s â Opti ons â Se ttings â Default access poin t or Messaging â Opti ons â Settings â Multim edia mess age â Preferre d connect ion . ⢠E-ma il not ification - Tells you ho w ma ny n ew e- mai ls y ou h ave in yo ur remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information such as subject, sender , attachments, and so on . ⢠In addition, you can r eceive a text message service n umber , voice mailbox number , profile settings for rem ote synchronization, access point settin gs for th e brow ser , m ultimed ia messagi ng or e -mail , access point login script settin gs, or e- mail settings. T o save the settin gs, select Opti ons â Sav e to SM S s e tt. , Save to V oice mail , Save to s ettings or Save to e-ma il sett.
[ 87 ] Messaging 9 Service messages Op tion s when vi ewin g servic e mess age are: Do wnload message , Mo v e to fold er , Mes sage de tails , Help , and Exit . Y ou can order service messages (push ed messages) fr om s e rvice prov id ers. Service messages are notifications of, fo r example, news h eadlines and they may contain a tex t message or address of a browser service. For availability and subscription, contact your service pr ovider . Service provid ers can u pdate an exi sting serv ice message e very tim e a new service message is received. Messages can be updated even if you have moved them to another folder than Inbox. When service messages expire, they are deleted autom atically . VIEWING SERVI CE MESSAGES IN INBOX 1 In Inbox, scroll to a service message ( ) and pr ess . 2 T o downl oad or view the serv ice, press Download message . The n ote Do wnloading me ssage is displayed. T he phone starts to make a data connection, if ne eded. 3 Press Back to retu rn to Inbox. VIEWING SERVI CE MESSAGES IN THE BROWSER When you ar e browsing, select Opti ons â Read service msgs. to download and view new service messages. â¢M Y F O L D E R S Option s in My folders are: Open , New me ssage , Dele te , Mess age details , Move t o folder , New folder , Rename , Help , and Exit . In My folders you can organize your messages into folders , create new folders, and r ename and dele te folders. Select Opt ions â Mo ve to folder , New fold er , or Rename folder . For more information, see âÂÂMove items t o a folderâ on page 16. Te m p l a t e s f o l d e r Y ou can use t ext tem plates t o avoid r ewriti ng messages t hat you sen d often . T o create a n ew template, select Opti ons â New templ ate .
[ 88 ] 9 ⢠REMOTE MAILBOX When you o pen this folder , you can connect to you r remote mailbox: ⢠to retrieve n ew e- mail headings or messages, or ⢠view your pr eviously retrieved e-mail headings or m essages offline. Tip: The Se ttings wizard program inc luded in the PC Suit e for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 can help you config ure access poin t and mailbo x sett ings. Y ou can al so copy exi sting setti ngs, f or example, from yo ur compute r to your ph one. See the CD- ROM supplie d in the sales package. If you sele ct New mess age â Create: â E-mail or Mail box in t he Me ssaging main view and you have not s e t u p your e-mail account, you w ill be prompted to do so. See âÂÂSettings needed for e-mailâ on page 8 1 . When you create a new m ailbox, the n ame you give to the ma ilbox automatically replac es Mail box in the Messaging main view . Y ou can have several mailboxes (max. six ). Open the mailbox When you o pen the mailbox, you can choose wh ether you w ant to view the previously retrieved e -mail messages and e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server . When you s croll to your mailbox an d press , the phone asks you if you want t o Connect t o mailb ox? S elect Ye s to conne ct to your mailbox or No to view previously r etrieved e-ma il messages offline. Another way to star t a c onne ction is to select Optio ns â Connect . VIEW E-M AIL MESSAG ES WHEN ONLINE When yo u are onlin e, you ar e con tinuousl y conn ected t o a remote mailbo x via a data call or a pack et data connection . See âÂÂDa ta con nection indica torsâ on p ag e 12 , âÂÂGSM data callsâ on page 34, and âÂÂP acket data (General P acket Radio Service, GPRS)â on page 3 4. Note: If you are using th e POP3 pr otocol , e- mail message s are not updat ed auto matica lly i n onli ne mode . To see th e newest e-mail messages , yo u need to disconne ct and t hen make a new conne ction to y our mailb ox.
[ 89 ] Messaging 9 Optio ns when vie wing e- mail headings are: Open , New message , Connect / Disc onnect , Retrieve , Dele te , Mess age details , Copy , Mark /Unmark , Hel p , and Exi t . VIEW E-M AIL MESSAG ES WHEN OFFLINE When you view e- mail messages offline, you r phone is not conn ected to the remote mailbox. This mode may help you to save on connection costs. See âÂÂCall costs (system service)â on page 26 for further in formation. T o view e- mail messages offline, you must first retrieve e-mail messa ge s from your mail box, see th e next section . After you have retrieved the e-mail messages to your phone, to e nd the data connection, select Opti on s â Disconnect . Now you can contin ue reading th e retrieved e-mail headings and/or th e retrieve d e-m ail messages of fline. Y ou can write new e-mail messages, re ply to the re trieved e- mail messages, an d forward e-ma i l mess ages. Y ou can order the e-mail m essages to be s ent th e next time you conne ct to the mailbox. When you open Mail box the next time and you want to view a nd read the e-mail messages offline, answ er No to th e Con nect to mail box ? qu ery . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox If you are offline, select Opti ons â Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. The remote mailbox view is similar to th e Inbox folder in Messaging. Y ou can move up and down in the list by pressing or . T he following icons are used to sh ow the status of th e e-mail: - new e-mail ( off line or online mode). The content has not been retrieved from the mailbox to your phone (the arrow in the icon is pointing outwards). - new e-mai l, the content has been retrieved fro m the mailbox (arrow pointing inwards). - for e-mail messages that have been read. - for e-mail headings that have been read an d the message content has been deleted from the phone.
[ 90 ] 9 1 When you h ave an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Opti on s â Retrieve â â¢ New - to retrieve all n ew e-mail m essages to your phone. ⢠Selec ted - to re tr iev e only the e- mai l me ssa ges that h ave been selecte d. Use the Mark/ Unma rk â Mar k / Unm ark commands to select me ssa ges on e by on e. ⢠All - to retr ieve all messages from th e mailbox. T o ca ncel re trieving, p ress Cancel . 2 After yo u have re trieved the e- mail me ssages, you can con tinue viewin g them online. Se lect Opti on s â Disc onnect to close the connection and to view the e- mail messages offlin e. COPY E- MAIL MESSAGES TO ANOTHER FOL DER If you want to copy an e-mail from the remote m ailbox to a folder under My folders, select Opti ons â Copy . Sele ct a folder from the li st and press OK . Open e-mail messages When you are vie wing e-mail m essages either i n online or of fline mode, scroll to the e-mail you want to vie w and press to open it . If the e -mail message has not been retrieved (arrow in the icon is poin ting outwards) and you are offline an d select Open , you wil l be asked if you want to retrieve this m e ssage from th e mailbox. Note that the data connection is left ope n after th e e-m ail has been retrieved. Se lect Opti ons â Disco nnect to end the data conn ection. Optio ns when vie wing a n e-mai l message a re: Reply , Forwar d , Dele te , Atta chme nts , Mess age details , Mo ve to folder , A dd to Conta cts , Find , Hel p , an d Exit . Disconnect from mailbox When you are on line, select Opt ions â Disc onnec t to end the data call or GPRS conn ection to the r emote mailbox. Se e also âÂÂData connection indicatorsâ on page 12.
[ 9 1 ] Messaging 9 View e-mail attachments Optio ns in the Att achments view are: Open , Retrieve , Save , Sen d , Delete , Help , and Exi t . Open a messag e that has the attachment i ndicator and select Options â Atta chme nts to open the Attachment s view . In the Attachments view , you can ret ri eve, op en, or sa ve a ttac hmen t s. Y o u c an al so se nd att achm ent s via infrared or B luetooth. Impo rtant : E-mail attachmen ts ma y contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your phone or PC. Do not open any attachment i f you are not sure of the trustworthiness of the sender . For more inf ormation, see âÂÂCer tif. man agementâ on page 43 . Retr ieve a ttac hments to th e ph one If the atta chment has a dimmed in dicator , it has not been retrieved to the phone. T o retrieve the attachment, scroll to it and select Optio ns â Retrieve . Note: If your mailbox uses th e IMAP 4 protocol, you can decide w hether to retrieve e-mail h eadings only , messages only , or messages and attachments. With the PO P3 protocol, the options are e-mail he ad i n gs only or messages a nd attachme nts. Tip: T o save memory , you can remove at tachments from an e-mail while retaining them on th e e-mail server . Select Opti ons â Delete in the Attach ments view . Open an attachment 1 In the Attac hment s view , scro ll to an attac hment an d press to open it. ⢠If you are online, the attach men t is retrieved di rectly from the server and opened i n the corr esponding application. ⢠If you are offline, the phone asks if you want to retrieve the attachment to the phone. If you answer Ye s , a connection to the remote mailbox is sta rted. 2 Press Back to return to th e e-mail viewer . Tip: Supported image format s are listed on page 55. T o see a list of other file formats supported by th e Nokia 3600 serie s, see the product information at www .nokia.ca.
[ 92 ] 9 SAVE ATTA CHMENTS SEPA RATELY T o save an attachmen t, select Optio ns â Save in th e Attachm ents view . The attac hment is saved in t he corresponding application. For example, sounds can be saved in Recorder and te xt files (.T XT) in Note s. Attachments such as images can be saved on a m e mory card, if on e is used. Delete e -mail messages T o dele te an e-mail f rom the ph one while still retaining it in the re mote mailbox, select Opti on s â Delete â Ph on e on ly . Note: The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in th e remote mailbox. So, although you del ete the m essage conten t, the e- mail headi ng stays in your phone. If you want to remove the heading as well, you have to first delete the e-ma il messa ge from your remote mailbox and then make a con nection from you r phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. T o del ete an e-mail from both the phone as well as from th e remote m ailbox, se lec t Opti ons â Del et e â Phone and ser ver . Note: If you are offline, the e- mail will be deleted first from your ph one. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it wi ll be automatically deleted from the remote mailbox. If you are usin g the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted ar e removed only after you have cl osed the connection to the remote mailbox. UNDEL ETE E-MAIL MESSAG ES WHEN OFFLINE T o cancel deleting an e-mail from both the phone and server , scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), a nd select Opt ions â Undelet e . ⢠OUTBOX The Outbox is a temporary storag e place for messages waitin g to be sent. Status o f the messag es in Outbo x ⢠Sending - A connection is being made and the message is being sent.
[ 93 ] Messaging 9 ⢠W aiting/Queu ed - For ex ample, if there are two sim ilar types of messages in Outbox, one of th em is waiting until th e first one is sent. ⢠Resend at (time) - Sending has failed. The phone will tr y to send th e message again after a time-out period. Press Sen d if you wa nt to restart the sending immediately . ⢠Deferr ed - Y ou can set do cuments to be âÂÂon h oldâ while they are in Outbox. Scroll to a message that is being sen t and select Opti ons â Defer s ending . ⢠F ailed - The maximum number of sending attempts has been reach e d. Sending ha s failed. If you w ere trying to send a text message, ope n the message and check that the Sen ding settings are correct. Exa mpl e : Messages are placed in the Outbox, for example, wh en your phone is outside the system coverage area. Y ou can also schedule e- mail me ssages to be sent the n ext time you connect to your remote mailbox . ⢠VIEW MESSAGES ON A SIM CARD Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view , sele ct Opt ions â SIM mes sages . 2 Select Opti ons â Mark /Unm ar k â Mar k or Mark all to ma rk messages. 3 Select Opti on s â Copy . A list of folders open s. 4 Select a folder a nd press OK . Go to the folder to view the messa ge s. ⢠CELL BROADCAST (SYSTEM SERVICE) Op tion s in Ce ll br oadc ast are: Open , Subscr ibe / Unsub scr ibe , Hot mar k / Unhotma rk , T opic , Se ttings , Help , and Exi t . In the Messaging main view , sele ct Opt ions â Cell broad cast . Y ou can receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your service pr ovider . For available topics and relevant topic n umber s, cont act yo ur ser vic e pr ovider . In the main view yo u can see :
[ 94 ] 9 ⢠the status of the topic: - for ne w , subscribed messages and - fo r new , unsu bscr ibed mess ages. ⢠the topic number , topic name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Y ou wi ll be notified w hen messages belongin g to a flagged topic have arrived. Note: A packet data (GPRS) connection may pr event cell broadcast recep tion. Con tact your servic e provi der for the cor rect GP RS sett ings. For further in formation on the GPR S settings, see âÂÂP acket data (General P acket Radio Service, GPRS )â on page 3 4. ⢠SERV ICE COM MAND E D ITOR In the Messaging main view , select Opt ions â Service c ommand . Y ou can send service request s, such as a ctivation c ommands f or system services (also known as USSD commands), to you r service provider . For more information, c o ntact you r service provider . T o send a request: ⢠in standby mode or w hen you have an active call, key in the command number(s) a nd press Send , or ⢠if you ne ed to ent er l ett ers as w ell as num bers , sel ect Messaging â Opti on s â Service com mand . ⢠MESSAGING SETTINGS The Messaging settings ar e divided in to groups according to the different message types. Scroll to the settings you want to edit and press . Settings for text messages Optio ns when edit ing text messa ge center s ettings are: New msg. center , Edit , Delete , Help , and Exit . Go to Messag ing and select Opti on s â Settings â T ext mes sage to open the following list of settings: ⢠Mess age centers - Lists all the text messag e service centers that h ave been defi ned. S ee â Add a n ew text message center â on page 95.
[ 95 ] Messaging 9 ⢠Msg. center in use (Message center in use)- Defines which message center is used for delivering text messages and s mart messages such as pict ur e messages. ⢠Receive r eport (delivery report)- When this system service is set to Ye s , the sta tus of the sent m essage ( Pe n d i n g , F ailed , Delivered ) is sh own in the Log. ⢠Mess age val idity - If the re ci pi en t of a m es sa g e ca nn ot be r ea che d wi thi n the v a lid ity p eriod, t he mes sage i s rem oved from the text mess age servic e center . Note that the syste m must support this fe ature. Maximum t ime is the maximum amount of time allowed by the system. ⢠Mess age sent as - The options are T ext , Fax , P aging , and E-mail . For further information, contact your service provide r . Note: Change this option only if you are sure th at your service center is able to convert tex t messages into these other formats. ⢠Preferred connection - Y ou can send t ext mes sage s vi a the nor ma l GSM system or via GPRS, if supported by th e system. See âÂÂP acket data (General P a cket Radio Service, GPRS)â on page 34. ⢠Reply via same ctr . (system service) - By setting this option to Ye s , if th e recipient replies to your message, the return messa g e i s sen t u sing the same text message service center nu mber . Note that this may not work betw een all opera tors. ADD A NEW TEXT ME SSAGE CENTER 1 Open Message centers and select Opti ons â New msg. center . 2 Press , write a n ame for the service cen ter and press OK . 3 Press , press and write the number of the text message service center ( Must be d efined ). Pres s OK . Y ou nee d the messa ge cent er number to send text and picture messa ge s. Y ou can get th e number from your serv ice provider . T o use the n ew settings, go back to the settings view and scroll t o Msg. center in use . Press and select the new service cente r .
[ 96 ] 9 Settings for multi m edia messages Go to Messaging and select Opti ons â Setting s â Multim edia m essage to open the f ollowing list of settings: ⢠Preferred connection ( Must be defi n ed ) - Select which access poin t is used as the pr eferre d connection for the multim edia mes sage center . See âÂÂSettin gs for multimedia m essagesâ on page 9 6. Note: If you receive multimedia message settings i n a smart message and save them, the re ceived settings are automatically used for the Preferred connection. See âÂÂRece ive sm art messagesâ on pa ge 85. ⢠Secondar y conn. - Select w hich access point is used as th e secondary connection for the m ultimedia message cente r . Note: Both Preferred con nection and Seconda ry con n. must hav e th e sa m e Homep age setting pointing to the sa me multimedia service center . Only the data connection is different. Example: If your pr eferred connection uses a packet data connection, you may want to use high speed data or data call for the secondary connection. This way you are able to send and receive multimedia messages even wh en you a re n ot in a syste m that supports packet data. For availability of and subscription to data ser vices, pl ease co ntact your ser vice pr ovide r . Se e âÂÂGene ral informati on about data co nnectio ns and access poi ntsâ on page 33. ⢠Multim edia rece ption - Select: Only in ho me net. - if you want to r eceive multimedi a messa ge s only when you a re in your hom e system . When you are outside your home system, multimedia message r eception is turned of f. Always o n - if you want to receive multimedia messages always. Off - if you do not want to receive multimedia messages or advertisements at all. Impo rtant : When you a re outside your home sy stem, sendi ng and receiving multimedia message s may cost more. If the settings Onl y in hom e n e t . or Always o n have been selecte d, your phon e can make an active data cal l or GPRS connection without your knowledge.
[ 97 ] Messaging 9 ⢠On r e cei v in g m sg . - Se lect: Retr . imme diately - if you want the phone to retrieve multimedia messa ges in stantly . If th er e are m essag es w ith Defe rr ed sta tus, they will be retrieved as w ell. Defer r etr iev al - if you want the multimedia messa gi ng center to save the message to be retrieved later . To retrieve the message later , set On receiv ing msg. to Retr . immediately . Reject me ssage - if you want to r eject multimedia m essages. The multimedia messaging center will dele te the messages. ⢠Allo w anon. mess ages - Select No , if you w ant to re je ct m essages coming from an anonymous sender . ⢠Receive ad verts - Defi ne whethe r you w ant to recei ve multimedia message adve rtisements or not. ⢠Reports - Set to Ye s , if you want the sta tus of the se nt mes sage ( P ending , F ailed , Delivered ) to be shown in the Log. W hen set to No , only the s tatus Delivered is shown in the L og. ⢠Deny repo rt sending - Ch oose Ye s , if you do not wan t your phone to send delivery report s of received multimedia mess ages. ⢠Mess age val idity - If the re ci pi en t of a m es sa g e ca nn ot be r ea che d wi thi n the validity per iod, the message is removed from th e multimedia messaging center . Note that the system must support this feature. Maxim um ti me is t he maximum amount of time allowed b y the system. ⢠Image size - Define the size of the image in a m ultimedia message. The options are: Small (max. of 1 60 x 120 pix els) and La rge (max. 640 x 4 80 p ixe ls) . ⢠Speaker - Ch oose Loud speake r or N orma l , i f y ou want t he s oun ds i n a multimedia message to be played through the loudspeaker or th e earpiece. For m ore information, see âÂÂL oudspeakerâ on page 17. Settings for e-mail Go to Messag ing and select Opti on s â Settings â E-mail .
[ 98 ] 9 Optio ns wh en editi ng e-ma il settings are: Editing o ptions , New mailbo x , Dele te , Call , and Exit . Open Mailbox i n use to select which m ailbox you want to use. SETTI NGS FOR MAILBO XES Select Mailb oxes to open a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes have been defined, you will be prompted to do so. The following list of settings is shown: ⢠Mailb ox name - Write a descriptive n ame for th e mailbox. ⢠A ccess poin t in use ( Mu st be def i ned ) - Th e Intern et Acces s P oint (IAP) used for the mail box. Choo se an IAP from the list . For more in formati on on how to create an IAP , see âÂÂConnection s e ttingsâ on pa ge 33. ⢠My mail address ( Must b e defined ) - Write the e-mail address given to you by your service provider . The addres s must contain t he @ character . Replies to your messages are sen t to this address. ⢠Out g oi ng ma il se r ver : ( Must be defi ned ) - Write the IP address or host name of the c om puter th at se nds you r e-mai l. ⢠Send mes sage - Define how e-mail is sent from your phone. Immediat ely - A connection to the mailbox is started im mediately after you have selected Send . During next conn. - e- mail is sent w hen you c on nect to your remote mailbox the next time. ⢠Send copy to self - Select Ye s to save a copy of th e e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address define d in My mail ad dress . ⢠In cl ud e s ign at ur e - Select Ye s if you wa nt to att ac h a sig na tur e to y our e-mail messages and to start to wr ite or edit a signature text. ⢠User na me: - Write your u ser name, given to you by y our service provider . ⢠Pa s s w o r d : - Write your password. If you leave this field bl ank, you will be prompted f or the password when you try to con nect to your remote mailbox. ⢠Incomi ng mai l server: ( Must b e defined ) - The IP address or host name of the com put er that r eceives your e-mail. ⢠Mailb ox type: - Defines the e-mail protocol your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options ar e POP 3 and IMAP4 .
[ 99 ] Messaging 9 Note: This settin g can be selected on ly once and can not be changed if you have saved or e xited from th e mailbox settings. ⢠Security - Used with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote m ailbox. ⢠APOP secure login - Used w ith th e POP3 proto col to e ncryp t the sen ding of passwords to the r emote e-mail server . Not shown if IMAP4 is se lec te d for Mailbo x type: . ⢠Ret rie v e atta chme nt (n ot shown if the e- mai l pr otoc ol is se t to POP 3) - T o retr ieve e-mail with or without attachments. ⢠Retrieve h eaders - T o lim i t th e number of e-mail headers you want to retrieve to your phone. The options are All and User de fined . Used with IMAP4 protocol only . Settings for service messages When yo u g o to Messaging and select Opt ions â Setting s â Service mes sage , the followin g list of settin gs opens: ⢠Servi ce messages - Choose whether or not you want to receive se rvi ce me ss a ges . ⢠Authentic. needed - Choose if you want to receive service messages only from a uthorized sources. Settings for Cell broadc ast Check with your ser vice provider to see if Cell broadcast is available and what topics a nd numbers are available. G o to Messag ing â Opti ons â Settings â Cell broadc ast to ch ange th e settings: Reception - On or Off . ⢠Langua ge - All allows you to receive ce ll broadca st m essages in every possible language. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wish to receive cell broadcast me ssages. If the language you want could not be f ound in the list, sele ct Other . ⢠T opic dete ction - If you receive a message that does not belong to any of the ex isti ng topic s, T opi c detecti on â On allows you to save th e topic number automatically . The topic n umber is saved to the topic list and shown without a name. C hoose Off if you d o not want to save ne w topic numbers automatically .
[ 1 00 ] 9 Settings for the S ent folder Go to Messaging and select Opti ons â Setting s â Sent f older to open the following list of settings: ⢠Sav e sen t m e ssag es - Choose if you want to save a copy of eve ry text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent items folder . ⢠No. of sa ve d m sg s. - Define how m any sent messa ge s will be saved to the Sent items f olde r at a time. The default limit is 20 messa g es. When the limit is r eached, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memor y in u se - Define mem ory store. Choices are: phoneâÂÂs m emory or memory card, if one is use d. ⢠WIRELESS VILLAGE Y o u can send and receive messages with Wireless Village. Check with your service provider for availability . Wireless Village i s different from SMS or e-mai l beca use yo u ca n have a t rue, two-way conver sat ion with ot her u sers . For more in formation on Wireless Village, see www .nokia.ca.
[ 101 ] Profiles 10 1 0 Profiles Go to Menu â Prof iles . In Profile s, you can adjust and customize the phone tones for diffe rent events, environm ents, or caller groups. There are f ive preset profiles: Normal , Silent , Meeting , Outdoor , and P ager , which you can customize to meet your needs. Y ou can see the curr ently selected prof ile at the top of th e display in standby m ode. If the Normal profile is in use, only the current date is shown. The tones can be default ringing tones, tones created in Composer , ton es receive d in a m essage, or tr ansferred to your p hone v ia infrar ed, Blu etooth, or a PC connection and then saved to your phone. ⢠CHANGE THE PROFILE 1 Go to Menu â Prof iles . A list of profiles opens. 2 In the Pr ofiles list, scroll to a pr ofile and select Optio ns â A ctiv ate . Shortcut: T o change the profile, press in standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate and press OK . ⢠CUSTOMIZE PROFILES 1 T o modify a profile, scroll to the profile in the Profiles lis t and select Opti on s â Customize . A l ist of profile s ettings open s. 2 Scroll to the setting you want t o change and press to open the ch oices:
[ 1 0 2 ] 10 ⢠Ri ng in g t o ne - T o set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a r inging tone from the list. When you scroll through the list, you can stop on a tone to listen to it before you m ake your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. If a memory card is used, tones stored on it have the icon next to the ton e name. Ringing tones use shared memory . See âÂÂShared mem oryâ on page 1 8. Note: Y ou can ch ange ringing tones in two places: Profiles or Contacts. See â Add a r inging tone for a contact card or grou pâ on page 52. ⢠Ringing options - Wh en A scending is selected, th e ringing volu me starts from level o ne and in creases le vel by le vel to t he set volume l evel. ⢠Ri ng in g v ol um e - T o set the volume level for the ringing and message alert tones. ⢠Mess age alert ton e - T o set the ton e for m essages. ⢠Vibr ating alert - To set the phone to vibrate at incoming voice calls and messa ges. ⢠K eypad t ones - To set the volume le vel for keypad tone s. ⢠W a rn in g t o ne s - Th e phone soun ds a war ning ton e, for exam ple, wh en the bat te ry is running out of power . ⢠Alert for - To set the p hone to ri ng only upon calls from phone n umbers that belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming fr om people outside the s elected grou p will have a silent alert. The choices are All c alls / (list of contact groups, if you have created th em). See âÂÂCreate contact groupsâ on page 54. ⢠Profile n ame - Y ou ca n rena me a pr ofile with any na me you w ant . Th e Normal profile cann ot be renamed.
[ 1 03 ] Fa v o r i t e s 11 11 F a v o r i t e s Go to Menu â Fa v o r i t e s . Note: Y our pho ne mu st be switched on to us e this function. Do not switch th e phone on when w ir e l es s p ho ne us e is prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Y ou can u se Fa vorites to store shortcu ts, links to your favorite photos, video clips, notes, Recorder sound files, br owser bookmarks, and saved browser pa ge s. The default s hor tcuts ar e: - ope ns the Note s editor - opens the Calendar w ith the current date selected - opens the Messaging Inbox Optio ns in the Favorit es mai n vie w are: Open , Edit s hortcut name , Del et e shor tcut , Mo ve , List view / Grid view , Help , an d Exit . ⢠ADD SHORTC UTS Shortcuts can be added on ly from the individua l applications. Not all applications have this f unctionality . 1 Open the application and scroll to the item that you want to add as a short cut to F avorites. 2 Select Opti on s â A dd to F avorites and press OK . Note: A shortcut in Fa vorites is automatically updated if you move th e item it is pointing to, for example, from one f older to another .
[ 1 04 ] 11 ⢠SHORTCUT OPTIO NS ⢠To open a s hor tc u t , scroll to the icon and press . T he file is opened in the cor responding application. ⢠T o delet e a shortcut , scroll to the shortcut you want to remove and se lec t Opti ons â Delete shortcut . Removing a shortcut does not affect the fil e it is re ferr ing to. ⢠T o change the shortcut h eading , sel ect Opt i on s â Edi t sh ortc ut name . Write the new name . T his c hange affects only the s hortcut , not the file or item the shortcut refers to.
[ 1 05 ] Calendar and T o-do 12 1 2 C a l e n d a r a n d T o - d o Go to Menu â Cal end a r Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . Optio ns in the d iffere nt calendar v iews ar e: Open , New entry , W eek view / Month view , Delete , Go to d ate , Send , Settings , Help , and Exi t . In C alendar , you can keep t rack of you r appo intmen ts, me eting s, bi rthdays, anniversaries, and other events. Y ou can also set a c alendar alarm to remind you o f upcomi ng event s. Calendar use s shared memory . Se e âÂÂShare d memoryâ on page 18. ⢠CREATE C ALENDAR ENTRIES 1 Select Opti on s â New entry and select: ⢠Me eti ng t o remi nd y ou of an appointment that has a specific date and time. ⢠Memo to write a gener al entry for a day . ⢠Anni vers ary to r emin d yo u of birthdays or specia l dates. Anniversar y entries are re peated every ye ar . 2 Fill in the fields, see the âÂÂCalen dar entry fieldsâ on page 1 0 6. Use the scroll key to move between fields. Pre ss to change between upper and lower case . 3 T o save the entry , press Done . Edit calendar entries Optio ns when ed itin g a calend ar en try are: Delete , Send , He lp , and Exit . 1 In the Day view , scroll to the entry and press to open it. 2 Edit the en try fields and press Don e .
[ 1 06 ] 12 ⢠If you are editin g a repeated entry , ch oose how you wan t the changes to take effect: All o ccurrences - all repe ated en tries are changed / This e nt ry only - only the current entry wil l be changed. Delete c alendar entries ⢠In the Day view , scr oll to the entry you want to delete and select Opti on s â Delete or press . Press OK to confirm . ⢠If you are deleting a repeated entry , choose how you want the change to take effect: All o ccurrences - all repe ated en tries are deleted / This en tr y on ly - on ly the curren t entry will be dele ted. Example: Y our week ly c lass has been ca ncell ed . Y ou hav e set the calend ar to remind you every week. Ch oose This entry only and the calendar will r emind you again next week. Calendar entry fields ⢠Subj ect / Oc casion - Write a description of the event. ⢠Locati on - the place of a meeting, optional. ⢠Star t time , End tim e , Start d ate , and End d ate . ⢠Alarm - Press to activa te the fields for Alarm t ime and Alarm date . ⢠Repeat - Press to change the e ntry to be repeating. Shown w ith in the Da y view . Example: The re peat function is ha ndy if you h ave a recurring event, a weekly class, a biweekly me eting, or a daily routin e you need to reme mbe r . ⢠Repeat un til - Y ou can set an en ding d ate for th e repe ated en try , for exampl e, the ending da te of a weekly course you are taking. T his option is sh own only if you have selected to r e peat th e event. ⢠Synchronization - If you se lect Private , after sync hr onization the calendar entry can be see n only by you and it w ill not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar . This is usef ul when, for example , you synchron ize yo ur calendar on a compatibl e compu ter a t wo rk. I f yo u s el ect Pub lic , th e calendar entry is shown to o thers who ha ve access to view your calendar online. If you select None , the calendar entry will not be copi ed to your PC wh en you synchron ize your c alendar .
[ 1 0 7 ] Calendar and T o-do 12 Cale nda r vi ews MONTH VIEW In the M onth v ie w , on e row equal s one wee k. Th e cu rrent date is un derlin ed. Dates that have calendar entries are marked w ith a small triangle at the right bottom corn er . Th ere is a fra me around th e currently se lected date. ⢠To open the Day vie w , scr oll t o the date yo u want t o op en and p ress ⢠T o go to a certain date, select Opti ons â Go to dat e . Write the date and press OK . Tip: If you press in Mon th, Week, or Da y views, the curren t date is automatically highlighted. Cale ndar entry ico ns in Day an d Week views Synchronization icons in Mont h view Meeting Red Priva te Memo Blue Publi c Anni versary None Purple The day has mor e than one view
[ 1 08 ] 12 W EEK VIEW In the W e ek view , the calenda r entries fo r th e selected week are s hown in seven day boxes. T he curren t day of the week is underlined. Memos and Anniversaries a re placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Me e ting entries are marked with colored bars according to starting and e nding times. T o view or edit an entry , scroll to the cell that has an entry a nd press to open the Day vie w , then scroll to the e ntry and press to open it. Optio ns in the d ifferent cal endar v iews are: Open , New entry , W eek view / Month view , Delete , Go to d ate , Send , Settings , Help , and Exi t . DAY VI EW In the Day view , you can see th e calendar entries for the selected day . The entries are grouped according to their startin g time. Memos and Anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. ⢠T o open an entry for editin g, scroll to it and press . ⢠Press to go to the next day or press to go to th e previous day. SETTI NGS FOR CALENDA R VIEWS Select Opti on s â Settin gs and select: ⢠Default view - To select the view that is shown firs t when you open Calendar . ⢠W eek starts on - T o change the starting day of the week. ⢠W eek view title - T o change the title of the W eek view to be the week number or the week dates. Shortcut: T o write a calen dar entry , press any key ( - ) in any calendar view . A Meeting entry is opened and the characters you keyed in are added to th e Su bject field. ⢠SET CALENDAR ALARMS 1 Create a new Meeting or Anniversary entry , or open a previousl y created entry .
[ 1 09 ] Calendar and T o-do 12 2 Scroll to Alarm and press to open, Sel ect On, press to open the Al arm ti me and Alarm date fields. 3 Set the alarm time and date. 4 Press Don e . An alarm indicator is shown next to the e ntry in the Day view . Stop a calendar alar m The a larm du ration is on e minu te. Whe n the ala rm tim e expir es, pres s Stop to end the calendar alar m. If you press an y other key , the alar m is set to snooze. ⢠SEND CALEN D AR ENTR IES In the Day view , scroll to the entry you want to send an d select Opti ons â Send . Then sele ct the me thod, the choice s are: Via text m essag e , Via e-m ail (av ailable only if t he correct e-mai l settings a re in place), Via B luetooth , or Via infra red . For further information, see âÂÂMessagingâ on page 69, âÂÂSe nd and receive data via inf rar edâ on page 140, and âÂÂSend data v ia Bluetoothâ on pa ge 13 6. â¢T O - D O Go to Menu â To - d o . In To- do you can keep a list of tasks that you need to do. The T o- do list uses shared memor y . See â Shared memoryâ on page 1 8. 1 T o start to write a to- do note, press any key ( - ) . The editor opens and the cursor blinks after the letter s you have ke yed in. 2 Write the task in th e Su bje c t field. Pr ess to add special characters. ⢠T o set the due date for the task , scroll to the Due da te field and key in a dat e. ⢠T o set a pr iority for the to-do note, scroll to the Priority field an d press . 3 T o save the to-do note, press Don e .
[ 1 1 0 ] 12 Note: If you remove all ch aracters and press Done , the previously saved note will be deleted. ⢠T o open a to-d o note , scroll to i t and press . ⢠T o dele te a to-do note , scroll to it and select Opti ons â Del et e or pr e ss . ⢠T o mark a to-do note as completed , scroll to it and select Opti on s â Ma rk as d one . ⢠T o resto re a to- do note , select Optio ns â Mark as not done . Prio ri ty icon s High Lo w no icon Normal Status icons task c ompleted not completed
[ 111 ] Ex tra s 13 13 Extra s ⢠CAL CULA TOR Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Cal cu lat or Optio ns in Ca lcu lato r are: Last r esult , Memory , Clear screen , Help , and Exit . 1 Enter the f irst number of your calculation. Pr ess to erase any mist ak es. 2 Scroll to a function and press to select it. Use to add, to subtract, to m ultiply , or to divide. 3 Enter the second number . 4 T o execute the ca lculati on, s croll to a nd press . Note: Th e Ca lcul ato r ha s lim ite d acc ura cy an d rou ndi ng er ror s ma y occ ur , especially in long divisions. ⢠T o add a decimal, press . ⢠Press and hold to clear the resul t of the previous calculation. ⢠Use a nd to v iew previous calculations and move in the sheet. ⢠Select to save a number to the memory , indicated by M . T o r etrieve th e number from th e memor y , se lect . ⢠T o retrieve th e result of the las t calculation, select Opt ions â Last res ult . Tip: Press repeatedly to scroll the functions. Y ou can see the selection change between th e functions.
[ 1 1 2 ] 13 ⢠COMPOSER Go to Menu â Extras â Compo ser . Optio ns in the C omposer mai n view a re: Open , New tone , Delete , Ma rk/ Unmark , Rename , Duplicate, Help , and Exi t . Composer allows you to c reate your own, customized ringing tones. Note that it is not pos sible to edit a default ringing tone. 1 Select Opti on s â New tone to open the editor an d to start composing. ⢠Use t he keys to add notes and r ests. See the table on page 1 13. Or , se l ec t Options â Insert symbol to op en a li st of not es and re sts. The defau lt durat ion for a not e is 1/4. ⢠T o listen to th e tone, press or select Opti on s â Play . The playback is always started from the beginning of the tone. To stop playing, press Stop . ⢠T o adjust the volume while a tone is playing, press to increase or press to decrease it. Or , select Opti on s â V olume before you start to play the tone. ⢠T o adjust the te mpo, select Opti ons â Te m p o . To increase or decrease the tem po gradually , press and hold or , re spe cti ve ly . T empo is measur ed in beats per min ute. The maxi mum is 250 beats, the default tempo for a new tone is 160 beats, and the min imu m is 50 beats . ⢠To apply d ifferen t playing style s, select Options â Style â Legato - played in a smooth and even manner or Staccat o - note s are played separately to produce s hort sharp so unds. ⢠T o select many notes or r e sts at the same time, press and hold and press and hold or at the same time. ⢠T o move note(s) u p or dow n on t he staff by a half step, scroll to the note an d press or . ⢠For example, press and hold togeth er wit h to produce C#. 2 Select Bac k to save.
[ 1 1 3 ] Ex tra s 13 Op tion s when co mposin g ar e: Play , Insert sym bol , Style , Te m p o , V olume , Hel p and Exit . â¢C O N V E R T E R In Co nver ter , you c an c onve rt me as ures such a s Length from one uni t ( Ya r d s ) to a nother ( Met ers ). Go to Menu â Extr as â Co nver t er . Optio ns in Conv erter are: Select unit / Change curr ency , Convers ion type , Currency r ates , Hel p , an d Exit . Note: The Converter has limited accuracy and rounding errors may occur . Note: Before you can m ake currency conversion s, you need to choose a base currency (us ually your domestic cu rrency) and add exchange rates. See âÂÂSet a base currency and exch ange rates â on page 1 14. Convert u nits 1 Scroll to the Ty pe field and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the measure you want to use and press OK . Key No t e Key and function c Shor ten s t he durat ion of th e se lect ed not e(s)/r est(s) i n ste ps. d Len gthens the duration of the selected note(s)/rest(s) in steps. e Inser ts a res t. f Press to open a list of notes and rests. g Switche s octaves, all selected note(s) or rest(s) is/are moved to the ne xt octave. a Deletes selecte d note(s). b A long press of keys - produ ces a lengthen ed (dotted) note or rest or shortens a lengthe ned note.
[ 1 1 4 ] 13 2 Scroll to the f irst Unit field an d press to o pen a list of av ailable units. Select the unit from whi ch yo u want to conv ert an d pre ss OK . Scroll to the n ext Unit fie ld and select the u nit to whi ch you w ant to convert. 3 Scroll to the f irst Amount field and ke y in the value you want to convert. Th e other Amoun t field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal an d press for the , - (for tempe ratur e), an d E (exponent) sym bols. Note: The conversion order changes if you write a value in th e second Amou nt field. The result is shown in the first Amount field. Tip: T o renam e a currency , go to the Curren cy rates view , scroll to the currency , and select Opti on s â Rename currency . Set a base curr ency and exchange rate s Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base curr e ncy (u sually your domestic curr ency) and add exch ange rates. Note: The rate of the b ase currency is always 1. T he base curren cy determ ines the conversion rates of the othe r curren cies. Example: If you set the C anadian Dollar (CAD) as the base cu rre ncy , a US Do llar is .65. Thu s, you woul d wri te .65 as th e exch ange rate for the U S Dollar (USD). 1 Select Currency as the measure type and select Opti on s â Curr ency rate s . A list of cu rrencies opens and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 T o change the base cu rrency , scroll to th e currency (usually your domestic c ur rency), and select Opti ons â Set as base curr . Impo rtant : When you c hange the base cu rre ncy , all previously set exchange r ates are set to 0 and you need to key in new rates. 3 Add exchan ge rates (see exam ple), scrol l to the cur rency , and key in a new rate, th at is, h ow many u nits of the cu rrency equ al one un it of the bas e currency you have selected. 4 After you have inserted all the needed exchange rates, you can make currency conversions, see âÂÂConvert unitsâ on page 1 1 3.
[ 1 1 5 ] Ex tra s 13 â¢N O T E S Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Note s . Y ou can link notes to F avorites and send th em to other devices. Plain text files (T XT format) you receive can be saved to Notes. Press a ny key press ( - ) to s tart to write. Pres s to clear letters. Press Don e to save. â¢C L O C K Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Cloc k . Op tion s in Cl ock ar e: Set alar m , Reset alar m , Remo ve alarm , Settings , Help , and Exi t . Change clock settings T o change the time or date, select Opti ons â Settings in Clock. T o change the clock shown in stan dby mode, scroll down in the Da te an d tim e setting s and select Clock t y pe â Anal og or Digital . Set an alarm 1 T o set a new alarm , select Opti on s â Set alar m . 2 Enter the ala rm time and press OK . When the alarm is a ctive, the indicator is shown. The alarm clock works even if the phon e is switched off. T o cancel an alarm, go to clock and select Optio ns â Remo ve alarm . T URN OFF TH E ALARM â¢P r e s s Stop to turn off the alarm. ⢠When th e alarm ton e sounds, pr ess any key or Snooze to s top the alarm for f ive minutes, after wh ich it will resume. Y ou can do this a max imum o f five time s. If the alarm tim e is reached wh ile the phone is switched of f, the ph one switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you pr ess Stop , the phone asks wheth er you want to activa te the phone for calls. Press No to switch off the phon e or Ye s to make and receive calls.
[ 1 1 6 ] 13 Note: Do not press Ye s when wir eless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . ⢠RECORD ER Go to Menu â Ext r a s â Reco rde r . Optio ns in Record er are: Open , Record so und clip , Del et e , Mo v e to phone me m , Mo ve t o mem. ca rd , Ma rk/Unm ark, Rename sound clip, S e n d, Settings , A d d t o F a v o r i t e s , Help, an d Exi t . The voice recorder allows you to record telephone conversations an d voice memos. I f you are recording a telephone con versation, both parties will hear a tone every five seconds during recording. Note: Obey all local laws governing recording of calls. Do n ot use this feature illegally . Select Optio ns â Record so und cl ip and scroll to a function and press to select it. U se: - to recor d , - to pa us e, - to stop, - to fast forward, - to fast rewind, or - to play an open ed sound file . Note: Recorder cannot be used when a data call or a G PRS connection is active. ⢠MEMO RY CARD Go to Menu â Extras â Mem ory card . Options in the memory card are: Bac k up ph on e mem . , Restore from ca rd , For ma t me m. ca rd , Mem ory ca rd name , Set pas sword , Change pas sword , Remov e password , Unloc k memory card , Mem. in use , Hel p an d Exi t . If you have a memor y card you can use it to store you r multimedia files like video clips and sound files, photos, messaging information, and to backup information from your phone âÂÂs memory . Impo rtant : K eep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Note: De tails of how you can use the me mor y card w ith othe r fea tur es and appli cations of you r Nokia 3600 se ries phon e are given in the se ctio ns describing these features and applications.
[ 1 1 7 ] Ex tra s 13 Insert the memory card 1 Make sure th e phone is switched off. 2 With th e b ack of t he p hone facing y ou, slid e ope n th e c over and remove the battery , see Quick start âÂÂInsert the SI M cardâ for in structions on removing the cover . 3 P osition the mem ory card in its slot. Make sure that the g old contacts of the card are facing down. 4 Slide the silver c atch over the mem ory card to secure it. 5 When you ha ve secured the card in place, replace the battery , th en replace the cover by slidin g it back i nto place. Impo rtant : Do not r emove the memory card in the m iddle of an operation. Be sure to close all mem ory card applications before removing the card. AB
[ 1 1 8 ] 13 Impo rtant : If you are installing an application to the memory card and need to reboot the phone, do not r emove the card until the reboot is co mplet e. Othe rwise the appl ication fil es may be l ost. Format the memory card Y ou must fo rmat the m e mory ca rd before yo u can u se it for th e first ti me. Select O p t io n s â Format mem. c ard . Y ou will be asked to con firm your request and once you con firm, form atting starts. Back up and r estore information Y ou can backup informa tion from your phoneâÂÂs memo ry to the memory card. Select O p t io n s â Back up phone me m. Y o u can r estore in fo r mati on from the me mory card to the phoneâ s memory . Select O p t io n s â Rest ore from car d . Memory c ard password Y ou can set a password to protec t your memory card against unauthor ized use. Note: The password is stored in your phone and you do n ot have to enter it again while you are using the memory card on the same phone. If you want to use the memory card on another phone, you will be asked for the password. SET UP, C HANGE, OR REMO VE Y OUR P ASSWORD Select O p t io n s â Set pass word , Change pas sword , or Remo ve password . The password can be up to eight ch aract e rs long. Impo rtant : Once the password is removed, th e memory card can be used on any phone without a password. Check m e mory consumption Using the Mem. in use option, you ca n check the memory consumption of different data groups and the available memory for installing new applications or s o ftware on your memory card. Select O p t io n s â M emory detail s .
[ 1 1 9 ] Services (XHTML) 14 14 Services (XHTML) Go to Menu â Servi ces or press a nd hold in sta ndby mode. Note: Y our phon e must be switch ed on to use this f unction . Do not switch the pho ne on whe n wireless phone use is pr ohibited or when it may cause inte rfer ence or danger . Glossary: XH TML browser suppo rts pages writt en in the Hyp ertext Marku p Langua ge (XHTML) an d the Wireless Mar kup Langu age (WML ). V arious service providers on the I nternet mainta in pages s pecifically design ed for m obile phones , offerin g ser vices s uch as news , weather reports, banking, tr avel information, entertainment, and ga mes. With the XHT ML browse r you can view these services as W AP pages written i n WML, XHTML pages written in XHTM L , or a mixture of both. Note: Check the avail ability of services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/or service provider . Service prov iders w ill also giv e you instru ctions on ho w to use their ser vices. ⢠BASIC STEPS FOR ACCESSIN G THE WEB ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the web service that you want to u se. See âÂÂPhone browser service settin gsâ on page 120. ⢠Make a c onnec tion to the s ervic e. See â Ma ke a co nnecti onâ o n page 120. ⢠Start browsing the web pages. ⢠End the con nection to the se rvice.
[ 120 ] 14 ⢠PH ONE BROW SER SERVIC E SETTINGS Receiving settings in a smart message Tip: Settings may be available, for example, on the site of a networ k operator or ser vice provider . Y ou may recei ve servi ce settin gs in a special text m essage, a so-calle d smart message, from the n etwork operator or service provider that of fers the se rvic e. Se e âÂÂRecei ve sma rt mes sag esâ on page 85. Fo r more in form atio n, contact your network ope rator o r service provider . K ey in the settings m anually Follow the instructions given to you b y your service pr ovider . 1 Go to Menu â Tools â Settin gs â Connection â A ccess poin ts an d define the settings for an access point. See â Connection settingsâ on page 33. 2 Go to Service s â Opti ons â A dd book mark . Write a na me fo r th e bookmark and the a dd ress of th e browser page defined for the current access point. Make a connection Tip: T o access the Bo okmark s view wh ile browsi ng, press an d hold down . T o return to the browser vi ew again, select Options â Bac k to page . Once you have stored all the re quired connection settings, you can access browser pages. There are three dif ferent ways to access browser pages: ⢠Select the homepage ( ) of your service pr ovider , ⢠Select a bookmark f rom the Bookmarks view , or ⢠Press the keys - to start to write the addr ess of a brow ser service. The Go to f ield at the bottom of the display is im mediately activated and you can con tinue writing the address there. After you have sel ected a page or written the address, pr ess to start to download the page. See also âÂÂData conn ection indi catorsâ on page 12.
[ 12 1 ] Services (XHTML) 14 Connection security If the secu rity indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the phon e and th e browser gateway or server is encrypted and secure. Note: The se curity icon does n ot indic ate that d ata tran smission b etween the ga teway and the conten t serv er ( place wher e the requ ested resource is stored ) is secur e. It is up to th e servi ce pro vider t o secure data tr ansmission between the gateway and th e content server . View bookmarks Options in the Bookmarks view (selection on a bookm ark or folder) are: Open , Do wnload , Back to pag e , Send , Go to URL addr ess / Find bookmark , Ad d bookm ark , Edit , Dele te , Read ser vice msgs. , Disco n nec t , Mo ve to folder , New fold er , Ma rk/Un mark , Rename , Clear ca che , De tails , Add to F a v or ite s , Settin gs , Hel p , and Exi t . Glossary: A bookma rk consi sts of an I nternet address (mandatory), bookmark title, W AP access poin t, and if the service r equires, a user name and password. Note: Y our phone may have some pre-installed bookmarks for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia doe s not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to acce ss them, you should tak e the same precautions, for secu rity or content, as you would with any site. In the Bookmarks view , you can see bookmarks pointing to different kinds of web pages. Bookmarks are in dicated by the f ollowing icon s: - The starting page define d for the browser access point. If you use another web access point for browsing, the starting page is changed acc ordin gly . - The last visited page. W hen the p hone is disconnected from the service, the address of the last visited page i s kept in memory until a new page is visited during the ne x t con nection. - A bookm ark showing the title . When you scroll th rough bookmarks, you can see th e address of the highlighted bookmark in the Go to field at the bottom of th e display .
[ 122 ] 14 Op tion s when bro wsing are: Open , Service option s , Bookmarks , Hist ory , Go to URL addr ess , V iew i mage s , Re ad se rvic e m sgs. , Save as boo kmar k , Sen d bookm ark , Reload , Disc onnec t , Sho w im ages , Clear cache , Save page , Find , Details , Sess ion , Security , Settings , Hel p , and Exi t . Add bookmarks manually 1 In the Bookm arks view , sele ct Opt ions â A dd bookm ark . 2 Start to fill in th e fields. Only the address must be def ined. The defau lt access point is assigned to the bookmark if no ot her one is sel ec t e d. Press to e nter special characters such as / , . , : , an d @ . Pre ss to clear ch aracters. 3 Select Opti on s â Save to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks T o send a bookma rk, scroll to it and select Opt i ons â Send â Via text message . ⢠BROWSING On a br owser page, new link s appear under lined in blue an d previou sly visited links in purple. Im ages that act as lin ks have a blue bor der around them. K eys and commands used in browsing ⢠T o open a lin k, press . ⢠T o scroll the view , use the scroll key . ⢠T o enter letters and numbers in a fi eld, pr ess th e key s - . Pr ess to enter s pecial char acters s uch as / , . , : , an d @ . Press to clea r cha racters. ⢠To go t o t he pre vious page whi le br owsin g, press Ba ck . If Bac k is n ot available, select Optio ns â Histor y t o view a chronologica l list of the pages you have visited during a browsing ses sion. The histor y list is clear ed each time a session is c losed.
[ 123 ] Services (XHTML) 14 ⢠T o check boxes a nd make selections, pr ess . ⢠To retrieve the latest co ntent from the server , select Options â Relo ad . ⢠T o open a su blist of commands or actions for the currently open web page, sele ct Opt io ns â Service o ptions . ⢠Press to disconnect from a w eb service and to qu it browsing. VIEWING NEW SERVI CE MESSAGE S WHILE BROWSING T o download and view new service messages w hile browsing: 1 Select Opti on s â Read ser vice msgs. (shown only if there are new mes sages) . 2 Scroll to the m essage and press to download and ope n it. For more i nformation about service messa ges, see â Service m ess agesâ on page 87. SAVING BOO KMARKS ⢠T o save a bo okmark while browsing, select Optio ns â Save as bookmark . ⢠T o sa ve a bookmark received in a s mart messa ge, open the messa ge in the In box in Messaging and select Opti ons â Save to bookma rks . See also âÂÂRece ive smart messages â on page 85. ⢠VIEWING SAVED PAGES Optio ns in the Save d page s vi ew are: Open , Back to p age , Reload , Remov e , Read ser vice msgs. , Disco n nec t , Mo ve to folder , New folder , Ma rk/U nmark , Rename , Clear cache , De tails , A dd to F avourites , Se ttings , Hel p , and Exit .
[ 124 ] 14 If you r egularly browse pages containing information which does not ch ange very often, for example a train timetable, you c an save and th en brow se them when offline. If you have a memory card, you can save web pages on it instead of the phoneâÂÂs mem ory . ⢠T o save a page, while browsing select Opti on s â Save pa ge . Saved pages are indicated by th e following icon: - The saved web page. In the saved pages view y ou can a lso create folders to s tore your saved web pages. Folders are indicated by the following icon: - Folder con taining saved web pages. ⢠T o open the Saved pages view , press in the Bookmarks view . In the Saved pages view , p ress to open a saved page. If you want to start a conn ection to th e web service an d to retrieve the page again, select Options â R elo ad . Y ou can al so arrange th e pages into f older s. Note: The phon e stays online after you reload th e page. ⢠DOWNLOAD THROUGH THE BROWSE R Y ou can download items such as ringing tones, images, oper ator lo gos and video clips through the mobile browser . T hese items can be provided free or for a price. Once downloaded, items a re handled by the respective applications on your phone, for example a downloaded photo will be saved in th e Imag es . Download directly from the web page T o download the item directly f rom a web page: ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti ons â Open .
[ 125 ] Services (XHTML) 14 Purchase an item Glos sary: Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a system for protecting th e copyrig ht of digital content that is distributed onl ine. Note: Copyright prot ections may prevent som e images, ringtones a nd other content from being copied, modified, transferred or f orwarded. T o download the item: ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti ons â Open . ⢠Select Buy if you wan t to buy the item. Check an item before downloading Y ou can see details about an item before you download it. Details about an item may inclu de the price, brief description and size. Note: Check with your service provide to see if they of fer this service. ⢠Scroll to the lin k and select Opti on s â Ope n . Details about the item are displayed on your phone. ⢠If y ou want to cont inue wit h t he downloading, press A ccept or if you want to can cel the download, press Cancel . ⢠END A CO NNE CTI ON ⢠Select Opti on s â Disco nnect , or ⢠Press and hold to quit browsing and to return to standby mode. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memo ry of the pho ne. If you h ave tried to access or have accessed con fidential information requiring passwords ( for example, your bank account), empty the c a che of your phone afte r each use. To empty the cache, sele ct Opti ons â Clear cac he .
[ 126 ] 14 Glos sary: A cache is a buffer memory that is used to store data tem porarily . ⢠BROWSER SETTINGS ⢠Default access poi nt - If you w ant to change the default access point, press to open a list of available access po ints. The curren t defau lt access point is highlighted. For more informa tion , see âÂÂConnection settingsâ on p age 33. ⢠Sh o w im age s - Choose if you want to view pictures whe n you are browsin g. If you choose No , you can late r load image s du rin g bro wsin g by se lec tin g Options â Show images . ⢠T ext wrapping - Ch oose Off if you do not want the te xt in a par agr aph to automatically wrap, or On if you do. ⢠Fon t s iz e - Y ou can choose f ive text size s in the browser: Smallest, Small, Normal, Large and Largest. ⢠Cookies - A llow / Reject . Y ou can enable or disable th e receiving and sending of cookies. ⢠Confirm to uch to nes - Alwa ys / Fir st sending on ly . The browser supports functions you can access w hile browsing. Y ou can : make a voice call while you are on a browser page, send touch tones while a voice call is in progress, save in C ontact s a name and p hone number from a browser page. Ch oose wheth er you want to confirm before th e phone sen ds touc h to nes dur ing a vo ice ca ll.
[ 127 ] Applications (Javaâ¢) 15 15 Applica tions (Jav aâ¢) Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use this function. Do not switch the phone on when wire less phone use is prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Go to Menu â Appl icatio ns Optio ns i n the A ppl icatio ns ma in v iew a re: Open , View detai ls , Setting s , Remo ve , Go to URL addr ess , Up date , Help , an d Exit . In the Applications main view you can open installed Java applications or remove them. In the Install view you can install new J ava applications (file extensions .JAD or .J AR). Note: Y our phone supports J2MEâ¢Java applications. Do not download P e rsonal Java⢠ap plication s to y our ph one as t hey can not be install ed. When you open Applications, you ca n see a list of Java a pplications that have been installed to your phone. ⢠Scroll to an application and select Opti ons â View detai ls to view: ⢠Statu s - Installed , Runnin g , or Do wnloaded (shown only in Install view) ⢠Ve r s i o n - the application ver sion nu mber ⢠Supp lier - t h e supplier or ma n ufacturer of the a ppli cation ⢠Size - the size of the application file in kilobyte s ⢠Ty p e - a brief description of the application ⢠URL - an addre ss of an information page on the Internet ⢠Data - the size of application data such as high scores, in kilobytes T o start a data connection and to view extr a information about the application, scroll to it and select Opt ions â Go to URL addr ess .
[ 128 ] 15 ⢠T o start a data con nection and to check if there is an update available for the application, scroll to it an d select Opti on s â Upda te . Applications uses shared mem ory . See âÂÂSh ared memoryâ on page 1 8. ⢠INSTALL A JAV A APPLICATION Optio ns in th e Install view a re: Inst all , View det ails , Dele te , Hel p , and Exit . Installation files may be transferred to your phone from a computer , downloaded during br owsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, via Bluetooth, or via in frared. If you are u sing P C Sui te for Nokia 3650 or PC Sui te for Nokia 3600 to transfer the file, place it in th e c:\nokia\installs folder in y ou r phone. Impo rtant : Only install software from sources that off er adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. 1 In the Applications main view , to view the installation packages, press to open the Do wnloaded view . Note: In the In stall view , you can only insta ll Java software installation files with th e extens ion .JAD or .JAR. 2 T o install an application, scroll to an installation file and sele ct Opti on s â Inst all . Alternatively , search the phone memory for the installation file, select the file, and press to start the installation. Example: If you have received the in stallation file as an e-m ail attachment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the in stallation file, and press to start the installation. 1 Press Ye s to confirm the installation. The .JAR file is required for installation. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to downlo ad it. If ther e is no acce ss poin t defi ned for Appli catio ns, you w ill be asked to select on e. Wh en yo u are d ownlo ading t he J AR fi le, you may need to enter a user name and pa ssword to access the server . Y ou obt ain these from the suppli er or manufactu rer of the appli cation.
[ 129 ] Applications (Javaâ¢) 15 During installation, the ph one checks the integrity of the package to be installed. T he phone shows information about the checks bein g carried out, and you are given options whether to continue w ith or cancel the i nstallation. Once the phone has c hecked the integrity of the software package, the application is installed on your phone. 2 The phone infor ms you when installat i on is complete. T o open th e Java application after installation, you must go to the Applications main view . Tip: When you are br owsing WA P or browser pages, you can download an inst allation file an d install it im mediately . Note, however , that th e connection is left running in the bac kground during installation . Open ing a Ja va ap plic atio n ⢠Scroll to an application in the Applications main view an d press to open it. Un install ing a Ja va appl ication ⢠Select the application in the Applica tion s m ain view an d select Opti on s â Remove . ⢠JAVA APPLICATION SE TTINGS T o define a def ault access point for downloading missing application components, select Settin gs â Default a ccess p oint . Fo r more inf ormati on on creating access points, see the â Access pointsâ on page 36. Select an application and select Setting s , and th en se lect one of: ⢠A ccess point - Sele ct an a ccess point to be used by the application for downloading extra data. ⢠Network connect ion - Some Java applications may require a data connection to be made to a defined access point. If n o access point has been selected, you will be asked to select one. T he options are: Allo wed - The connection is created immediately wi thout a notification. A s k fi rst - Y ou will be asked before th e application makes the connection . Not allo wed - Connections are not allowed.
[ 130 ] 16 16 Manager ⢠INSTALL APPLICAT IONS AND SOFTWARE Note: Y our phone must be switch e d on t o use the functions in the To o l s folder . Do not switch th e phone on when wireless ph one use i s prohibited or when it may c a use interference or danger . Go to Menu â To o l s â Manager In Manager you can install new applications an d software packages, and remove application s from your ph one. Y ou can also check th e memory consumption. Options in the Manager main view are: View deta ils , View certif icate , Inst all , Remo ve , View log , Send log , Mem ory details , Hel p , an d Exit . When you open Ma nager , you can see a lis t of: ⢠installation packages that have been saved to Manager ⢠partially installed applications (indicated by ), and ⢠fully installed applications that you can remove (indicated by ) Note: In Manager , you can only use device software installation files with a n exten sion .S IS. Tip: T o install Java⢠applications (file extension .J AD or .JAR), go to Appli cations . For further i nformati on, see â Applica tions (Ja vaâ¢)â on page 12 7. ⢠Scroll to an inst allatio n file and s elect Opt ions â View det ails to view the Name , Ve r s i o n , Ty p e , Size , Suppl ier , and Statu s of the s oftware pa ckage . ⢠Scroll to a software package and s e lect Opti on s â View cert ificate to display the s ecurity certificate details of a software package. See âÂÂCertif. m anagementâ on page 4 3. Impo rtant : Only install software from sources that off er adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software.
[ 13 1 ] Manager 16 T o help you , the software installation system uses digital sign atures and certi ficates on software packages. Do not install t he appli cation i f Manager gives a security warning during in stallation . Tip: Select Opt ions â Vie w l og to see what software packages h ave been installed or removed and when. ⢠INSTA LL SOFT WARE Y ou ca n install applications that ar e specifically intended for Nokia 3600 series phones or suitable for the Symbian ope rating system. A software pa ck age is u sual ly on e larg e co mpr ess ed fi le con tain ing ma ny co mpon ent file s. Note: If you in stall a program that is not intended specifically f or Nokia 3600 series ph ones, it may function and look very different f rom the usual Nokia 36 00 series phone applications. Impo rtant : If you in stall a file that co ntain s an update or r epair to an exis tin g applicatio n, y ou can only restor e th e or iginal applicati on if you have the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed sof tware package . T o restore the or iginal app lic ation, first remove the application and the n install the application again from the or iginal installation file or th e back-up copy . 1 Inst allat ion pack ages may be tr ansferr ed to your phone from a comput er , downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, via Bluetooth, or via in frared. If you are using PC Suite f or Nokia 3650 or PC Su ite for 3600 to transfer the file, place it in th e c: \no kia\in st alls folder on your phone. Example: If you have received the in stallation file as an e-m ail attachment, go to you r mailbox, open the e-mail, open the Attachments view , scroll to the in stallation file, and press to start the installation. 2 Open Manag er , sc roll to th e install ation pack age, and select Options â Inst all to start the installation. Alternatively , search th e phone me mory or th e memory card f or the installation file, select th e file, and press to start th e installation.
[ 132 ] 16 If you are install ing sof tware w ithou t a dig ital signature or a certi ficate, the pho ne warns you of the risks of insta lling softwa re. Continue inst allati on only if you are absolutely sure of th e origin and contents of th e software package. During installation, the phone checks the integrity of the package to be installe d. The ph one sh ows infor mation abou t the c hecks bein g carrie d out and you are given option s whether to continue or cancel the installation. Once the ph one has checked th e integrity of the software package, the application is installed on your ph one. Tip: T o send your installation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, sele ct Opti on s â Send log â Via text mes sage or Via e-mail (ava ilable only if the c orr ect e -mail settin gs are in place) . ⢠REMOVE SOFTWARE 1 T o remove a sof tware package, scr oll to it and s elect Opt i on s â Remo ve . 2 Press Ye s to confirm the removal. Impo rtant : If you remove software, you can only re- install it if you have the orig inal sof tware package or a full back -up of the r emo ved software package . If you remove a so ftware package, you may no lo nger be able to ope n doc uments creat ed with th at software. If anoth er software package dep ends on the software package that y ou remo ved, the othe r softw are package may st op wo rkin g. Refer to the documen tation of the installed software package for details. ⢠VIEW MEMORY CONSUMPTION ⢠T o open th e memory vie w select Opt ions â Memor y details. Note: If you have a m emory card installed on your phone, you will ha ve a choice of tw o memory view s, one for the phone or Phone me mory and one f or the Mem ory card . If not, you will on ly have the Ph on e memor y view .
[ 133 ] Manager 16 When you open either of the memory views, the phone calcul ates the amount of free memor y for storin g data and install ing new softw are. In the me mory views, you can view the memor y consu mptio n of the diffe rent data gr oups: Calend ar , Contacts , Docu ments , Mess ages , Images , Sound f iles , Video c lips , Appli cations , Mem. in use , and Free memory . Tip: If the ph one me mory is getting low , remove som e documents, or move them to the memory card. Se e also the â T e chnical informationâ on page 1 68.
[ 134 ] 17 17 Connectivity Note: Y our phone m ust be switched on to use the f unctions in the Con ne ctiv ity fold er . Do not swi tch the ph one on when wireles s phon e u se i s pro hibite d or whe n it may cau se inte rfer ence or d ang er . Y ou can transfer data from your phone to another compatible device, for example, a phon e or a computer , via Bluetooth or infrared. ⢠BLUE TOO TH CONN ECTI ON Go to Menu â Connecti vity â Bluet ooth Bluetooth enables cost-free wireless co nnec tio ns b etw een ele ctr onic de vices w ith in a maximum range of 30 fe et. A Bluetooth connection can be used to send images, texts, bus ine ss car ds, c ale ndar n ot es, o r t o co nnec t wirelessly to Bluetooth en abled devices such as co m put e rs. Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your ph one and the other Bluetooth device do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be with in a maximum of 1 0 m eters of each other , although the connection can be subject to inte rference from obstruc tions such as walls or from other electronic devices. Using Bluetooth consumes the battery and th e phone's opera ting time will be reduced. Take this into accou nt when performi ng other operations with your ph one. There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth devices. C heck with your local au thorities.
[ 135 ] Connectivity 17 Activate the Bluetooth application for the first time When you activate the Bl uetooth application for the first time, you are asked to give a Bluetooth name to your phone. Note: Aft er you ha ve set Bl ueto oth to be active and changed My phon e's visibility to All , your phon e and this name can be seen by oth er Bluetooth device user s. Write a name (ma x. 30 letters ) or us e the default n ame âÂÂNokia 3650â or âÂÂNokia 3600 â . If you se nd da ta vi a Blu et oot h b efo re y ou hav e given an individual Bluetooth name t o your phone, the default n ame will be used. Tip: T o send text via Bluetooth (instead of text messages), go to Notes, write the te xt, an d select Opti ons â Send â via Blu etooth . Bluetooth settings T o modify Bluetooth settings, scroll to th e setting you want to change and press . ⢠Blue tooth - Se lect On if y ou wa nt t o use Bl ue toot h. If yo u se t Bl uet oo th Off all active Bluetooth connections are ended and Bluetooth cannot be used f or sending or r eceiving data. ⢠My p hone's visib ility - If you sele ct Sho wn to all , your phone can be found by other Bluetooth devices during device search. If you select Hidden , your phone ca nnot be found by othe r devices during device se arch. ⢠My Bluetoo th name - Def ine a Blu e t ooth na me for yo ur pho ne. Aft er you have set Bluetooth to be active and chan ge d My phone's visibil ity to Al l , this name can be seen by other Bluetooth device users. Tip: When searching for devices, some Bluetooth devices may show only the unique Blue tooth addresses (device addresses). T o find out what the u nique Bl u etoot h a ddress o f your p hone is , enter the code *# 2820# in s tandby mode.
[ 136 ] 17 Send data via Bl ue tooth Note: There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a tim e. 1 Open an application wh ere th e item you wish to send is stor ed. For exa mple, to send a photo to an other device, open the Images application. 2 Scroll to the item you wan t to send, f or example, a photo and select Optio ns â Send â Via Blu etooth . 3 The phone starts to search for devices within range. Bluetooth en abled devices that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. Y ou can see a device icon, the deviceâÂÂs Bluetooth name, the device type, or a short name. P a ired devices are shown with . Note: If you have searched for Bluetooth devices earlier , a list o f the devices that were found previously is shown first. T o start a new sear ch, select More devices . If you switch off the ph one, the list of devices is cleared and the de vice search needs to be started again before sending data. ⢠To interru pt the search , press Stop . The device list freezes and you can start to form a co nnection to one of the devices already found. 4 Scroll to the device you w an t to con n ect with and pres s Select . The item you are send ing is copied to Outbox an d the note Connecting is shown. 5 P airing (if not re quired by the other d evice, see step 6). Glossary: P airing m eans authent ication. The users of th e Bluetoo th enabled devices should agree on the passcode and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices th at do not have a user interface ha ve a factory set passcode. ⢠If th e other devic e requir es pair ing before data can be transm itted, a tone sounds and you are asked to e nter a passcode.
[ 137 ] Connectivity 17 ⢠Create your own passc ode (1-16 c haract ers long , numeric) a nd ag ree with the owne r of the ot her Bluet ooth de vice to use the sam e code. This passcod e i s used only o nc e and you do n ot have to mem orize it. ⢠After pairing, the device is saved to th e P aire d devices vie w . 6 When the connection h as been successf u lly e stablishe d, the note Sendi ng data is sh own. Note: Data received via B luetooth can be found in the Inbox folder in Messagin g . See page 83 for further information. Note: If sending fails, the message or data will be deleted. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent via Blu etooth. Check the status of the Bl uetooth connection ⢠When is shown in standby mode, Bluetooth is active. ⢠When is bl inking, your phone is tr ying to connec t to the other d evice. ⢠When is shown con tinuously , the Bluetooth con nection is active. P aired dev ices view Optio ns in the paired de vices vi ew are: New paired d evice , Conne ct / D i s c o n n e c t , As sign shor t name, Delete, Delete al l, Set as authorized / Set as unautho rized, Help, and Exit . P a iring with a device m akes devi ce search es easier and quic ker . P aired dev ices are eas ier to rec ogn ize, the y are in dica te d by in th e sear ch res ult li st. In the Blu etooth main vie w , pre ss to ope n a list of pai red devic es ( ). Icon s for di fferen t Blueto oth de vices Com put e r Pho ne Other Unknown
[ 138 ] 17 PA I R W I T H A D E V I C E 1 Sel ec t Options â New paire d dev ice in the P aired devic es vie w . The p hone starts to search for devices w ithin range. Or , if you have searched for Bluetooth device s earlier , a list of the devices that were found previously is show n first. T o start a new sea rch, select More d evice s . 2 Scroll to the device you wan t to pair with and press Select . 3 Exchange passcodes, see step 5 (P airing) in the previous section. The device is added to the P a ired devices l ist. Tip: Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games via Bluetooth. CANC EL P AIR ING ⢠In the P aired devices view , scroll to the device w hose pairing you want to cancel and press or sele ct Opt io ns â Delete . The device is removed from the P aired devices list and the pairing is cancelled. ⢠If you want to cancel all pairings, select Opti on s â Delete all . Note: If you are currently connected to a device an d delete the pair ing with that de vice, pairin g is remove d immedi ately but the conn ection will remain active. ASSIG N SHORT NAMES FOR PAIRED DEVICES Y ou can define a short name (nickname, alias) , to help you recognize a certain device. T his name is stored in the phone memory and cannot be seen by oth er Bluetooth device users. Example: Give a short name to your friendâÂÂs Bluetooth e nabled device or to yo ur own c omputer t o be able to recog nize it more e a sily . T o assign a short name, scroll to the device and select Opt ions â Ass i gn shor t name . W rite the short name and pre ss OK . Note: Choose a name wh ich is easy to remember an d recognize. Later wh en you are searchin g for devices or a device i s requestin g a conn ection, the name you have chosen will be u sed to identify the de vice.
[ 139 ] Connectivity 17 SET A DEVICE TO BE AUTHOR IZED OR UNAUTHOR IZED After you have paired with a device, you can set it to be authorized or unauthorized: Unautho rized (default) - Connection requests from this de vice need to be accepted separatel y every time. Autho rized - Connections between your phone and this d evice can be made w ithout your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorization is needed. Use this status for your own de vices, for example, your PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. The icon i s added next to authorized devices in t he P aired devices view . In the P aired devices view , scroll to the device and select Opti ons â Set as autho rized / Set a s u nau th or iz e d . Receive data via Bluetooth When you re ceive data v ia Blue tooth, a tone sounds an d you are asked if you want t o accept th e Bl uetooth message. If y ou accept, is shown and the it em is placed in the I nbox fo lder in Messagin g. Bluet ooth message s are indic ated by . See page 83 for fur ther info rmati on. Disconnect Bluetooth A Bluetooth c onnection is dis connected automatically after sending or receiving data. ⢠INFRARE D CONNECTIO N T o start infrared, go to Menu â Conn ectivity â Inf rared . Via in frared, you can send or receive data such as busin ess cards and calendar n otes to an d from a com patible phone or data device. Do not point the I R (infrared) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with other IR devices. T his device is a Class 1 Laser product.
[ 140 ] 17 Send and receive data via infrared Note: All items which are recei ved via infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. New infrared messages are indicated by . Se e page 83 for fu rthe r infor mat ion. 1 Make sure that th e infrared ports of the sending an d receivin g devices are pointing at each other and that th ere are no obstruction s betwe en the devices. The pref erable distance be tween th e two devices is one meter at most. To f ind the i nfrare d port, see the pictur e of th e differen t keys in the Ge neral information section o f this guide. 2 The user of th e receiving device activates the infrared port. T o activate t he i nfrared port of you r phon e to receive d ata via infra red, go to Men u â Connecti vity â Infrar ed and press . 3 The user of th e sending device selects the desir ed infrared function to start data tran sfer . T o send data via infrared, s elect Opti ons â Sen d â via inf rared in an application. If data transfer is not started within two minutes after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be sta rted again. Tip: Y ou can also play phone-to-phone games via infrared. Example: T o send a contact card via infr ared: (1) Ask the receiver to activate the infrared port in his/her device. (2) Go to Contacts, scroll to a card and select Opti ons â Sen d â via inf rared . Note: Windows 2000: To be able to use infrared to transfer files between your Nokia 3600 series phone and a compatible computer , go to âÂÂC o n tr o l P anelâ and select âÂÂWireless Linkâ . In the âÂÂWireless Linkâ â File T ra ns f er â tab check the âÂÂAllow othersâ to send files to your computer u sing infrared. Check the status of th e infrared connect ion ⢠When blinks, your phone is trying to connect to the other device or a connection has been lost. ⢠When is shown cont inuously , the infrared connection is active and your phone i s ready to send and receive data via its infrared port.
[ 14 1 ] Connectivity 17 ⢠CONNECT YOUR PHONE T O A COMPUTER For further information on how to m ake a connection to a com patible computer via infrared or Bluetooth an d how to insta ll the PC Suite for Nokia 36 50 or PC Suit e f or 3600, see the Installation Guide for PC Suite on th e CD -ROM in th e âÂÂSoftware f or PCâ section. For further information on how to use the PC Su ite for Nokia 36 50 or PC Su ite for 3600, see the PC suite on line h elp . Use the CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch itself after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of your com patible PC. I f not, proceed as f ollows: 1 Clic k th e Wind ow Start but ton and se lect Programs â Windo ws Ex plor er . 2 On the CD-ROM dr ive, locate a f ile called Nokia3650 .exe or Nokia3600 .exe and double- click it. The CD- ROM i nterface opens. 3 Y ou can find PC Suite for Nokia 365 0 or PC Su ite for 3600 in th e âÂÂSoftware for P Câ section. Dou ble-click âÂÂPC Suite f or Nokia 3650 â or âÂÂPC Suite for 360 0â . The installation wizard will guide you through the installation process. ⢠USE YOUR PHON E AS A MODEM TO CONNECT TO THE INTERNET OR TO SEND OR R ECEIVE FAXES Detaile d in stallation inst ruction s can be fo und in Quic k guide fo r Modem Options fo r Nokia 3650 or Quick Gu ide for M odem Opti ons for Nokia 3600 on the CD- ROM sup plied w ith the phone.
[ 142 ] 18 18 PC Suite for Nokia 3600 series Ple ase refe r to other section s of this us er guide for i nstructi ons on operation, care, and maintenance, including important safety i nformation . This section explain s how to install PC Suite for N okia 360 0 series phones on a com patible PC, how to connect your phone to the PC, a n d h ow to sta r t u sing PC Suite . For mor e detai led in formati on on the use of PC Sui te, pl ease refer to th e online help of the PC Suite applications. With PC Suite f or Nokia 3650 or PC S uite for Nokia 3 600 you can: ⢠Share information betwe en your PC and phone. ⢠Make bac k-up copies of the phone files to protect data in case of loss or damage. ⢠Synchronize your calendar , contacts, an d tasks with Microsoft a nd Lotus a pp lications. ⢠Copy and move files betw een your PC and phone. ⢠Copy contacts and ca lendar information f rom another Nokia m obile phone, Nokia communicator , or P alm device to your Nokia 3600 series phone. ⢠Configure phone settings. ⢠Install software on your ph one. ⢠SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS T o install and r un PC Suite, you nee d: ⢠a compatible PC running Windows 9 8, Windows ME, Windows 2 000 with Serv ice P ack 2, or Windows XP . ⢠at least 1 1 0 MB of free disk space. To connec t you r Nokia 3600 s eries ph one to th e PC, yo u ne ed t o have: ⢠an infrared connection: an infrared port on th e computer , or ⢠a Bluetooth connect io n: a Bluetooth card an d the required software, or built-in support for Bluetooth on the PC. To be able to connect your Nokia 36 00 seri es phone to you r PC, the Bluet ooth sof tware ne eds to su ppor t the Serial P ort Profile (SPP).
[ 143 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 ⢠INSTA LL PC SUITE PC Suite for Nokia 3600 series is in the âÂÂInstallâ section of th e CD-ROM include d in th e PC Sui te for N okia 3600 series package. T he CD -ROM shou ld launch aut oma tically af ter you have inserted it into the CD-R OM drive of your PC. If not, proceed as foll ows: 1 Click the Window s Start button, poin t to Programs , and select Windo ws Explor er . 2 Go to the CD-R OM root di recto ry and do uble-cl ick the Nokia3 650.exe or N ok ia3600 .exe file . The CD-R OM us er in terfa ce o pens. When the CD-ROM interface is ope n, proceed as follows: 1 Click Inst all . 2 Select Install now and click PC Su ite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 . 3 Select the language f or the installation and click Next to start the installation wizard. This wiz ard will guide you through the installation process. Generally , it is r ecommended that you a ccept the suggested destination f olde r a nd program folder . Note: In t he Data Import dialog box, make su re that th e Insta ll the Nokia Connectivity SDK check box is selecte d if you want to transfer calendar and con tacts data fro m another Nokia mobile phone to your Nokia 3600 series phone. If you do not insta ll the Nokia Connectivity SDK component, y ou can tran sfer data only f rom the Nokia 9 1 1 0 Com municato r , a P alm device , a Noki a 7650 or anoth er Nokia 360 0 series phone to your Nokia 3600 series phone. Note: In t he File Trans fer Video and Audi o Converters dialog box it is re comm ende d t hat yo u le ave th e Insta ll Video an d Audio Conver ters check box se l ected. When t he co nverters are insta lle d, video and audio format files that you copy from the PC to you r Nokia 3600 series phone are automatically converted to the video and audio format used by the phone. If y ou do not ha ve the C D-R OM: 1 Download the installa tion file (setup.ex e).
[ 144 ] 18 2 Go to the dire ctory wher e you downloaded the file an d double-click it. 3 Follow the instructions on the screen. ⢠CONNECT YOUR PHONE TO THE PC When you use PC Suit e for the first time , y ou mu st connect yo ur Nokia 3600 serie s phon e t o the PC. Th ereaf ter , you can u se P C S uite whet he r or not your ph one is connected to your PC. Y ou can conn ect your phone to the PC via an infrared or Bl uetoot h conne ction . See the Conn ecting y our No kia 365 0 t o a PC an d Disconnecting and r e c o n n e c t i n g your No kia 365 0 or Connect ing your Noki a 3600 to a PC and Diconnecting and r econnecting your Nokia 36 00 online help topics for details. Note: When you co nnec t your N oki a 3600 s erie s phon e to your PC, PC Suite automatically synchronizes the clock on the Nokia 3600 seri es phone with the PC. There fore, you nee d to ma ke sure that the clock on your PC is correct. Tip: Check the icons on the taskbar to see the connection status. T he connection icon changes to when your phone is connected to the PC. Use an infrare d connection 1 Check that an infrared driver is already installed on the PC. G o to the Windows Cont rol P anel . If th e Inf rared icon is visible, the driver has been in stalled. Also check that in frared is en abled on the PC. Note that in Windows 2000 the infrared con nection is called Wireless Link . Note: T o be able to use an in frared connection w ith Windows 200 0, you must first disable the Image Tran sfer application in the Wireles s Link software . 2 Double-click the PC Suite Connection icon on the taskbar to open the Conne ction Pro perties dialog box. Make sure that the correct COM port is selected for the infrare d connection. If no port is selected, select the COM port with infrar e d as the connection type. Note that you can select more than one C OM port.
[ 145 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 Note: If you cannot sele ct the port you w ant to use, another PC appli cation is using that port. T o use PC Suite with that port, you must either close the other application or disable it temporarily . 3 Make sure tha t the infrared port of th e phone faces the infra red port of the PC an d that they are w ithin range of each other . 4 Activate the infrared connection of your phone. Go to Menu, open the Connectivity folder , and select Infrared. Use a Bluetooth c onnection Note: Before you can co nnect yo ur Noki a 3600 seri es p hone to the PC via Bluetooth for the first time, you must have provided a nam e for your phone to be used in a Bluetooth connectio n. For instructions on giving a name to your phone, see âÂÂActiva te the Bluetooth a pplication for th e firs t timeâ on page 135. Make sure that Blu etooth is activ ated on the phone to make your Nokia 3600 series phone discoverable a nd connectabl e. Go to Connectiv ity and sel ect Bluetooth . Then sel ect Bl uetoot h On . T o make your phone discoverable, change My phon eâ s v i s i b i l i t y to Shown to all in the Bl uet oo th menu. T o establish a Bluetooth connection: 1 Make sure th at a Blue tooth card is inserted in the PC card or CompactFlash (CF ) slot and that the software provided w ith the Bluetooth card is installed on the PC, or che ck that your PC includes built-in support for Blu e tooth. A serial port profile must exist for the Bluetooth card on the PC. For fur ther information, see the user documentation provided wi th the B luetooth card or PC. 2 Establish a serial port connection betw een your N okia 3600 series phone and your PC . For in formation on how to do this, refer to the user documen tation of the B luetooth software. 3 Double-click the PC Suite Connection icon on the taskbar to open the Connect ion Properties dialog box. M ake sure that th e correc t port is selected for the Bluetooth connection. If no port is selected, select the COM port with B luetooth as the connection type. Note that you can select more than one COM port.
[ 146 ] 18 Note: If you cannot select the port you wan t to use, another PC application is using that port. T o use PC Suite with that port, you must either close the other application or disable it temporarily . 4 If y ou ar e conn ect ing yo ur N oki a 36 00 se ries phone to your PC us ing a Bluetooth con nection for the first time , you need to pair the devices. T o pair th e device s, you need to en ter a passcode in both devices. Create your o wn passcode (1-1 6 character s long, n umeric) and ent er the same passcode in both the phone and the PC when reque sted. This pas scode is used only once and you do not need to memorize it. For further information, refe r to âÂÂConne ctivityâ on page 134 . 5 Auth orize th e connec tion b etween your N okia 3600 series phone and yo ur P C. Sele ct Ye s when a connection request appears on the phoneâÂÂs display . Y ou can s e t you r PC as a uthorize d, w hich m eans that the c on n e ct i o n bet ween yo ur phone a nd yo ur PC i s made w ithout s epara te a u t ho r i z at io n. T o do this, go to the P aire d devi ces view on your phone, scroll to th e device, and s elect Opti ons . Select Set as autho rized . Since Bluetooth devices communicate using radio waves, your phone and the other Bluetooth devic e do not n eed to be in line of sight. The two devices only need to b e within a maximum of abo ut 30 feet (1 0 meters) of each ot her , although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from othe r electronic devices. There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth devices. C heck with your local au thorities. The Bluetooth connection does not close automa tically . Y ou must close it from the B luetooth software on your PC. C lose the Bluetooth connection when you stop us ing PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Su ite for Nokia 3600 in online mode. Tip: Y ou c an find the o nline help from the Windows Start button. P oint to Progr ams and select PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for 3600 an d PC Suite for 3650 Help or PC Suite for 3600 Help.
[ 147 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 Note: If you h ave prob lems connecting you r phone to the PC, check to see if both your Nokia 3600 ser ies phone and your PC are switched on and th at you h ave selected the corr ect communications port. Se e th e Connecting your Nokia 3650 to a PC and Disconnecting and reconnecting y our Nokia 3 650 or Conn ecting your Nokia 36 00 to a PC an d Disconnecting and reconnecting your Nokia 3600 onl ine help topics for details. ⢠START TO USE PC SUI TE Y ou can start PC Suite from the Start menu: click the Start button, select Prog rams and point to PC Suit e for Nok ia 365 0 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 , and then click PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 . If you are connecting your phone to the PC for th e first time, after starting PC Suite you are asked to do two things: ⢠Name your phone. Y o u can use more than one Nokia 3 600 series ph one with PC Suit e. T o be able t o identify in dividual p hones, you must give a name to you r phone. ⢠Select tasks to be created. T o be ab le to back up and syn chron ize inf ormat ion bet ween yo ur Noki a 3600 series phone and PC, you must have the appropriate tasks create d. During the f irst connection, PC Suite lists tasks that can be cr eated aut omati cally . Y ou do not h ave to c rea te the s e ta sks a t th is poi nt, if you do n ot wa nt to . How eve r , if you c rea te the tas ks, you can e dit t he m lat er . T o create these tasks, proceed as follows: 1 When the first connection is established, the W elcome to PC Suite f or Nokia 3650 or W elcome to PC Suite for Nokia 3600 dialog box appears. T ype a name for your phone in the box and click OK . 2 Next, you will be asked for tasks that you want to perform w ith PC Suite. In t he Create T asks dialog box, sele ct the tasks th at you want PC Suite to create and click OK . Y ou can edit these tasks later , if you want. Note: Making or answering ph one calls during a PC connection is not recommended. I t might disrupt operation. Tip: The folders o n your PC that con tain information about you r phone will also be nam ed accor ding to the name you give your phon e at this poin t.
[ 148 ] 18 ⢠O NLINE AND OFFLINE MODES Y ou ca n use PC Suite either in online mode or in offline mode. Y ou have the following options: ⢠W ork online - Connect your phone to th e PC and let PC Sui te identify it. In onl ine mode your phone i s connected to your compatible PC, and you can wor k with the in formation store d on the ph one. ⢠W ork offline - L eave your phone dis conne cted an d choose the na me of your phone from a list of n amed devices. The menus and other available option s in offline m ode differ from those of online m ode. ⢠CON NE CT IO N S TA T US The icon on the right-hand side of the status bar and on the Windows taskbar displays the connection status as foll ows: ⢠D i s c o n n e c t e d ⢠C o n n e c t e d ⢠T ransferring data (ani ma ted icon)
[ 149 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 ⢠MAIN WINDOW INFORMATION The m ain windo w of P C Su ite di spla ys t he fol lowing i nform atio n and contr ols : application bar toolbar shortcuts for menu commands menu commands the name of the application that is cur ren tly op en information about the selected command the na me of the connected phone connection sta tus
[ 150 ] 18 ⢠PC SUITE APPLICATIONS A number o f icons are displayed on the left-hand side of the PC Suite window - th is area is known as the application bar . T o use an application, click its icon . For informat i on on u sing an application , see the online h el p. Backup/Restore With Backup/Restore, you can b ack up information on your phon e. If you ever lose information from your Nokia 3600 series ph one (for example, through ac cidental deletion), or need to refer to an earlier , backed up version, you can r e store it to your phone. Backup/Restore supports Memory cards. Note: Operator logos, ringing tone s (polyphonic ringing tones (M IDI) and si ng le t on es) a n d Ja va -ap pli ca tio ns th at yo u ha ve i nsta lle d on you r Nokia 3600 series phone after you first star ted u sing it are n ot saved durin g ba ck up. T heref ore thes e it ems can not be rest ore d. Only the original No k ia 3 6 00 s er i es r i ng i n g t o n es a re sa ve d . Control P anel Y ou can use Con trol P anel to change some of the gener al settings of PC Suite. The following features are included in Control P anel: ⢠Connect ion enables y ou to specify the port that PC Suite uses when attempting to connect to a ph one. ⢠Data Locatio n enables you to specify where you want to store backups and synchronization files. ⢠Devi ce Ma nager enables you to see which phones have be en connected to your PC, and to remove details of phones that you no longer want to connect. Impo rtant : Y ou cannot restore information that you have removed us ing Device Manager . ⢠File T ransfer C onv erters enables yo u to sel ect which, i f any , video and audio conver ters are used w hen files are copied to the ph one using File T ransfer .
[ 15 1 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 Data Import With Data Import, you can transfer contacts an d calendar dat a to your Nokia 3600 seri es phone from the Nokia 3320, Nokia 3360, Nok ia 3600, Nokia 3650, No kia 62 1 0 , N oki a 62 50, N ok i a 6 3 1 0, No ki a 63 10i, Noki a 6 320 , No kia 6340, Noki a 6340i, N okia 636 0, Nokia 6 37 0, Noki a 6385, N okia 65 1 0, N oki a 659 0, Nokia 66 1 0, Nokia 6650, Nokia 7 1 1 0, Nokia 7 160, Nokia 7 190, Noki a 721 0, Nokia 7 650, N okia 82 1 0, N okia 8290, Nokia 83 1 0, No kia 83 90, Nokia 88 1 0, No kia 8850 , Nokia 8890, No kia 89 1 0 , Nokia 9 1 1 0 Commu nicato r , or P alm device. Synchronize With Synchronize, you can s ynchronize your phone contacts and calendar data with Microsoft and Lotus applications. T o be able to syn chron ize, yo u must hav e tasks cre ated for syn chroniz ation. When you connect your Nokia 3600 series phone to your PC for the first ti me , PC Suite i dentifies your phone and c reates a n umber of task s. Y ou can modify these tasks and create othe r tasks i f you w ant. Y ou can also sch edule tasks to be run at regular intervals, every time you connect your phone to your PC, or on command only . An animated icon appears on the Windows taskbar when synchronization is in progress: Synchronizing your phone with the PC (animated icon). File T r ansfer With Fi le T ransfer , you c an copy fil es betw een your phone a nd your PC, as well as delet e and rena me sele cted f iles. With the Multimed ia conve rters, video and audio format files that you cop y from the PC to your Nokia 3600 series ph on e are au tom atica lly co nvert ed to th e video and au dio for mat u sed by th e phone. Image T ra nsfer With Image Transfer , you can copy , move, r ename, and delete im age files on your phone and your PC. Y ou c an also view image files if there is an associat ed view er application.
[ 152 ] 18 Settings wizard With th e Settings wizard, you can configure the e- mail account, rem ote connection, message center , and multim edia message center settings of your phone. For example, you can manage settings m anually or copy a working configuration from th e PC to th e phone . Y o u can al so back up your phone s ettings to a f ile. Install software on your phone With PC Suite, you can install Java  and device software on your phone. These applications do n ot have an icon on th e application bar . I nstead, you can star t these application s from the To o l s menu. See the Inst alling d evice softwa re online help topic f or details. Note: Installation pa ckages can be received in a multimedia message, as an e-mail at tachment , via Bluetooth, or via infr ared and downloaded to your phone. If you are using PC Suite to transfer the file, save it to the c:\ nokia \ins ta lls folder . Note: Y ou can only use Java installation files with the ex tension .JAD or .JAR, and device software installation files with the extension .SIS. Impo rtant : Only install software from sources that off er adequate protection against viruses and other harmful software. ⢠REMOVE PC SUITE FR OM YOUR PC Uninstalling PC Suite removes all files and fold ers that were added by the PC Suite i nstallati on pr ogram, b ut does n ot rem ove backed- up and arch ived files or synch roniz ation inf ormation . Theref ore, if you reinstall PC Suite you can back u p, restor e , and synchronize using th e same settings a s before. Note: If you want to remove backe d-up f iles, synch roniz ations, and other information relating t o th e phone s you h ave connected, you must do this before rem oving PC Suite. For further information, see the Viewing and remov ing details of a Nokia 3650 or Viewing an d remo ving details of a Nokia 3 600 online help topics.
[ 153 ] PC Suite fo r Nokia 360 0 series 18 T o remove PC Suite, proceed as follows: 1 Click the Window s Start button, point to Settings , and click Control P anel . 2 Double-click Add/R emove Pr ogram s . 3 Select PC S uite for N o kia 36 50 or PC Sui te for 36 00 from th e list of inst alled program s. Cli ck Add/R em o ve . A con firmation di alog box opens. 4 After confirming th at you want to remove PC Suite f rom your PC, the uninstall program removes the program files an d informs you that you need to resta rt your PC to complete the uninstall process. When your PC r estarts, the uninstall program completes th e r emoval of PC Suite from your PC. Note: Uninstal ling PC Su ite doe s not remove th e Noki a Connecti vity SDK. Y ou can remove the Nok ia Conne ctivity S DK from your P C using the Add/Remove Progr ams application of the W indows Control P a nel. The uni nstall pro gram leav es some files on your P C that contain inf ormation about the Nokia devices you have connected to your PC. I f you decide to reinstall PC Suite, you will be able to continue using PC Suite as before. Important safety notes All the safety instr uctions in the us e r guides of your phone and computer also a pply when this product i s u sed with the phone. Remember to make back-up copies of all important data to protect against pos sible loss or alteration.
[ 154 ] 19 19 Reference informatio n ⢠BAT TERY STATEM ENTS Charging and Discharging Y our phone is pow ered by a rechargeable battery . Note that a new batter y's full per formance is achieved only after tw o or three complete charge and discharge cycles! The battery can be ch arged and discharged h undreds of times but it will eventu ally wear ou t. Whe n the oper ating time (tal k-tim e and stan dby tim e) is noticeably shorter than normal, it is tim e to buy a new battery . Use only batte ries appr oved by the phone ma nufac turer and recharge your battery only with the charger s approved by the manufacture r . Unpl ug the charger w hen not in use. Do not leave the ba ttery connected to a charger for longer than a w eek, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused a fully charged battery wil l discharge itself over tim e. T emperature extremes can affect the ability of your batter y to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use an y charger or ba ttery that is dam aged. Do not short-circu it the battery . Accidental short-circu iting can occur when a metallic o bject (coin , clip or pen) causes direct connection of the and - terminals of the battery (metal s trips on the batte ry) f or exam ple when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- cir cuiting the terminals ma y damage the battery or the con necting obje ct. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery between 1 5ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A phone w ith a hot or cold battery may temporarily not w ork, even wh en the batt e ry is fully charged. Batteries' performance is particularly limited in temperatures w ell below fr eezing. Do not dispose of batter ies in a fire !
[ 155 ] Referen ce information 19 Dispose of b atteries accordin g to local regulations (e.g. recyclin g). Do not dispose as household waste. Remove th e battery on ly when the phone i s switched off. ⢠USE PROPER CARE AND MAINTENANCE Y our phone is a product of su pe rior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions below w ill help you to f ulfill any warranty obligations and to enjoy this product for many year s. ⢠K ee p the phone and all its parts and accessories out of the reach of small children. ⢠K ee p the phone dry . Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that wil l corrode electr onic circuits. ⢠Do not use or store the phone in du sty , dirty areas. Its m oving parts can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the phone in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, an d warp or melt cert ain plastic s. ⢠Do not store the phone in cold areas. When it war ms up (to its normal tempe rature), moistu re can for m inside , wh ich ma y damage elect roni c ci rcu it boa rds . ⢠Do n ot attempt to ope n the phon e. Non-ex pert han dling may damage it. ⢠Do not drop, kn ock or shake the ph one. Rough handl ing can break internal circuit boards. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the phone. ⢠Do not pa int the phone. P aint can clog the moving par ts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use on ly the s upplie d or an ap proved r epl aceme nt ante nna. Una uth oriz ed antennas, modification s or attachments could damage the phone and may violate regulations governing radio device s.
[ 156 ] 19 All of th e above sug ge stion s apply equally to y our phone, battery , charger or any accesso ry . If any of th em i s not wo rkin g pro perly , take i t to y our neare st qualif ied ser vice facil ity . The p erson nel ther e will assist you and, if necessar y , arra nge for se rvic e. ⢠UNDERSTAND IMPORT ANT SAFETY INFORMATION T raffic Safety Do not us e a hand-he ld telephone while driving a vehicle. Always secure the phone in its holder; do not place the phone on th e passenger seat or where it can break loose in a collision or sudden stop. Rememb er ro ad s afe ty alway s comes fir st! Operating environment Remembe r to foll ow any spe cial regu lation s in force in any area and alw ays switch off you r phone wh enever it is forbidden to use it, or wh en it m ay cause in terferen ce or da nger . Use the phone only in its normal oper ating positions. P arts of the ph one are m agnet ic. Metalli c material s may be attracte d to the phone, and persons with a hearing aid should not h old the phone to t he ear with the hearing ai d. Always secure the phone in its holder , because metallic materials may be attracted by th e earpiece. Do n ot place credit ca rds or o ther mag netic st ora ge m edi a ne ar t he phon e, be cau se inf orm ati on stored on them may be erased. Electronic devices Most modern electronic equ i pment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However , ce rtain el ect ronic eq uipmen t may n ot be shie lded again st the RF signals from your wireless ph one. PA C E M A K E R S P acemaker m anufacturers recom mend that a minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) be maintained between a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid pote ntial interference w ith the pacem aker . These recommendations are consistent w ith the indepe ndent research by and recom mendatio ns of Wire less Technolo gy Re searc h. P er sons wit h pace make rs:
[ 157 ] Referen ce information 19 ⢠Should always keep the phone more than 20 cm (8 inches) from their pacemaker when the phone is s w itched on; ⢠Should not carry the phone in a bre ast pocket; ⢠Should use the ear opposite th e pacemaker to minimize the potential fo r interfer ence. ⢠If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, switch off your phone immediately . HE ARI NG AI DS Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such inter ference, you m ay want to consult your serv ice provider . Other medical de vices Operation of a ny radio transmitting equipment, including cellu lar phones, may interfere with the f unctionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine i f it is adequ ately shielde d from ex ternal RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off you r phone in health care facilities whe n any regulatio ns posted in th ese areas instru ct you to do so. Hospitals or health car e facilities may be using equipment that c ou ld be sen sitive to extern al RF ener gy . V ehicles RF signal s m ay a ffect improper ly installed or inadequately s hielded electron ic systems in motor vehicles (e .g. electronic fuel injectio n systems, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems). Check with th e manufacturer or its representative re garding your vehicle. Y ou sh ould also consult th e manufacturer of a ny equipment that has been ad ded to your veh icle. P osted facilities Switch your phone off in an y facility where posted notices s o require.
[ 158 ] 19 P otentially explosive atmospheres Switch off your phone when in any area w ith a potentially explosive atmosphe re and obey all s igns and in structions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fi re resulting in bodily injury or even de ath. Users are advised to switch of f the phone w hen at a refuelin g point (service station). Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of r adio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas), chemical plants or whe re blasting operations are in pr ogress. Areas with a potentially ex plosive atmosph e re are often but n ot always clearly marked. T hey include be low deck on boats; chemical transfer or storage facilities; vehicles using liquified petroleum gas ( su ch as propane or butan e); areas wh e re the a i r contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, d ust or metal p owders; and any oth er are a where you woul d norm ally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. V ehicles Only qualified personnel should ser vice the ph one, or install the phon e in a v ehicle. F a ulty installat ion or s ervice may be dangerous and may inva lidate any warr anty which may apply to th e unit. Check regularly tha t all wireless phone equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating prope rly . Do not s tore or carry flammable liq uids, gases or explosive materials in the same compartment as the ph one, its parts or accessor i es. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag inflates with great force. Do not place obje cts, including both installed or portable wirele ss eq uipmen t in the ar ea ove r the air bag or in t he air b ag de ploym ent area. If in-vehicle w ireless equipment is im properly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could r esult. Aircraft Using your ph one wh ile in the air is prohibited. Sw itch your phone off before boarding an aircraf t. The use of wireless telephones in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operati on of the aircraf t, disrupt the wire less telephone network and may be i llegal.
[ 159 ] Referen ce information 19 F ailure to observe th ese instructions may lead to suspension or d enial of telephone services to th e offender , or legal action or both. Emergency calls Impo rtant : This phone, lik e any wire less phone, o perates usin g radio signals, wireless, and landline n etworks as well as user-programed functions. Because of this, connections in all con ditions cannot be guaranteed. T herefore you should n ever rely solel y upon an y wireless phone for essential communications ( for exampl e, medica l emer gencies ). Emergency calls m ay not be possible on all wireless phone networks or when certain network services and/or phone features are in u se. Check with local servi ce providers. T o make an emergency call: 1 If the phone is n ot on, switch i t on. Che ck for ade quate si gnal str ength. Some networks ma y require that a valid S IM card is properly in serted in the phone. 2 Pre ss a s many times as need ed (e .g. to exit a cal l, to exi t a me nu, etc.) to clear the display and ready the phone for calls. 3 K ey in the emergency number for your present location (e.g. 9 1 1 or other official emergency number). Emergency n umbers vary by location. 4 Press the key . If certai n featu res are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide an d your local cellular service pr ovider . When making a n emergen cy ca ll, remember to give all th e necessary information as accurately as possible. Rem ember that your wireless phone may be the onl y means of communication at the scen e of an accident - do not cut off th e call until given permission to do so.
[ 160 ] 19 ⢠CERTIFICA TION INFORMATION (SAR) THIS MODEL PHONE MEET S GOVERNMENT REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO R A D I O WAV E S Y our mobile phon e is a radio tr ansmitter and receiver . It is designed and manufactu red not to exce ed the limits f or ex posure t o radio frequ ency (RF) energy set by I ndustry Can ada. These limits are part of com prehensive guidelines and establish pe rmitted levels of RF e nergy for the general population. The guidelines are based on st andards that wer e d eveloped by independen t scientific organisations throug h per iodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The guidelines in clude a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR l imit set by the Industry Canada is 1.6 W/kg* T ests for SAR are conducted u sing standar d operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power leve l in all tested fre quen cy bands. Alth ough the SAR is deter mine d at the high est certified pow er level, the actual SAR of the p hone while oper ating c an be we ll be low th e m aximu m value . Th is is be cause th e pho ne is designed to operate at multiple pow er levels so as to use on ly the pow er required to reach the n etwork. I n general, th e clo ser you are to a base station, the low er the powe r output of the phon e. Before a phone model is a vailable for sale to th e public, compliance with the Canadia n Standard must be shown. The follo wing value s are t he hig hest SAR values for these phone mode ls wh en test ed fo r use a t the ea r and w orn on t he b ody , as d escrib ed in th is use r guid e: (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and Industry Canada requirements). Phone mod el FCC ID# Ear SAR value B ody worn SA R value Nokia 3600 QF XNHM- 1 0 0.7 0 W/kg 1.27 W/k g Nokia 3650 QF XNHL- 8 0.55 W/k g 0.8 3 W/kg
[ 16 1 ] Referen ce information 19 While there may be differe nces between the SAR le vels of various ph on es and at various positions, they al l meet the gove rnment requiremen t for RF exposure. * The SAR li mit for mobile phones u sed by the public is 1.6 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of body tissue. The standard incorporates a substan tial margin of s af ety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any va riations in mea surem ents. SAR va lues may vary depending on national r e porting requirements and th e network band. For SAR information in other region s please look under product information at www . nok ia.com .
[ 162 ] 19 ⢠USE ACCESSORIES SAFELY A f e w practic al rules for a ccessory operation: ⢠K ee p all accessories out of th e reach of small children . ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of a ny accessory , gras p and pull the plug, n o t th e cor d. ⢠Check regularly th at any vehicle-installed accessories ar e mounted and are operating properly . ⢠Installation of any complex car a ccessories mus t be made by qu alified personnel onl y . ⢠Use only batteries, char gers, and accessories that have been appr oved by the phone manufacturer . The use of an y other types could invalidate any app r oval or warranty a pplying to th e phone and c ould be dang erous. ⢠ACCESSORIES Original Nokia acce ssories ensure the best possible operati on o f your Nokia mobile phone in v a rious conditions. Specifications are s ubject to change without notice. The availability of particular products a nd services may vary by region. Please check with the Nokia de aler neare st y ou. Operations an d some fe atures are network depen dent. N okia enh ancem ent s enable the be st possible oper ation of yo ur Nokia 3 600 series mobile phon e in various conditions. V ariation in operation times will occ ur dep ending on SIM card, network and usage settin gs, usage style and environments. Please check the availability of W A P services with yo ur n etwork op erator and/or WAP servic e provi der . The availabil ity of Bluetoot h wir eless tec hnology ma y vary by country an d Blue tooth prod ucts are not a pproved for use ever ywhere. Please check with the loca l authorities.
[ 163 ] Referen ce information 19 Audio accessorie s WIREL ESS HEADSET HDW-2 The Nok ia Wire less Heads et HDW-2 is designed with Bluetooth technology and is compatible with Nokia 3600 series phones and phones supporting the Bluetooth 1.1 specification and Headset or Handsfree p rofiles. The compact headset g ives h and s-fr ee c on tro l of your phon e wi thou t ca bl es o r wir es . Th e ea rpie ce f its in ei ther ear al low ing for c onven ient and disc reet access to all basic call controls. Then Answer/ End button lets you answer and make calls, r edial, and switch the audio back and forth between the handset and headset. A separate volume control lets you change the call volume as necessary while m oving from place to place. T o maximize ca ll securit y , the he adset al so suppo rts encyrptio n of the w i reless connection for com patible phone models. HEADSET HDE-2 The HDE-2 headset is a small and lightweight portable headset for easy handsfree operation. It has a clip to hold the h eadset firmly in pla ce. HEADSET HDC-5 The HDC-5 he adset, with a r emote button, connects directly to the phone. No extra adaptor is required, and the remote con trol is provided. DUA L HEADS ET HDD- 1 The HDD-1 Dual Headset pr ovides comfortable handsfree ope ration with a remote control bu tton for answering and ending calls.
[ 164 ] 19 RETRA CTABLE HEAD SET HDC-1 0 The HD C-1 0 Retractable Head set is a compac t headset with a retractable mechanism and remote control. BOOM H E ADS ET H D B-5 HDB-5 Head set pr ovides h andsfree functiona lity and a new âÂÂover th e earâ concept providing excellent audio quality . Battery The 850 m Ah, Li-Ion based BL-5C battery provides power in a thin an d light package. It provides a talk tim e of u p to 2- 4 hour s and up to 15 0-20 0 ho urs standby time. Charging time is one hour and 35 min utes . V ariation in oper ation times will occur depe nding on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environments. Ta lk time is reduced by 5 perc ent if Enhanced Full Rate is active, and incre ased by up to 3 0% if Half Rate is active. Charge rs Y our Nok ia 3600 ser ies pho ne uses t he A CP -1 2U standard charger and mobile char gers LCH-9 and LCH-12. The LC H-12 Cigarette Lighter charger can be used with 12 V dc o r 2 4 V dc. T he 3600 se ries pho ne is a lso co mpatible with the A CP-8U trave l charge r . ACP -12U
[ 165 ] Referen ce information 19 Car accessorie s WIREL ESS CAR KIT CARK- 1 12 The wireless car kit supports Bluetooth 1.1 specification and offers a convenient handsf ree option in a car , wi th a rem ote control button . The kit includes the R emote Control Button CU W-2, Handsfree Unit HFW-1, Microphone HFM- 8 , HF Speaker HFS-12, and power cable PCU-4. MOBI LE HOLDER MBC -16 The MBC-16 Mobile Holder has ergonom ic release buttons and a swivel mount. It supports use w ith the mobile charger and Plug-in HF Car Kit. PLUG -IN HF CA R KIT PP H-1 This handsfree car kit in cludes a built-in speaker . It u ses the phone microphon e, but also has a con nector for an ex ternal micr ophone , HFM-8. HEADRES T HANDSFREE BH F-2 This headres t installs on a car headrest f or handsfree audio. The terminal charges with the LCH-9 or LCH-12 Cigarette Lighter charger . MICROPHONE HFM-8 This HFM-8 i s a s mall, directional microphone. Memory c ard The 64 MB memory card provides removable storage for your phone. The memor y card increases availa bl e memory and storage for your multimedia files like video clips, an d sound files, photos, me ssaging information, or to backup information from your phoneâÂÂs memory .
[ 166 ] 19 ⢠GLOSSARY Busine ss card A business ca rd is the same as an entry in the phone book. It may contain a name, phone n umber , and text ent ry . It ca n als o b e s ent to othe r dev ices . Call for war din g A netw ork se rvice s feat ure you u se to for ward incoming calls to another n umber . Call lis ts A list used to track numbers for incoming, outgoing, or missed calls. Call log A log that registers information about calls you make and receive. Call timer s Timers used to track the amount of time you spend on calls. Call wa itin g A network services f eature that enables your phone to beep while you are in the middle of a call. The beep lets you kn ow that someone else is callin g you. Elec tro nic s erial number (ESN) The identification number that is assigned to th e phone. T his number is located under the battery . In- cal l o ption s Features available f or use while you are in a ca ll. K eyguard Locks the keypad to preven t accidental key presses. K eypad tones The tone y ou hea r wh en you pre ss a ke y . Menu A list of choices you can make to change settings on your phon e or use various phone featu res. Predict ive text A method of entering in formation in your phone that uses a diction ary to predict, or guess, wh at you are writing.
[ 167 ] Referen ce information 19 Pro file A group of settings you can use to customize the way your phone works. Quick save A fast me thod for saving a nu mber . Ringing to ne The sound your phone makes when you receive a call. Ringing tones can be ringing sounds or s hort tunes. Scro ll b ar A bar that appears on the right side of the s creen when you scroll through the m ain menus. SMS The quick way to say s hor t m essa ge s ervice. Star t scr een Y our phon eâÂÂs idle scr een. Vo i c e m a i l A net work se rvices fe ature th at enables people who call and miss you to leave a voic e message on your phone. Wa r n i n g t o n e s Sounds your ph one makes during error conditions, during confirmations, when the bat te ry is low , and when you ne ed to re charge the battery .
[ 168 ] 19 ⢠T ECHNICAL INFORMATI ON Feature Sp ecif icatio n We i g h t 4.5 oz . (130 g ) with 850 mAh Li-lo n batter y Size 139 c c Frequency Rang e 3650 Lowb an d 9 00 880 - 9 15 MHz (TX ) 925 - 9 60 M Hz ( RX) Highband 1 900 1850 - 19 10 M H z (TX) 1930 - 19 90 MHz (RX) Frequency Rang e 3600 Lowb an d 8 50 824 - 8 49 M Hz ( T X) 869 - 8 94 M Hz ( RX) Highband 1 900 1850 - 19 10 M H z (TX) 1930 - 19 90 MHz (RX) T ransmitt er Ou tput Po w e r Lo wba nd up to 2W High ba nd up t o 1W Ba ttery V olt age 3.7 V no mi nal Operating T emperature -1 0ðC to 55 ðC ( 14ðF to 13 1ðF) Number of Channels 3650 194 lowband 299 highband Number of Channels 3600 124 lowband 299 highband
[ 169 ] Referen ce information 19 ⢠T RO UBLE SH OOTIN G Memory low When following notes are shown, the phone memory is low and you must start to delete some data: Not en ough memory to per form operation. Delet e so me da ta firs t. or Memory lo w . Delete so me data. In the even t follow the instructions below: ⢠T o view what k ind of data you ha ve and how m uch m emory the dif ferent data groups consume, go to Men u â To o l s â App. M an age r and select Opti on s â Memory details . ⢠T o avoid memory getting low , you should regularly delete, or transfer to your memory ca rd: ⢠messages from the Inbox, Dr afts, and Sent fold ers in Messaging ⢠retrieved e-mail messages f rom the phone memory ⢠saved br ow ser pa ges and ⢠images and photos in Images ⢠If you want to delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to rem ove the data. Clearing calendar memory - T o remove more than one event at a tim e, go to the Month view and select Optio ns â Delete entry â and delete either ⢠Before date - to delete all calen dar notes which take place be fore a certain date. Enter the date before w hich all calendar notes will be deleted, or ⢠All entr ies - to delete all calen dar notes. Erasin g log info rmat ion - T o erase all the log contents, Rece nt calls log, and Messaging delivery reports pe rmanently , go to Menu â Log and se lec t Opti ons â Clear log or go to Settin gs â Log dur ation â No log .
[ 17 0 ] 19 Dif ferent ways to sto re data : ⢠use PC S uite for Nok ia 3650 or P C Suite for No kia 3600 to take a backup copy of all data to your computer ⢠send images to your e-mail address and then save the images to your computer , or ⢠send data via infrared or Bluetooth to another device ⢠FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) Pho ne di sp lay Q. Why do mis sin g, di sco lor ed, or b righ t do ts ap pea r on the s cr een ev ery tim e I turn on my ph one ? A. This is an intrinsic characteristic of the active m atrix display . Y our phoneâÂÂs display contains multiple switching elements to con trol the pixels. A small number of missing, discolored, or bright dots on the screen m ight exist. Camera Q. Why does the image appear dark when I am taking a p i cture with the Cam era or vi ew ing i ma ges ? A. The display contrast setting af fects the appearance of images. Check the display contrast setting and adjust it to ligh ter . Go to Settin gs â Phone s ettings â Display â Con t ra s t . Q. Why d o imag es look smudgy? A. Che ck th at the camera lens protection window is clean. To clean th e window follow the instructions in â Use proper care and maintenanceâ on page 1 55. Bluetooth Q. Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluet ooth co nnecti on? A. If another device is pair ing with your ph one but not sending data, and leaves the connection open , then the only way to disconnect is to deactivate the Blu etooth link altogether . G o to Blue tooth and select the setting B l u e t o o t h â Off.
[ 17 1 ] Referen ce information 19 Q. Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs Bluet ooth enabled device. A. Check that both have activated Bluetooth. Chec k that the distance betw een the two d evices is not over 1 0 m eters or that there ar e no wal ls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in âÂÂHidden â mode. Mult imed ia mes sag ing Q. What should I d o when the pho ne tell s that it c annot rec eive a multimed ia message because me mory is full? A. The amount of me mory needed is indica te d in the error message: Not enough m emory to re trieve mes sage. Delete som e data f irst. T o v i e w w h a t kind of dat a you ha ve and h ow mu ch memor y th e diff erent data grou ps consum e, go to Menu â T ools â App. Manager and selec t Opt i o ns â Me mo ry de tail s . After you ha ve freed up mem ory , th e m ultimedia message center tries t o send the multimedia m essages aga in automa tically . Q. Wha t sho uld I do whe n th e ph one give s the m ess age: Unable to retrieve multimedia mess age. Network connection already in use. ? A. End all active data connections. Multimedia messages cannot be received if another data connection usin g a different gateway address is active for W AP o r e-mail . Q. H ow ca n I end th e data conne ction w hen the p hone s tarts a d ata conn ection ag ain and again? The notes : Retrie ving m essa ge or Tr y i n g to retri ev e mes sag e ag ai n are sho wn br ief ly . Wh at is hap penin g? A. The ph one is trying to retrieve a multimedia m essage from the multimedia messagin g center . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging have bee n defined corr e ctly an d that there are no mista kes in phone numbers or addr e sses. Go to Messa gi ng and se lec t Option s â Settin gs â Mult imedia mes sage . T o stop the ph one from making a data connection, you have the following options. Go to Messaging and select Opt io ns â Settings â Multim edia mess age .
[ 172 ] 19 ⢠Select On r e ceiving msg. â Defe r retrieval if y ou wa nt th e multimedia messaging center to sa ve the message t o be retrieved later , for example, after you have checked the settings. After this change, the phone still needs to send information n otes to the network. To retrieve the message later , sele ct Defer r e tri eva l . ⢠Select On r eceiving m sg. â decline mess age - if you want to decline all incoming multimedia messages. After this c h ange, the phone needs to send information notes to th e network and t he multimedia messaging center will de lete all multimedia messages that are waiting to be sent to you. ⢠Select Multimedia reception â Off - if you want to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. A fter this change the phone will no t ma ke any ne twor k co nne ctio ns r ela ted to mul t i media m essag ing . Images Q. I s the for mat of the imag e I am trying to open su ppor ted? A. See page 55 for further information on the suppor ted image formats. Messag ing Q. Why canâÂÂt I select a contact ? A. If you canno t select a contact in the Contacts directory , the contact card does not have a phone nu mber or an e- mail address. Add th e missing in formation to th e contact car d in the Con tacts application. Calendar Q. Why are the wee k numbers a re mi ssing? A. If you have chan ged the Calendar settings so that the week will start on some other day than Mon day then the week numbers will not be shown. Brow se r ser vic es Q. No valid a ccess poin t defi ned. Def ine one in W AP settin gs. A. In sert proper br owser setting s. Contact your service provider for instructions.
[ 173 ] Referen ce information 19 Log Q. Why do e s the log a ppe ar empt y? A. Y ou may have activated a filter and no communication events fitting that fil ter have b een logge d. T o se e all eve nts, se lec t Options â Filt er â All c ommunica tion . PC co nnectivity Q. Why d o I have problems in connecting the phone to my P C? A. Make sure that PC Suite for Nokia 3650 or PC Suite for Nokia 3600 i s installed and running on your PC. Se e the Installation guide for PC Suite on the CD-R OM in the âÂÂInstal lâ section. For furthe r informatio n on how to use t he PC Suite for Nokia 3 600 series phon es, see the PC su ite online help. Access code s Q. Wha t is my pass word f o r th e lock , PIN, or PU K code s? A. The de fault lock code is 1234 5 . If you f orget or lose the lock c ode contact your phone dealer . If y ou for get or l ose a PIN o r PUK cod e, or if you ha ve no t receive d such a code, contact your network service pr ovider . For information about passwords, conta ct your access point provider , for e xample, a co mmercial Inte rnet se rvice pr ovider (ISP ), WAP service provider , or n etwork operator . App lication not respondi ng Q. How do I clo se an application that is not responding? A. Open the appl ication switc hing windo w by pressin g and holdin g . Then scroll t o the application, and press to c lo se th e applica tion.
[ 174 ] Nokia One -Y ear Limited W arranty Nokia warrants th at the Nokia wireless phone and accessor ies are free from defects in m aterial and workmanship. The warranty period for the Phone (Radio) u nits and all a ccessories (excluding carry ca ses) is twelve (12) mo nt hs f rom t he d at e o f p urc hase O R fo urteen ( 14) mo nths fr om date of wh olesale shipment f rom Nokia, OR fifteen (1 5) months from the date of m anufacture by Noki a. The warranty per iod for the Carry cases is three (3) months from the date of pu rchase or five (5) months from the date of w holesale shipment from No kia. During the warranty pe riod, Nokia will, at its op tion, re pair or replace the defective product f ree of charge. Replacement Product may be either new or remanufactured or refurbished. However , if Nokia determines that the warranty conditions cannot be applied, the purchaser will be billed for the repair and sh ipping. EXCEPTIONS This warranty is subject to the f ollow ing exceptions: 1 Mobile or f ixed installation, which is not in accordance with the installation instructions, published by Nokia, w ill void the warranty . Damage caused by a r epair or an attempt to r epair by other than a service centre authorized by N okia will void the warranty; 2 This warran ty cov ers normal consumer use and does not cover defects or damage to an y product wh ich, in the sole opi nion of Nokia, has bee n subject to : imp roper storage, exp osure to moisture or dampn ess, expo sure to fire, sand, dirt, windsto rm, l ightnin g, o r e arthquake; to th eft, batte ry lea kage, u naut horize d modifi c at ion, m isus e, negl ect, abu se, m isapp licat ion, accident, alt eratio n, im prope r instal lation, malad justmen t of c onsumer controls , or ab normal operating con ditions, or which has been attributable to acts of God;
[ 175 ] Nokia One-Y ear L imited W arr anty 3 Fuses are not covered by the warranty; 4 This warr anty does not cover defects or dam ages caused by a product which is not appr oved by Nokia to be connected to its wireless ph one; 5 This warranty does not cover defects or damages caused by improper or defective func tion of th e carrier system or by inadequate signal reception by the antenna; 6 Removal and reinstallation costs are n ot covered by this warranty; 7 This war ranty is a pplicable only to pr oducts bought through Nokia Products Ltd. in Ajax, Ontario, Canada, and sold eith er in Canada or Bermud a. 8 Removal, alter ation, or de facing of the Serial Number Plate, or the accessory Date Code L abels will void the war ranty . In no eve nt shall No kia be liable for incid ental, sp ecia l, or conse quen tial damages, direct or in direct, loss of unanticipated benefits or profits, loss of use of its wireless tele phone, resulting f rom the use of its wireless phone, or its accessories, or ar ising from any breach of this warranty . CLAI M PROCE D URE In order to obtain warranty performa nce, return the def ective unit to the No kia Servi ce Cen tre wi th transportat ion charge s prepai d (Shippi ng of the r epaired unit may be paid by Nokia, in which case Nokia sh all have risk of loss or damage during this shipmen t). The proof of date of purc hase will be requir ed befo re in-war ranty serv ice is rendered. Maintenance and service may be obtained in an y auth oriz ed service centre in Canada. EXTENSION OF W ARRANTY PERIOD When a repair is made, an extra 90-day s ervice warranty is given to the labour and parts of the r epair concerned. If replacement of a faulty unit is applied, instead of r epairing, this 90-day service warranty is applied to the replaced u nit.
[ 176 ] Besides t h is 90 -day service w arranty , th e warranty repairs or r eplacements do not affect the origi nal warranty conditions, which ar e determined by the date of pu rchase. THE FOR EGOING WARRANT Y IS THE PURC HASERâÂÂS SO LE AND EXC LUSIVE REME D Y AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER W AR RAN TI ES, EXP RESS ED OR IMPLI ED, INCL UDIN G BUT NOT LIMITE D TO ANY IM PLI ED WARRA NTY OR MERC HANTABIL ITY O R FI TNESS FOR A PARTIC ULAR PUR POSE O R U SE. Some prov in ces do not allow limit ation s on how long an impli ed warran ty lasts, s o the above limita tion s m ay not apply to you. FOR W ARRANTY SERVICE LOCA TIONS, CON TACT Y OUR SERV ICE PR OVIDER/ R ET AILE R/ DEA LER O R DI RECT L Y T O: NOKI A PROD UC TS LI MITE D 60 1 Westne y Road Sou th Ajax, Ontario L1S 4N7 Tel: 905- 42 7-137 3 1-88 8- 226-6 54 2 W ebsite: www .nokia.ca For produ cts being return ed to Nokia or its au thorized service cen tres, the servic e provider/ retailer/dealer shall prepay sh ipping charges, taxes, duties, insur ance. Nokia shall h ave n o risk for loss or dam age durin g this sh ipment. NO TE: As warranty is automatically registered, no f urther action is required by the con sumer .
[ 177 ] In dex Numeri cs 1-t ouch d ia ling 52 Making ca lls 20 A Access codes 40 Access points 33 Settings 36 Settings, Advanced 38 Access points, glo ssary explana tion 33 Service provider , glossary explanation 33 Accessories Settings 46 Activating lou dspeaker Alarm clock 11 5 Snooze 11 5 Animations 60 Answering a ca ll 21 Automatic 46 Applications 127 Installing a Java application 128 Java a pp lication settin gs 129 Opening a Java application 129 Uninsta l ling a Java application 129 Attach ments Retrieving 91 Viewing 91 Audio files See Media files Automatic an swer 46 B Battery infor mation 154 Bluetooth 134 Cancelling pairing 138 Connection r equests 136 Con nect io n st atu s in dica to rs 137 Device icons 137 Dis conne c ting 139 F a ctory s et passcode 136 P airing 136 P airing requests 136 P asscode, glos sary explanation 136 Receiving data 139 Sending data 136 Settings 135 Short names for paired devices 138 Bookmark, glossary explanation 12 1 Browser browser a ccess points, see A ccess points Co nne cting 120 Emp ty ing me mo ry 125 Ending connections 125 Icons 12 1 W AP pages 11 9 XHTML pages 11 9 Brows ing 122 Bu fferin g Glossa ry e xplanation 66 Business card, glossary explanation 53 Sending 53 C Cache, glossary explanatio n 126 Emp ty ing 125 Calculator 111 Calendar 10 5 Al ar m 10 8
[ 178 ] Calendar entry fields 10 6 De let ing ma ny ent ri es si mul tan eous ly 169 Sending entries 10 9 Settings 10 8 Stopping a larms 10 9 Symbols 107 Views 107 Call cost limit Resetting the counter 27 Set by a service provider 26 Call register See Log Call restrictions 45 Calling 19 Calls 1-t ouch d ia ling 20 Ans we ri ng 21 Charging units 26 Conferen ce calls 20 Cost limit 26 Declining 21 Dialed 25 Duration 25 Forwarding 21 Int ern ati ona l 19 Mi ssed 24 Options during a call 22 Received 24 Settings 31 Settings fo r forwarding 23 Tra ns f er r i n g 23 Using the Cont acts directory 19 Camer a 55 Image types 57 Me mor y ca rd 58 Memory consumption 58 CD-ROM 14 1 Cell broadcas t messages 93 Cell info display 46 Certifi cates 43 T rust s e ttings 44 Char ges P acket da ta 35 Clear ing memo ry Calendar entries 169 Log information 169 Clip See Video recorder Clock 11 5 Al ar m 11 5 Settings 11 5 Composer 11 2 Adjusting s ound volume 11 2 Adjusting tem po 11 2 Changing tone s tyle 11 2 Listening to tones 11 2 Computer con nections 14 1 Conferen ce calls 20 Connection ind icators Bluetooth 137 Data c onnections 12 Infr ared 140 Connection settings 33 Contact cards Adding voice tags 50 Assigning 1-touch dialing numb ers 52 Assign ing de fault numbers and addre sses 49 Attaching ringing tones 52 Changing v oi ce tags 52 Deleting voice tags 52 Inserting pictures 49 Listening to voice tags 52 Removing ringing tones 53 Vo i c e t a g s 50
[ 179 ] Contact groups 53 Ad ding man y memb er s at the sa me time 54 Adding ringing ton es 52 Re moving memb ers 54 Converter 11 3 Adding exchange rates 11 4 Conve rtin g c urr encie s 11 4 Co nver ting un its 11 3 Copying Contacts between the SIM card and phone memory 47 T ext 75 Crea ting Contact car ds 47 Cutting T ext 75 D Data connections Indicators 12 Settings Date, settings 40 Declining calls 21 Definition of terms 168 Deleting Calendar entries 10 6 Contact car ds 48 Delivery reports 70 Dialed n umbers 25 Digital rights management 125 Disconnect i ng Bluetooth 139 Display s ettings 31 DNS, Domain Name Servic e , glossary explanation 38 DRM 125 D T MF tones, glossary explanation 23 E Editing Calendar entries 10 5 Contact cards 48 T ext 72 E-ma il 81 Attach ments 91 Deleting 92 Offl i ne 89 Online 88 Ope ning 90 Remote m ailbox 88 Retrieving from mailbox 89 Sa vin g a tt a ch me nts 92 Settings 97 Emergency calls 159 Era si ng Call cost counters 27 Log 27 Recent calls log 25 F Fa v o r i t e s 10 3 Add ing a sh ort cu t 10 3 File formats JAD and JAR 130 RealOne Player 65 SIS file 130 Supported 91 Fixed dialing 42 Folders, creating, organizing items to folders 16 Forwarding ca l ls 21 G Genera l settings 29 GIF animations 60 glossary 168 GPRS See P a cket data
[ 180 ] H Hand sfre e See Lou dsp e ake r Hea dset 17 High speed data, glossary explanation 34 HSCSD See High speed data I Idle state See Standby mode Image modes 57 Image s 59 Formats 61 Full screen 60 K eyboard shortcuts when viewing image s 61 Memory consumption 58 Moving the focal point 61 Org anizi ng 61 Picture messages folder 62 Receivin g from a d igital camera 59 Rotating 61 Viewing image details 61 Zooming 60 Indicators 11 Data connections 12 V oice message 33 Info se rvi ce 93 Infr ar ed 139 Installing software 13 1 Internet access points (IAP) See A ccess points Internet service provider , glossary explanation IP address, glossary e xplanation 38 ISDN, glossary ex planation 37 ISP See Internet ser vice provider J JAD and JAR files 130 Java See Applications. JPEG, glossary ex planation 55 L Lang ua ge for writing 30 Limit for call costs 26 Lock c ode 41 Log Era si ng co n ten ts 27 Filtering 27 Recent calls 24 Settings 28 Loopset Activatin g 46 Lou ds peake r Activatin g 17 T urning off 17 M Mailbox 88 Dis conne c ting 90 Making calls 19 Media files File formats 65 Glossa ry e xplanation 65 Playing 65 Sending 67 Me mor y ca rd 11 6 Camer a 58 Consumption 11 8 Format 11 8 P assw ord 11 8 Restore 11 8 Video clips 11 6
[ 18 1 ] Memory low T roubleshooting 169 Viewing memory consumption 1 1 8, 132 Me nu 13 Me nu k ey 13 Rearranging the m ain Menu 14 Messaging Delivery reports 70 Genera l settings 10 0 Inbox 83 Mai n v iew 69 Messages on the SIM card 93 Multimedia messages 78 My folders 87 Picture messages 77 Saving picture message graphics 62 Settings 94 T ext mes sages Writing e-mail 81 Writing text 72 Missed c alls 24 Modem Using your phone as a modem 14 1 Multimedia messages 78 Playing sounds 85 Re-playing sounds 85 Viewing 84 Mus i c fi le s See Media files My folders 87 N Notes 11 5 O Offline 89 Online 88 Org aniz ing Me nu 14 P P acket da ta 34 Connection time r 28 Data c ounter 28 Glossa ry e xplanation 34 Pricing 35 Settings 39 P airing, glossary explanation 136 P assw ord Me mor y ca rd 11 8 Pa s t i n g T ext 75 PC Co nne cting 14 1 Phonebook See Contacts Pictures Tak i n g 55 Viewing 60 PIN code 41 Unblocking 41 Playing video 64, 6 5 Predictive text input 73 Tips 74 T urning off 75 Prepaid SIM cards 26 Prices for packet data 35 Profiles 101 Renam ing 10 2 Settings 101 R RealOne Player⢠65 File formats 65 Media guide 66
[ 182 ] Streaming 66 V olu me control 66 Received calls 24 Receiving Data via Bluetooth 139 Data via infr ared 140 Ringing to nes , Operator logos , an d settin gs, see Smart messages Recent calls log 24 Call charging units 26 Call cost limit 26 Call costs 26 Call duration 25 Dialed n umbers 25 Erasing call lists 25 Missed c alls 24 Received calls 24 Reco rder , recordin g sound s 11 6 Recording video 63 Remote m ailbox 88 Disconnect i ng 90 Removing sof tware 132 Reports 70 Resolution, glossary explan ation 58 Retricting calls 45 Ringing tones 101 Adding a personal r inging tone 52 Mut ing 22 Receiving in a smart m essage 86 Settings 101 S Safety informa tion Care and maintenance 155 Electronic devices 156 Emergency calls 159 Operat ing environm ent 156 P otentially explosive atm os pher es 158 Traffi c s afe t y 156 Ve h i c l e s 158 Screen saver Settings 31 Search field 16 Security Access codes 40 Security certificates 43 Settings 40 Sending Calendar entries 10 9 Cont act cards, Busin ess cards 53 Data v ia Bluetoot h 136 Data v ia infrar ed 140 Media files 66 Video clips 64, 66 Service command editor 94 Service messages Service message settings 99 Service messages 87 Service provider for data conn e ction s, glossary expl anation Settings 29 Access codes 40 Accessories 46 Applications (Java â¢) 129 Bluetooth 135 Calendar 10 8 Call Forwarding 23 Call restrictions 45 Certifi cates 43 Clock 11 5 Connection 33 Date and time 40 Device settings 29 Display 31 E-ma il 97 Fixed dialing 42
[ 183 ] Ge neral settin gs for Messaging 10 0 Info se rvi ce 99 Lock code 41 Log 28 Messaging 94 PIN code 41 RealOn e P layer 67 Security 40 Service messages 99 Sounds 101 T ext mes sages 94 Video recorder 64 Shortcuts in F avorites 10 3 in Images 61 SIM card Copying names an d numbers 47 Me ssa ge s 93 Names an d nu mbe rs 28 Viewing messages on SI M 28 SIS file 130 Smart m essages Receiving 85 Sending 77 Snooze 11 5 Software Installing 13 1 Removing 132 T ran sferring a . SIS file to your phone 13 1 Sound files See Media files Sounds 101 Removing a personal ringing tone 53 Standby mode 10 Indicators 11 Settings 30 Stopping Alarm clock 11 5 Calen dar alarm 10 9 Streaming Glossa ry e xplanation 65 Switching between applications 14 Symbols for Calendar entries 10 7 T T aking pictures 55 T ext i nput 72 T ext me ssage servic e center Add ing ne w 95 T ext mes sages 76 See T ext mes sages Writing and sending T ext templates 87 Thumbnails In a cont act card 49 Time, settings 40 To -d o 10 9 To ne s 101 Ringing tone 102 Touch tone s 23 T raditional text input 72 T ransferring calls 23 T roubleshooting 169 U Uni t co nve rter 11 3 USSD commands 94 V vCar d format 53 Video clips See Media files Video player See RealOne Playerâ¢
[ 184 ] Video recorder 63 Me mor y ca rd 64 Saving video clips 63 Sending video clips 64 Settings 64 Video clips 64 Viewing GIF an imations 60 Image s 60 V oice dialing 50 V oice mailbox Changing the nu mber 20 Forwarding calls to voice mailbox 23 V oic e reco rd er 11 6 V oice tags 50 Adding 50 Changing 52 Deleting 52 List eni ng 52 Making ca lls 51 V olu me control 17 During a call 19 W W AP pages Browser 11 9 Writing 72 Predictive text input 73 Predictive text input, turning off 75 T raditional text input 72 X XHTML browser 11 9 XHTML glossary explanation 11 9 XHTML pages Browser 11 9 Z Zooming 60
[ 185 ] NO T ES
[ 186 ] 04/0 3 NO T ES